0% found this document useful (0 votes)

147 views470 pages

Easy Plan

The document provides detailed information about Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, including its features, functionalities, and usage guidelines. It emphasizes the proprietary nature of the documentation and outlines the legal restrictions on its use. Additionally, it offers insights into Siemens Digital Industries Software's role in product lifecycle management and digitalization in manufacturing processes.

Uploaded by

beteb74140

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

0% found this document useful (0 votes)

147 views470 pages

Easy Plan

Uploaded by

beteb74140

We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.

Available Formats

Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd

You are on page 1/ 470

TEAMCENTER

Easy Plan
EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3
Unpublished work. © 2023 Siemens

This Documentation contains trade secrets or otherwise confidential information owned by Siemens Industry Software Inc. or
its affiliates (collectively, “Siemens”), or its licensors. Access to and use of this Documentation is strictly limited as set forth in
Customer’s applicable agreement(s) with Siemens. This Documentation may not be copied, distributed, or otherwise disclosed
by Customer without the express written permission of Siemens, and may not be used in any way not expressly authorized by
Siemens.

This Documentation is for information and instruction purposes. Siemens reserves the right to make changes in specifications
and other information contained in this Documentation without prior notice, and the reader should, in all cases, consult
Siemens to determine whether any changes have been made.
No representation or other affirmation of fact contained in this Documentation shall be deemed to be a warranty or give rise to
any liability of Siemens whatsoever.
If you have a signed license agreement with Siemens for the product with which this Documentation will be used, your use of
this Documentation is subject to the scope of license and the software protection and security provisions of that agreement.
If you do not have such a signed license agreement, your use is subject to the Siemens Universal Customer Agreement, which
may be viewed at https://www.sw.siemens.com/en-US/sw-terms/base/uca/, as supplemented by the product specific terms
which may be viewed at https://www.sw.siemens.com/en-US/sw-terms/supplements/.
SIEMENS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS DOCUMENTATION INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED
TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY. SIEMENS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR
PUNITIVE DAMAGES, LOST DATA OR PROFITS, EVEN IF SUCH DAMAGES WERE FORESEEABLE, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED
TO THIS DOCUMENTATION OR THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN IT, EVEN IF SIEMENS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGES.

TRADEMARKS: The trademarks, logos, and service marks (collectively, "Marks") used herein are the property of Siemens or other
parties. No one is permitted to use these Marks without the prior written consent of Siemens or the owner of the Marks,
as applicable. The use herein of third party Marks is not an attempt to indicate Siemens as a source of a product, but is
intended to indicate a product from, or associated with, a particular third party. A list of Siemens’ Marks may be viewed at:
www.plm.automation.siemens.com/global/en/legal/trademarks.html. The registered trademark Linux® is used pursuant to a
sublicense from LMI, the exclusive licensee of Linus Torvalds, owner of the mark on a world-wide basis.

About Siemens Digital Industries Software

Siemens Digital Industries Software is a global leader in the growing field of product lifecycle management (PLM),
manufacturing operations management (MOM), and electronic design automation (EDA) software, hardware, and services.
Siemens works with more than 100,000 customers, leading the digitalization of their planning and manufacturing processes. At
Siemens Digital Industries Software, we blur the boundaries between industry domains by integrating the virtual and physical,
hardware and software, design and manufacturing worlds. With the rapid pace of innovation, digitalization is no longer
tomorrow’s idea. We take what the future promises tomorrow and make it real for our customers today. Where today meets
tomorrow. Our culture encourages creativity, welcomes fresh thinking and focuses on growth, so our people, our business, and
our customers can achieve their full potential.

Support Center: support.sw.siemens.com

Send Feedback on Documentation: support.sw.siemens.com/doc_feedback_form

Contents

What's new in Easy Plan 6.3 1-1

Easy Plan overview

Overview of Teamcenter Easy Plan ────────────────── 2-1
What is Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO? ─────────────── 2-1
What is Process Planning for ETO? ─────────────────── 2-2
What is Manufacturing-BOM Manager? ──────────────── 2-3
What is Teamcenter Manufacturing Access? ────────────── 2-3
What is Teamcenter Easy Plan Deployment? ────────────── 2-3

Getting started with Easy Plan

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO data structure ──────────── 3-1
Plant BOP prerequisites and data requirements ───────────── 3-5
Managing data ─────────────────────────── 3-6
Check data in and out ────────────────────────── 3-6
Edit properties for a selected process or operation ────────────── 3-6
Edit object properties in Microsoft Excel ─────────────────── 3-7
Copy and paste reference documents to an operation ───────────── 3-9
Add URL links to an operation ─────────────────────── 3-12
View URL links in an operation ────────────────────── 3-13
Overview of Teamcenter Manufacturing Access ──────────── 3-14
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access prerequisites ─────────────── 3-14
Run Teamcenter Manufacturing Access in the Author workspace ─────── 3-14
Study overview ───────────────────────────── 3-15
Business processes involving Teamcenter Manufacturing Access ──────── 3-16

Create and manage Work Packages

Create work package ───────────────────────── 4-1
Navigating planning tasks in work packages ───────────────── 4-1
Work package structure ────────────────────────── 4-8
Create a work package ────────────────────────── 4-10
Search for and open a work package ──────────────────── 4-12
Find a work package or process ────────────────────── 4-14
Search for objects in the BOE tree ───────────────────── 4-15
Search for objects in the BOP tree ───────────────────── 4-17
Work with saved searches ──────────────────────── 4-18
Process Planning for electronics ────────────────────── 4-20
Manage work package ─────────────────────── 4-22
Author the BOE ───────────────────────────── 4-22
Add a configurator context to a work package ──────────────── 4-26
Add a product structure to a work package ───────────────── 4-28
Create a product BOP ────────────────────────── 4-29

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3

© 2023 Siemens
Plant BOPs ─────────────────────────────── 4-30
Reusing a work package based on object values ─────────────── 4-34
Apply a production program ─────────────────────── 4-34
Add structure ──────────────────────────── 4-37
Product structures and data ─────────────────────── 4-37
Product manufacturing information (PMI) ───────────────── 4-48

Manage MBOM
EBOM and MBOM alignment commands ──────────────── 5-1
EBOM/MBOM assignment status icons ───────────────── 5-2
Find parts or assemblies in the EBOM or MBOM ───────────── 5-3
Find an assigned MBOM or EBOM element ─────────────── 5-5
Set advanced accountability check rules ──────────────── 5-6
Identifying assignment statuses of packed EBOM lines ───────── 5-8
Match EBOM and MBOM table properties ─────────────── 5-9
Assign parts to the MBOM ────────────────────── 5-11
Check out MBOM parts and assemblies ────────────────── 5-11
Assign and remove EBOM elements in an MBOM ────────────── 5-12
Run a complete EBOM-MBOM assignment comparison ──────────── 5-13
Partially compare EBOM elements in an MBOM ─────────────── 5-15
Run assign and remove actions in the background ────────────── 5-17
Understanding domain subassemblies ─────────────────── 5-19
Pairing a usage EBOM with an MBOM ─────────────────── 5-20
Add a serial or lot number to a part or tool ───────────────── 5-21
Change the quantity of parts ─────────────────────── 5-22
Add manufacturing specific components to MBOM ───────────── 5-24
Restructure the MBOM ─────────────────────── 5-28
Restructure an MBOM ────────────────────────── 5-28
Cut, copy, and paste MBOM elements ─────────────────── 5-28
Edit MBOM properties in Microsoft Excel ────────────────── 5-29
Align separate MBOM subassemblies to an EBOM ────────────── 5-31
Aligning the EBOM to the MBOM ─────────────────── 5-33
Access EBOM-MBOM alignment data ─────────────────── 5-33
EBOM-MBOM Alignment page ────────────────────── 5-33
Partially comparing in-scope elements with no assignment domains ────── 5-36
Revise manufacturing parts or assemblies ───────────────── 5-37
Collaborate using Share ─────────────────────── 5-37
Share collaboration in Teamcenter Easy Plan ──────────────── 5-37
Share collaboration in Teamcenter Easy Plan ──────────────── 5-40
Release an MBOM assembly or entire MBOM ───────────── 5-43

High level work breakdown

Author a process plan ──────────────────────── 6-1
Search for a process without expanding the BOP in the high level planning page
──────────────────────────────── 6-3

4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Manage BOP
Product assignment ───────────────────────── 7-1
Product BOP functional planning ────────────────────── 7-1
Plant BOP process area planning ────────────────────── 7-8
Viewing and analyzing consumption status data ────────────── 7-47
Create or update a DIPA in a work package ────────────── 7-58

Line balancing and detailed timing

Create process resources ─────────────────────── 8-1
Process resources and operators ────────────────────── 8-1
Assign operations from Product BOP to stations ───────────── 8-6
Operations ─────────────────────────────── 8-6
Plan plant BOP operations ──────────────────────── 8-11
Create activities and define roll-up time on operations ───────── 8-15
Time management ─────────────────────────── 8-15
Generate reports ──────────────────────────── 8-24
Balance the line ────────────────────────── 8-25
Edit operation frequency ───────────────────────── 8-25
Reorder the activities ────────────────────────── 8-25
Edit or delete activities ────────────────────────── 8-26
View production program information ─────────────────── 8-27
View object details ─────────────────────────── 8-27
View operation details ────────────────────────── 8-28
Manage station comments during line balancing ────────────── 8-29
Author production program and evaluate balancing by variants ───── 8-30
Product configurations ────────────────────────── 8-30

Layout planning
Create, load, revise, and release study ───────────────── 9-1
Use Teamcenter tools to manage study ─────────────────── 9-1
Use NX tools to manage study ────────────────────── 9-14

Simulation verification
Open TcMA from Process Simulate ────────────────── 10-1
Use Teamcenter Manufacturing Access while validating a process ───────
10-1
Starting Process Simulate (connected) from the desktop ───────────
10-2
Create study in Process Simulate ─────────────────── 10-3
Study Manager overview ───────────────────────── 10-3
Modifying session settings information in Study Manager ────────── 10-4
Check out studies from Study Manager ────────────────── 10-5
Create a study in Process Simulate ───────────────────── 10-6
Edit a study in Process Simulate ────────────────────── 10-7
Remove study from Process Simulate ─────────────────── 10-9
Open a study using the Study Manager command ───────────── 10-10
Set Study Manager status ──────────────────────── 10-10
Resource Search viewer ───────────────────────── 10-11
Manufacturing feature search from Process Simulate ──────────── 10-16

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5

© 2023 Siemens
Load study ──────────────────────────── 10-22
Locate a study using Study Manager ─────────────────── 10-22

Reporting
Release process ─────────────────────────── 11-1
Authoring a process plan without work instructions ─────────────
11-1
Attachments ──────────────────────────── 11-6
Attachments ────────────────────────────── 11-6
Work instructions authoring ──────────────────── 11-11
Getting started with work instructions ────────────────── 11-11
Authoring work instructions ─────────────────────── 11-15
Authoring a process plan with work instructions ────────────── 11-28
How do I? ─────────────────────────────── 11-68

Using the 3D panel viewer

Displaying content in the gallery viewer ─────────────── 12-1
View 3D models ────────────────────────── 12-3
View image captures and thumbnails ───────────────── 12-4
View part or assembly summary properties ────────────── 12-6
Select multiple objects in the Viewer panel ────────────── 12-6
Select objects by volume ────────────────────── 12-8
Show or hide multiple assembly, part, or process lines in the Viewer panel
─────────────────────────────── 12-10
Verify MBOM consumption of many parts ────────────── 12-11
Rename graphic 3D screen shot visuals ─────────────── 12-12

Managing effectivities
Set occurrence effectivity on a process or operation ────────── 13-1
Validate occurrence effectivity for an operation ──────────── 13-1
Manage multiple occurrence effectivities ─────────────── 13-4
Add occurrence effectivities to MBOM container elements ─────── 13-5
Edit and delete occurrence effectivities from MBOM container elements ─ 13-7
Understanding effectivity, equivalent assignment scope, and validation
preferences ───────────────────────── 13-7
Manage equivalent assignment scopes across EBOMs and MBOMs ─── 13-11
Update equivalent assignment scopes ──────────────── 13-16
Enable net effectivity ──────────────────────── 13-19
Validate effectivity of modified EBOM elements in MBOM ─────── 13-22
Run process data validation checks ───────────────── 13-25

Variants
Variant support ─────────────────────────── 14-1
Configure classic variants ────────────────────── 14-1
Edit variant conditions for an operation ────────────────── 14-1
Set the variant condition for operations ────────────────── 14-2

6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Product Configurator variants ──────────────────── 14-3

Analyze variant formulas defined for an operation ────────────── 14-3
Define variant formulas for operations ─────────────────── 14-4
Copy defined variant formulas to another operation ───────────── 14-7
Configure variants for a process station ──────────────── 14-9
Configure variants for MBOM elements ──────────────── 14-9
Filter by product variant ────────────────────── 14-11
Compare and propagate variants in the plant BOP ────────── 14-12
Analyze variant time distribution ────────────────── 14-13

Submit to workflow
Submit objects to a workflow ──────────────────── 15-1
Submit a work package to a workflow ───────────────── 15-2

Work with change notices

ECNs, MCNs, and CNs ──────────────────────── 16-1
Create an MCN based on an ECN ─────────────────── 16-1
Align domain subassemblies using change management ──────── 16-3
Associate a work package with a change notice ──────────── 16-5
Using the Change Summary panel ────────────────── 16-8
Verify notices in the Change Summary panel ───────────── 16-13
Propagate changes from the EBOM to the MBOM ─────────── 16-15
Create an MCN based on an ECN ────────────────── 16-16
Locate processes, operations, and product reviews affected by change notices
─────────────────────────────── 16-18
Remove or restore redundant impact indications ─────────── 16-19
Track manufacturing structure changes associated with change notices 16-23

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7

© 2023 Siemens
8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3
© 2023 Siemens
1. What's new in Easy Plan 6.3
Below are all new features released in earlier patch releases and integrated with Easy Plan 6.3.

Version 6.3

• New Select All and Insert Feature commands are now available in Process Simulate to quickly assign
weld features in the Mfg Search dialog box.

• The Open Variant Formula command is now available from the MBOM panel of the EBOM-
MBOM Alignment page. This feature lets you configure variant conditions on MBOM nodes just as
you would on operations from the Process Planning page.

• Teamcenter Manufacturing Access now has a checkin and checkout feature. This feature helps you
verify that no one else is editing a study before you load it, and allows you to lock study data so that
no one else can change it while you work with the study.

Versions 6.1.6, 6.2.1, and 6.3

• When a part referenced in a product view has equivalent assignment scope, and changes occur to its
graphical parameters such as the colors of sections and lines, the equivalent part and its associated
product views are now updated when you open the original part in Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization.
This feature saves you from having to manually create and manage visual work instructions, with
support for objects referenced by the bill of process (BOP), such as consumed or referenced parts and
assemblies.

Note:
• For the replacement to work, data must be configured as 100% and Teamcenter Lifecycle
Visualization must be loaded from the Work Instructions Authoring page.

• The term equivalent assignment scope replaced dash rolls beginning with Teamcenter Easy
Plan 6.2.

• Now, you can consume parts and assemblies to a single operation or to multiple operations
during planning. You can also consume a single part to multiple operations.

• You can view numerical control (NC) program files and work instructions and submit them to a
workflow.

• You can create a numerical control (NC) machining operation in Easy Plan, and then allocate and
assign parts and resources to that operation from the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 1-1

Versions 6.1.6 and 6.3

• Using an engineering change notice (ECN), you can manually remove or restore redundant impact
indications from operations in a bill of process (BOP) if such indications do not require action.

• You can select objects in the Viewer panel by 3D volume. Volumetric selection lets you select parts
that are partially or fully covered by other parts in the viewer, based on the selected 3D area.

Versions 6.1.7 and 6.2.1

• You can now set occurrence effectivity for multiple processes or operations in a single step.

• You can locate a process in the BOP without manually expanding the BOP.

Versions 6.1.7, 6.2.1, and 6.3

Subassemblies with no connected assignment domain relations could not previously be compared in
the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page. You can now partially compare subassemblies with no defined
assignment domains.

Versions 6.1.8 and 6.2.3

You can compare effectivity between an assembly and its consumed parts to identify and correct any
net effectivity mismatches between the BOM and the BOP.

Versions 6.1.8 and 6.3

• By default, the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page now displays the Overview panel when you click
Show Summary in the EBOM or MBOM toolbars.

1-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
If you navigate to the 3D tab and refresh the screen, or if the page is reopened or reset, the
EBOM-MBOM Alignment page defaults to the Overview panel.

• You can view the full bill of equipment (BOE) structure in a tree view, and efficiently assign objects
from it to the bill of process (BOP).

Version 6.2

• Now you can create a process resource in the plant BOP tree and then assign operations to it. The
process resource can be an operator or a machine.

• By default, Teamcenter Easy Plan derives the configurator context for a work package from the
engineering bill of materials (EBOM). However, during process planning you can manually add a
configurator context to a work package.

Versions 6.2.1 and 6.3

• To ensure that the configuration context of a shared study matches the configuration context of a
source bill of process (BOP) in a work package, you or your administrator must set the value of the
preference MEShareConfigurationContextToStudy to Mfg0MEShdStudy.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 1-3

Example:
If the configuration context of a plant or classic BOP in the source CC changes from Latest
Working to Any Status: Working, shared studies in a shared CC also reflect the change from
Latest Working to Any Status: Working.

• When you create a work package, a new option called Add MBOM using Mirror is available when
you add a new MBOM to a work package on the Manage Work Package page.

Based on existing Teamcenter preferences, the Add MBOM using Mirror command adds a linked
MBOM to your work package by mirroring an EBOM structure.

For more information on MBOM mirroring preferences, see the Easy Plan Deployment help in Support
Center.

• The Net Effectivity Mismatch (Outside Focus) icon , which you click to locate the external location
of an object that is assigned outside the current focus in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, did not
previously work. Clicking the icon now reports the external location.

The Net Effectivity Mismatch (Outside Focus) feature is displayed only if you or your administrator
have set the value of the preference MBM_HideOutOfScopeIndications to false.

• On the Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages, you can now assign operations
to a process resource such as a worker, fixture, or robot. In the Editor panel on the Work
Instructions Authoring page, you can also add work instructions to process resources.

• You could not previously assign an EBOM assembly to MBOM lines with associated manufacturing
representations. You can now choose to assign EBOM or manufacturing representation assemblies
to an MBOM.

Version 6.2.1

You can create and update a dynamic in-process assembly (DIPA) in a work package in Teamcenter Easy
Plan.

1-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The Product BOP Authoring page is enhanced to include most of the change management capabilities
that are on the Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages.

Active change notices that are applied to elements on the Product BOP Authoring page track the
changes made on the MBOM or product BOP, and are retained when you navigate between different
pages, or are updated when you change impacted elements. All actions you perform on other pages are
tracked under the active change notice.

Note:
The Product BOP Authoring page does not currently contain a Set Impact as Handled option.
To correct impacted elements, you must make changes on another process page such as Process
Planning or Line Balancing. Once such elements are corrected, impacted statuses are no longer
visible on the Product BOP Authoring page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 1-5

Like the Process panel or tab on the Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages, the
Product BOP panel on the Product BOP Authoring page now displays:

• A change tracking indicator that displays the name of the engineering change notice (ECN) or
manufacturing change notice (MCN).

• A Show Consumption and Impact State option to turn process and operation impact notification
indicators on or off.

• A Calculate Impact on Product Views option to similarly turn impacted product views on or off.

1-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
2. Easy Plan overview
Overview of Teamcenter Easy Plan
Teamcenter Easy Plan solutions help you manage and optimize your manufacturing data with task
oriented and easy to use manufacturing web solutions, all while staying connected with engineering
and execution. Since Teamcenter Easy Plan works in the Active Workspace client for Teamcenter,
Teamcenter Easy Plan solutions help you leverage existing product and process information as well
as share cross-departmental workflows. This allows you to plan and optimize your manufacturing BOM
and process plan, capture shop floor feedback, and manage changes effectively. Teamcenter Easy Plan
solutions work in the Active Workspace client for Teamcenter.

Benefits

• Enable intuitive user experience and ease of use for process planning.

• Standardize and reuse best practices.

• Develop process plans that reflect plant level production scenarios.

• Strong configuration and change management for manufacturing data.

• Provide clear and up-to-date operator instructions.

• Optimize cycle time and production rates.

Process Planning for Process Planning for Manufactu

BTO/BTS/CTO ETO ring-BOM
Manager

Teamcenter Teamcenter Easy

Manufacturing Access Plan Deployment

What is Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO?

Manufacturing engineers use Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO to perform assembly planning tasks,
from high level to detailed planning. It is designed for build-to-order (BTO), build-to-stock (BTS),
and configure-to-order (CTO) domains, such as automotive and white goods (large home appliances)
industries, as well as other industries.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 2-1

Electronics engineers use Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO for the systems integration of the
electronics process planning tasks of Teamcenter Easy Plan and those of Valor Process Preparation
Software. The systems integration is available as a dedicated, optional feature of Process Planning for
BTO/BTS/CTO.

Use Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO to:

• Author the bill of equipment (BOE).

• Create the process plan based on the plant structure, and define the material flow.

• Author operations and assign parts and tools to the operations.

• Author detailed time analysis.

• Perform line balancing in the plant BOP.

• Create alternative process plans.

Although not a mandatory part of the solution, there is an optional capability for central assembly
planning based on the enterprise BOP, including the creation of product BOP, allocating operations to
the plant BOP, and authoring additional plant-specific content.

What is Process Planning for ETO?

Process Planning for ETO is used to do process planning and create work instructions for the shop
floor. It lets you author the plan and the documentation for the manufacturing bill of material (MBOM)
assemblies. It also lets you write instructions and assign visual illustrations to those processes and
operations. Process Planning for ETO is designed for engineer-to-order (ETO) domains, with a focus on
the aerospace and defense industries.

Process Planning for ETO uses structures that are contained in an existing or just-created work package:

• Product structures that consist of parts that make up the physical elements needed to assemble the
product.

• Process structures that contain processes and operations that define the assembly process.

Unlike the Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO solution, which is based on the plant structure, a process
structure for Process Planning for ETO is based on the MBOM structure and used to document the
instructions for each assembly.

Once the work package is defined, you can perform the following tasks:

• Author the work instructions for an MBOM assembly, including texts and visuals, which generates a
process plan.

2-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Author and detail the generated process plan.

What is Manufacturing-BOM Manager?

Manufacturing-BOM Manager is a task-based solution for defining and managing the manufacturing
bill of material (MBOM) and reconciling the engineering changes coming in the engineering bill
of material (EBOM). Manufacturing-BOM Manager implements changes easily without delays, and
performs validations to ensure accuracy.

Manufacturing-BOM Manager gives you:

• Easy accountability and reconciliation between EBOM and MBOM

• Guided change management

• Configuration using variants and effectivity

• 3D visualization of EBOM and MBOM

What is Teamcenter Manufacturing Access?

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access provides solutions for various manufacturing planning tasks and
business processes. It is designed as a cross-industry tool; use it in any environment where Process
Simulate is used. Teamcenter Manufacturing Access gives you the following:

• One unified environment for Process Simulate users, who are no longer required to use a Teamcenter
rich client to access data.

• The ability to create studies in the Teamcenter rich client.

• The ability to search for and load studies in the Teamcenter rich client, Process Simulate, and NX
Fixture Planner.

• The ability to search Teamcenter and insert classified and non-classified resources (items) into the
current Process Simulate session.

• The ability to search Teamcenter and insert manufacturing features into the current Process Simulate
session.

What is Teamcenter Easy Plan Deployment?

The installation and configuration information for all Teamcenter Easy Plan solution workspaces and
components is contained in a single deployment deliverable.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 2-3

• Common installation steps for all workspaces and components using Teamcenter Environment
Manager (TEM).

• Workspace-specific and component-specific installation steps using TEM.

• Common installation steps for all workspaces and components using the Deployment Center.

• Workspace-specific and component-specific installation steps using the Deployment Center

• Configuration information specific to each workspace and component.

2-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
3. Getting started with Easy Plan
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO data structure
If you are an administrator or have administrator rights, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO can use
process objects or specific object types to create the plant BOP process structure:

• Product BOP

The product bill of process (BOP) object contains all operations to build a product organized in
functional groups

• Functional Group

A functional group can refer to a specific functional group object type or a process, such as an
MEProcess object, that is used as a functional group. For example, you could create a functional group
named Car Interior.

• Plant BOP

The plant BOP is an enterprise bill of process (BOP) object type that represents all processes or
operations that are performed at a specific plant to build a product. This object is equivalent to the
Plant type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• Process Line

The Process Line enterprise BOP object type is a child of the plant BOP. This object is equivalent to the
Line type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• Process Area

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-1

The Process Area enterprise BOP object type is a child of the Process Line. This object is equivalent to
the process area type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• Process Station

The Process Station enterprise BOP object type is a child of the Process Area. This object is equivalent
to the Station type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• (Optional) Process Resource

The Process Resource enterprise BOP object type is child of the Process Station. It is used to group
operations in a station that are assigned to a specific active resource such as a worker or robot. For
example, Station 10 could contain these two process resources: Left side worker and Right side
worker. This object is equivalent to the Process Resource type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• MEOP (operation)

Each process station contains MEOP (operation) objects that describe the high-level tasks to be
performed and can be sequenced. For example, the Station 10 process station could contain this
operation: Add Instrument Panel. This object is equivalent to the operations type in Process Planning
for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• Ept0LibraryActivity (Activity)

Each activity contains activity objects that describe the more detailed tasks to be performed in the
station and can be sequenced. For example, you could create these activities to describe how to insert
an instrument panel into a car: Maneuver Lift Assist Holding Instrument Panel through Car Door,
Secure Instrument Panel to Car, and Remove Empty Lift Assist from Car. This object is equivalent
to the Activity type in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• Documents

Reference documents can be added to operations and activities.

To create these object types, select the desired parent object in Manufacturing Process Planner, then
follow a similar procedure as was defined for creating the plant BOP object.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO data is organized in four layers based on role and level of detail.

3-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Work The product, product BOP, plant BOP, plant, and production program (variants) are
package gathered together into one work package (collaboration context).
Product BOP At this level, functional groups are used to categorize operations according to the area
of the product they assemble. A product BOP is optional; you do not have to include
one in the work package.
Plant BOP At this level, the plant is divided into work areas, such as lines, zones, and stations,
process area that are used to build the product. Also, station operations are created and allocated to
planning process stations and process resources.
Plant BOP At the lowest level, operation content is planned. This includes the activities, parts, and
operation tools that are needed to perform the operation.
planning

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO can use enterprise bill of process (BOP) object types:

• Product BOP

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-3

The product BOP object contains all operations to build a product, organized in functional groups. A
product BOP is optional; you do not have to include one in the work package.

• Functional Group

A functional group can refer to a specific functional group object type or a process object that is used
as a functional group. For example, you could create a functional group named Car Interior.

• Plant BOP

The plant BOP object contains all operations performed at a specific plant to build a product.

• Process Area

The plant BOP contains a hierarchy of process areas, such as process lines, process areas, or process
station objects. The lowest level of this hierarchy is the process station where the work is performed.

• (Optional) Process Resource

A process resource object is used to group operations in a station that are assigned to a specific
active resource such as a worker or robot. For example, Station 10 could contain these two process
resources: Left side worker and Right side worker.

• Operation

Each process station object contains operations that describe the high-level tasks to be performed.
Operations can be sequenced. For example, the Station 10 process station could contain the
operation Add Instrument Panel.

• Time object

Each operation contains time objects that describe the more detailed tasks performed by the
operation. Time objects in an operation can be sequenced. For example, you could create these
activities to describe how to insert an instrument panel into a car: Maneuver Lift Assist Holding
Instrument Panel through Car Door, Secure Instrument Panel to Car, and Remove Empty Lift
Assist from Car.

Note:
Each level in the structure is represented by objects that contain properties. Two typical properties
are What (the name) and Time. However, each object type could contain different standard and
custom attributes.

3-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Plant BOP prerequisites and data requirements

Prerequisite

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO runs on top of Active Workspace and must be connected to a
Teamcenter database. See the the Active Workspace Deployment documentation for details.

Data requirements

• Access to data is controlled by a user ID assigned to each user. The user ID grants access to portions of
the database based on the user’s assigned groups and roles. A Teamcenter administrator must set up
the user ID prior to using Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

• You can author data in the Teamcenter rich client as well as Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.
Plant BOP data created in the Teamcenter rich client can be used seamlessly in Process Planning for
BTO/BTS/CTO, as long as the required object hierarchy is followed. Based on your business processes,
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO data can include product, process, plant, and production program
information, or you may begin with an empty database.

• To assign parts to operations in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO, you must have one product
structure in the work package.

• To assign tools to operations in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO, you must have one plant structure
in the work package. You must also use Manufacturing Process Planner to assign the station from the
plant structure to the process station in the plant BOP before you assign tools to operations.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-5

Managing data

Check data in and out

The Check In and Check Out feature ensures that only one user can edit data at once within a
multi-user environment. When you check out data at an assembly level, the checkout locks the data so
other users cannot modify it.

Note:
You must have write access to check out data and edit it.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

If you attempt to load data that is checked out, an indication displays at the top of the screen, and
lists the user to whom the data is checked out. You can check out the data after the user checks it
in.

2. Select the assembly or process that you want to check out.

3. Click Check Out .

A recursive check out is performed. All items within the assembly are checked out, and the data is
locked so that other users cannot edit it.

Note:
If any part of the data you want to work with is checked out, a message is displayed and the
check out action is canceled.

4. Author work instructions or perform process planning tasks as needed.

5. Click Check in .

All items within the assembly are checked in, and the data is unlocked so that other users can access it.

Edit properties for a selected process or operation

You can use the Information tab to edit properties for operations and processes.

3-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
By default, the Information tab is read-only. Your Teamcenter administrator must enable this
feature before you can use it.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. On the Work Instructions tab, expand the structure and select the process or operation for which
you want to edit properties.

3. Select the Information tab, and click Start Edits

Process Planning for ETO highlights each field in which you can edit properties.

4. Edit property information for the object.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator may enable different properties for editing than the ones
shown in this example. Contact your Teamcenter administrator if you have any questions.

5. Click Save or Cancel Edits .

If the object has a status of Released and you save it, Process Planning for ETO automatically
prompts you to create a new item revision. Click Revise or Cancel.

Edit object properties in Microsoft Excel

You can export properties from a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) or process area as a Microsoft
Excel (.xslm) spreadsheet file. You can then modify the properties in Excel and import the file back in to
update the original structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-7

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and do one of the following:

• Select the work package and in the TASKS list, click EBOM-MBOM Alignment task.

• Navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Do one of the following:

• If you are working in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the MBOM panel, select the
structure that contains the properties that you want to modify in Excel.

• If you are working in the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page, in the
Process tab or panel, select the process that contains the properties that you want to modify in
Excel.

3. Do one of the following:

• If you are working in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the MBOM toolbar, select Excel
Round-trip → Export to Excel .

• If you are working in the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page, in the
Process toolbar, select Show Menu → Excel Round-trip → Export to Excel .

4. In the Export To Excel dialog box, do the following.

a. In the SETTINGS group, select the Allow Structure Changes in Excel check box to make
line properties editable in Excel.

Note:
The Include ID as Hyperlink and Include Outline Numbers check boxes, if displayed,
are not functional.

b. In the PROPERTIES group, do one of the following.

• From the Template list, select an Excel template.

• Select Customize and select a specific property that you want to review or modify from the
list.

(Optional) Select a property and from the SELECTED PROPERTIES toolbar, do any of the
following.

3-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Move Up Move the selected row up in the list for quicker access in
the future.
Move Down Move the selected row down in the list for quicker access
in the future.
Add Properties Add additional properties to be edited in Excel by clearing
any check boxes that you do not want to include from a
list of all available properties and then clicking Add.

c. Ignore the Run in Background check box, it is not functional.

d. Click Export.

In your browser download location, an .xlsm file is generated.

5. Navigate to the file location and open the file in Excel.

6. Edit and modify properties as needed.

Warning:
Although you can delete an object by deleting a row in Excel, restructure the order of objects
by cutting and pasting lines in Excel, or add a new object by copying and pasting a line
and defining a unique ID and name for the new line in the Tc_ObjectID and Revision Name
columns, these actions may yield unexpected results and are not recommended.

7. Save and close the Excel file.

8. Do one of the following.

• From the MBOM toolbar, select Excel Round-trip → Import Changes .

• From the Process toolbar, select Show Menu → Excel Round-trip → Import Changes .

9. In the Import Changes dialog box, click Choose File, navigate to, select, and import the Excel file.

10. Select the Overwrite Conflicts check box and then click Import.

The process structure is updated with your modifications.

11. Close the Import Changes dialog box.

Copy and paste reference documents to an operation

Reference documents, such as internal work procedures, design drawings, or information for validation
or resource guidance, can have a separate, external lifecycle than operations. You can copy and paste

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-9

reference documents of different types from various locations to an operation. Since an operation can
be reused in multiple assemblies, pasting reference documents is an efficient method of reusing them
across work package assemblies and processes.

Note:
If the operation or its parents are checked out by another user, the paste command is not
available.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, or create a work
package and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

By default, parts are displayed in the Assembly panel or tab but nothing is visible in the Viewer
panel.

2. From your Home, Favorites, or My Active Folders page, search for documents by filtering your
search to the Documents category.

For more information on using the Search box, see Active Workspace Fundamentals .

3. In the search results, do one of the following.

• To select nonconsecutive documents in the list, press Ctrl and select each document that you
want to copy to a specific operation.

• To select consecutive documents in the list, press Shift and then select the first and last
documents that you want to copy to a specific operation.

3-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Right-click a selected document and choose Copy to copy them all.

5. Navigate to the Process Planning or the Work Instructions Authoring page that contains the
operation to which you want to add the documents, and in the Editor or Process panel, select the
relevant operation.

Tip:
You can open this page in another tab or window to make this process easier.

6. In the editor properties panel beneath the Editor panel, click the Documents tab.

7. Click Show Menu → Paste .

The documents are pasted to the operation and available for review in all processes that use that
operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-11

Add URL links to an operation

You can add a link to data outside of Process Planning for ETO. For example, you can link to a
specification in another system.

If an operation has a status of Released and you add, edit, or delete URL a link, Process Planning for ETO
prompts you to create an item revision for the operation. Click Revise or Cancel.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. On the Work Instructions tab, expand the structure and select the operation to which you want to
link data.

3. Click the Information subtab, select WebLinks, and click Add .

The Create WebLink dialog box is displayed.

4. Type in properties for the Name, Description, and URL fields, and click Create.

3-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Process Planning for ETO creates the URL link.

Note:
To edit a URL link, in the Information tab under WebLinks, select a link and click Start Edit
.
To delete a URL link, in the Information tab under WebLinks, select a link and click Delete
.

View URL links in an operation

You can view links to data outside of Process Planning for ETO. The same links are also available from
Electronic Work Instructions.

Note:
Right-click the URL link, and open the link in a new tab or a separate window. If you click directly
on the URL link, the link opens directly from the current page, and Process Planning for ETO leaves
the page you are currently viewing.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. On the Work Instructions tab, expand the structure and select the operation for which you want to
view data.

3. Click the Information subtab and under WebLinks, locate the URL link that you want to view.

4. Right-click the URL and select an option:

• Open link in new tab—launch a new browser tab to view the URL link.

• Open link in new window—launch a separate browser window to view the URL link.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-13

Overview of Teamcenter Manufacturing Access

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access prerequisites

Before you start working in Teamcenter Manufacturing Access, verify that your data meets these
prerequisites:

• The structures you work with must be inside a collaboration context.

• The studies you created outside of Teamcenter Manufacturing Access tools must be attached to the
collaboration context using a workflow.

• You must create all new studies using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access tools.

Run Teamcenter Manufacturing Access in the Author workspace

Change from the current workspace to the Author workspace.

You must run Teamcenter Manufacturing Access in the Author workspace mode to ensure that Study
Manager works properly. If Study Manager does not load correctly in the Teamcenter rich client or in
Process Simulate, you are not in the Author workspace.

Procedure

1. Open a standalone web browser.

2. Type http://hostname:3000/#/showHome in the address bar.

This is the Active Workspace URL.

The browser launches an Active Workspace session.

3. In the Active Workspace session, click User and change the workspace to Author.

4. Clear the browser cache.

3-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. Open Study Manager in the Teamcenter rich client or in Process Simulate.

Now that you are in the Author workspace, Study Manager loads correctly.

Study overview

Study introduction

Studies (subscopes) can be used to define a scope of work. You can use studies to further refine the
content of a station using Teamcenter, Process Simulate, or NX.

In order to properly validate and/or simulate information, it is often necessary to temporarily bring
together information from different scopes into a single, common scope. This is accomplished by
creating a study object that is specifically intended to manage these scopes. You add the station process
and any related product and resources to the study. You then manually copy and paste any additional
resources that are needed, but not related, such as conveyors or guarding, that are not part of the
station resource.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-15

Types of studies

There are two types of studies:

• Shared Study – The study can contain processes (with assigned product, features, and resources)
and plant structure. Any changes made in a study are directly reflected in the source structures.

• Isolated Study – The study can contain processes (with assigned product, features, and
resources) and plant structure. Any changes made in a study to plant structure are directly reflected
in the source structures. However, changes made to the process structure are stored only in the study
and are not reflected in the source process structure.

Business processes involving Teamcenter Manufacturing Access

Business process 1 – Process planning using Manufacturing Process Planner

When you prepare to do process planning using Manufacturing Process Planner, you need to use
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access to create, search, and load studies.

Role Task

Administrator Administrators install and configure the environment and convert

studies.

Process planner Engineers in planning groups use the Teamcenter rich client to
perform planning tasks. These tasks are performed in Teamcenter
Manufacturing Process Planner. See the Manufacturing Process
Planner documentation for details.

Business process 2 – Process plan validation using Process Simulate

When you prepare to do process validation using Process Simulate on Teamcenter, you need to
use Teamcenter Manufacturing Access to create, search, and load studies. You also may need to
insert additional resources or manufacturing features using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

Role Task

Administrator Administrators install and configure the environment and

convert studies.

Simulation engineer Engineers need to validate that the designed processes are
doable. See the Process Simulate on Teamcenter documentation
for details.

Business process 3 – Designing a fixture using NX Fixture Planner

3-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

When you prepare to do fixture planning using Manufacturing Process Planner, you need to use
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access to create, search, and load studies.

Role Task

Administrator Administrators install and configure the environment and convert

studies.

Fixture planner Engineers need to use available information to design the fixtures
used to manufacturer the product. See the NX Fixture Planner
documentation for details.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 3-17

3-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Navigating planning tasks in work packages

Navigate to work package planning tasks

You can navigate to primary work package planning tasks from a work package page. Once you navigate
to a planning task, you can navigate to other primary planning pages.

Procedure

1. Do one of the following.

• Create a work package.

Before you can navigate to planning tasks, you must create or import structures in your work
package. To access the EBOM-MBOM Alignment task, you must add an engineering bill of
materials (EBOM) and a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) structure; to access the Bill of
Equipment (BOE) task, you must add a plant structure; to access the High Level Planning task,
you must add a bill of process (BOP) structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-1

• Search for but do not open an existing work package.

When you remain on the search results page and select a work package, but do not open the
work package, a TASKS list is displayed as a series of tiles to the right of the search results.

4-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Search for and open an existing work package.

If you open a work package by selecting it in the search results page and then click Open , the
Manage Work Package page is displayed.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-3

Note:
• Planning tasks are specific to your logon and user role. The lists that you see will depend
on which page you are currently viewing.

• The structures defined in your work package determine which planning tasks are available
from that work package. The names associated with the task icons may differ from those
shown here.

2. Click a task tile to navigate to a planning task.

The EBOM-MBOM Alignment tile takes you to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

The High Level Planning tile lets you define a high-level BOP hierarchy for work packages
with a specified MBOM and process.
The Bill of Equipment (BOE) Authoring tile takes you to a plant bill of process (BOP), where
you can author a manufacturing plant hierarchy and its equipment.

3. Perform planning tasks on the page to which you jumped.

4. To jump to a different task in your work package, click the tile at the top of the page and click the
task tile to which you want to navigate.

4-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
From the EBOM-MBOM Alignment or High Level Planning pages, you can navigate to the
Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages.

Navigate to Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring

You can navigate to the Process Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages from the EBOM-
MBOM Alignment page and the High Level Planning page.

Procedure

1. Navigate from the work package planning tasks page to either of the following pages:

• EBOM-MBOM Alignment

• High Level Planning

2. If you are on the EBOM/MBOM Alignment page:

a. In the EBOM or MBOM panel, select a part or assembly with one or more assigned processes
and click:

Process Planning to go to the Process Planning page.

Work Instructions Authoring to go to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

b. In the Open in Process Planning or Open in Work Instructions Authoring dialog box, select
the process for which you want to perform process planning or work instructions, and click
Open.

3. If you are on the High Level Planning page:

• a. In the Assembly or Process tab, select an object and click Actions .

b. Click:

Process Planning to go to the Process Planning page.

Work Instructions Authoring to go to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-5

4. Perform planning tasks on the page to which you jumped.

5. To jump to a different task based on your process or assembly selections, click the tile at the top of
the page and click the task tile to which you want to navigate.

Navigate through planning tasks for a work package

You can use several methods to navigate planning tasks in Teamcenter Easy Plan.

Navigate from the work package page

You do not need to open the work package before you start navigating to planning tasks.

1. Search for a work package, and select it from the list.

2. Click a task tile to navigate to a planning task.

Note:
The structures in your work package determine which planning tasks are available.

4-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Navigate from the planning tasks list

When you perform planning tasks, you can easily navigate from one planning page to another.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan will display a planning tasks list that is specific to your login and user role.
The list that you see will vary depending on which page you are currently viewing.

1. Navigate from the work package to any planning page.

2. Perform planning tasks on the current page until you complete your work.

3. Click the planning page name, and select a page from the planning task list.

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the planning page to the same scope level in which you are working.
You do not need to drill down through the structure to locate the data you are working with.

Navigate from an object

When you navigate through a structure to perform planning tasks, you can stay at the same scope level
but navigate to a different planning page.

1. Navigate from the work package to any planning page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-7

2. Navigate through the structure on the planning page until you complete your tasks.

3. Select an object, for example, an assembly or a process, and click Open .

4. Select a planning page from the list.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the planning page to the same scope level in which you are
working. You do not need to drill down through the structure to locate the data you are
working with.

Work package structure

Before you can start planning, you must create a work package and place all the structures you need in
it.

4-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• BOM

The bill of materials is created by your product design group. It is the product structure associated to
the work package. It is what you are planning to build.

• Production program

The production program contains the variants of the product structure that are applied to the
operations in the plant BOP structure.

• Product BOP

The product bill of process contains all operations to build a product organized in functional groups.

• Plant BOP

The plant bill of process contains all operations performed at a specific plant to build a product.

• BOE

The bill of equipment is created by the layout group. It is the plant structure associated to the work
package and it is where you are planning to build the product.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-9

Create a work package

You can create a work package (collaboration context) that contains an existing engineering bill of
materials (EBOM) source structure, a new or existing target structure manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM), and plant, product, and other structures. You can also Search for and open an existing work
package.

1. On your Home page, click New Work Package.

Tip:
If you have a blank Home page, using an administrator account, try the following command
to retrieve the tiles.

aws2_install_tilecollections -u=Tc-admin-user -pf=$

{TC_USER_PASSWD_FILE} -g=dba -mode=add -file=${TC_INSTALL_DIR}/
mbm0multibommanagerweb/data/Mbm0mbmGatewayTilesCots_Install.xml

2. In the New Work Package dialog box, from the TYPE list, select MECollaborationContext or an
optional subtype.

3. In the PROPERTIES group, type a name and a project group if necessary, and then click Create.

The Manage Work Package page is displayed.

4. To locate an existing EBOM, in the EBOM Content panel, click Add , and then do the following.

a. In the Add Product dialog box, type the text to search.

b. Select an appropriate EBOM to use as a template.

4-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
To search for EBOMs with subtypes other than Item, your administrator must define
those subtypes in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner using the preference
EP_SearchSubtypesForEbom.

c. Select a Revision Rule to associate with the EBOM.

d. Click Add Product.

5. In the MBOM group, click Add .

Note:
Before you can add or modify an MBOM, you must first have an EBOM.

• To add a new MBOM, click Create New MBOM, and in the Create Product dialog box, type a
name and optional description, and click Create.

• To use an existing MBOM, click Use Existing MBOM, then search for and select the preferred
MBOM and add a revision rule.

Note:
Available MBOM items and item subtypes are defined by your administrator in Teamcenter
Manufacturing Process Planner using the preference EP_CreateSubtypesForType_Item.
To search for MBOMs with other Item subtypes, your administrator must define those
subtypes using the preference EP_SearchSubtypesForMbom.

• To create a new MBOM by mirroring an existing structure, click Add MBOM using Mirror.

In accordance with existing Teamcenter MBOM mirror preferences, the Add MBOM using Mirror
command uses a specified EBOM structure to add a linked MBOM to your work package.

For more information on MBOM mirroring preferences in Easy Plan, see Process Planning for
BTO/BTS/CTO Deployment.

The MBOM is created and added to the work package, and a link between the EBOM and MBOM is
created.

6. (Optional) Add a product structure. This step is only required to display product assemblies in the
steps of a manufacturing process.

7. Add a product bill of process (BOP).

8. Create or add a plant BOP.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-11

9. (Optional) Add a plant.

10. Apply a production program (options or a variant definition).

11. In the upper-right corner, click Open .

On the Align page, the structures are loaded.

Search for and open a work package

A work package, called a a collaboration context (CC) object in Teamcenter, is a container for product,
plant, and process structures. A product structure in Teamcenter consists of an engineering bill of
materials (EBOM) created by design engineers, and a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) intended
for manufacturing personnel. An MBOM contains parts, manufacturing elements, and resources
organized in levels to reflect assembly structures and the assembly process. A plant structure is termed a
classic bill of process (BOP) in Teamcenter. Once you open the work package, you can navigate to work
planning tasks.

1. Log on to Easy Plan.

2. Click .

3. From any view containing a search text box, click Category and select Work Packages.

4. Type the name of your work package and press Enter.

4-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
• Use asterisks * as wild cards (for example *gear to locate work packages named homing
gear, landing gear). Use a single asterisk in the category Work Packages to locate all
work packages in your database.

• Use an advanced search to locate objects by item ID, keyword, item name, or dataset
name.

5. (Optional) In the Filters panel, type a Property or select an element to reduce your results.

6. (Optional) In the search results view, select a different view .

7. In the right panel, pause your mouse over the preferred work package and click .

The work package opens in planning mode. On the search results page, the Product panel is
displayed on the left. An Overview panel is displayed in the center, and a TASKS panel is displayed
on the right.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-13

8. (Optional) Navigate to work planning tasks to manage data sources.

Find a work package or process

1. If the search options are not entirely visible, click

2. (Optional) At the top right of the Electronic Work Instructions screen, click Select: Owner and
choose a specific owner.

3. Click Select: Category and choose a category for the object you want to locate.

4. In the search box, type the object name.

4-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• As you type your search text, the system suggests search terms that you may find helpful. The
suggestion list is based on the most relevant matches. Click the suggestion to select the search
term.

You can use:

• Operators in your search criteria.

For example, type nut to search for objects with the word nut in any of their indexed fields.
Type bolt AND nut to search for objects with the words bolt and nut in any of their indexed
fields. You can also type “Part Revision” AND (Dan or Sally) to search for part revision objects
associated with users named Dan or Sally.

• Asterisks (*) with or without words to perform a wild card search.

• Quotation marks around a search string to search for an exact match.

Note:
You can also perform a search by item ID, keyword, item name, or dataset name by clicking
Advanced Search and selecting the preferred option.

5. (Optional) Select a revision rule.

Learn more about searching with revision rules in the Active Workspace User Assistance
documentation.

You can only open configured structures in Electronic Work Instructions.

6. Click or press Enter.

7. Select the correct object from the list and click to open the object.

If you open a work package, the header shows the properties of any process, product, or plant
contained within the work package. If you open a process, the header displays related product and plant
properties associated to the process with an METarget relationship. Your administrator can configure the
relationship type.

Search for objects in the BOE tree

You can quickly search the bill of equipment (BOE) on the Process Planning or Work Instructions
Authoring page before you assign a work area to the bill of process (BOP).

Prerequisites

You must set the following preferences to use this feature:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-15

• EP_SearchInBOEPropertyNames—set the value to the User Entry Name of the property used in the
query.

By default this value is set to Item ID and Item Name. However, you can also set this value to a
custom property, such as SAP work area name.

• EP_SearchInBOEByPropertyQueryName—set the value to point to the property you query for

this feature. For example, if you are querying by Item Name or Item ID, set this value to
Item_Name_or_ID.

In addition, you must add the EP_SearchInBOEPropertyNames preference and the

EP_SearchInBOEByPropertyQueryName preference to the AWC_Startup_preference in the
Teamcenter rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning
page.

2. Click the Resources tab.

3. In the Search for workarea field, type your query and click Search.

Tip:
You can use wildcard characters in your search. For example, type *STN* to search for a work
area item name that begins with STN. To ensure the best search results, create a query with
narrow parameters.

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns the results that match your query, returning up to 50 matching items.

4-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Select the item that you want in the search results list.

Teamcenter Easy Plan expands the BOE and highlights the work area item you selected in the
search results list.

Search for objects in the BOP tree

You can quickly search the bill of process (BOP) tree on the Process Planning or Work Instructions
Authoring page to locate a process line, process station, process, or operation.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning
page.

2. If you are working in the Process Planning page, in the Process panel, put your cursor in the
Search process or operation field, type your query and click Search.

Tip:
You can use wildcard characters in your search. For example, type *scan* to search for a
work area item name that begins with scan. To ensure the best search results, create a query
with narrow parameters.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-17

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns the results that match your query, returning up to 50 matching items.

3. If you are working in the Work Instructions Authoring page, click the Process tab. In the Search
for workarea field, type your query and click Search.

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns the results that match your query, returning up to 50 matching items.

4. Select the item that you want in the search results list.

Teamcenter Easy Plan expands the BOP and highlights the work area item you selected in the
search results list.

Work with saved searches

Search results appear in the home screen. You can manipulate your search results in the home screen as
follows:

To Do this

Save a search 1. Enter your search text in the search

box and click Search or press
Enter on your keyboard.

2. Click Save Search .

3. Enter a name for your search and

click Save.

Pin a search to your home 1. Save a search as described above

page but select the Pin to Home check
box before clicking Save.

Retrieve a search 1. Click the Search tile on the home

screen.

2. If necessary, click the Saved tab.

3. Under My Saved or Recent, point

your mouse over the search you
want to retrieve and click .

4-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

To Do this

The search is rerun based on the

saved search criteria.

Delete a search 1. Click the Search tile on the home

screen.

2. If necessary, click the Saved tab.

3. Under My Saved or Recent, point

your mouse over the search you
want to delete and click .

The search is removed from the list.

4. At the prompt asking whether you

want to delete the search, click OK.

Rename a search 1. Click the Search tile on the home

screen.

2. Click the Saved tab.

3. Under My Saved or Recent, click

the search you want to rename and
click Save Search .

4. Type the new name into the Name

box and click Save.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-19

Process Planning for electronics

Electronics process planning workflow

You can integrate electronics process planning tasks between Teamcenter Easy Plan and Valor Process
Preparation software.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator must enable electronics process planning functionality before you
can use it.

Here is a basic workflow of the tasks you complete in Teamcenter Easy Plan for an electronics work
package:

1. Create an electronics work package.

2. Conduct line balancing on the plant BOP.

3. Perform time analysis.

4. Author work instructions.

5. Send the structure to Valor Process Preparation.

Create an electronics work package

Tip:
Before you create a new electronics work package, search to see if one exists that contains the
structures you need.

1. On the Home page, click the New Work Package tile.

2. On the New Work Package page, select one of these types:

• PCB Work Package

• Electronics Work Package

3. In the Name box, type the name you want to use.

4. (Optional) Type additional information in the Description box.

4-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. Click Create.

The Manage Work Package page is shown. You can view package properties in the Overview
section of the page. You can use other areas of the page to add or remove structures in the work
package.

6. (Optional) Add a product structure.

Note:
You must add a product structure:

• When you create a printed circuit board (PCB) work package.

• When you want to display product assemblies in the steps of a manufacturing process.

7. (Optional) Attach an eCAD file to a PCB work package.

Note:
This step is required only when you create a PCB work package.

8. Add a product bill of process (BOP).

9. Create or add a plant BOP.

10. (Optional) Add a plant.

11. Apply a production program (options or a variant definition).

Attach an eCAD file to a PCB work package

When you create a printed circuit board (PCB) electronic work package, you must attach an eCAD file
before you send the work package to Valor Process Preparation.

1. Search for a PCB structure and hover on the work package in the results list.

2. Click Manage Work Package .

3. Hover on the Product tile and click Attach eCAD file .

4. Click Choose File, navigate to where the eCAD file is stored, and click Open to attach the file to the
work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-21

Send structure to Valor Process Preparation

Note:
You send the structure to Valor Process Preparation only if you created a PCB work package.
In this procedure, you perform the task at the process area level. You can also perform this task at
the process line level of the structure.

1. Navigate to the plant BOP.

2. Click Launch Process Planning .

Teamcenter Easy Plan launches the integration that sends the structure to Valor Process
Preparation.

Manage work package

Author the BOE

Author the BOE structure

To author the bill of equipment (BOE), complete these tasks.

1. Create a work package.

2. Add a plant structure or create a twin station.

3. (Optional) Assign resources from classification.

Add a plant structure to the BOE

1. Create or search for and open a work package.

2. In the Plant tile, click Add and select one of the following options:

• Create Plant—allows you to create a plant structure.

• Add Existing Plant—allows you to locate and add an existing plant structure.

• Generate Plant from Plant BOP—allows you to automatically create a plant that is based on the
plant BOP structure. See Create a twin station for details about this process.

3. In the Name box, type the name you want to use.

4-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

(Optional) Type additional information in the Description box.

4. Click Create.

The new plant is displayed in the Plant tile.

5. (Optional) In the Plant tile, click Open to review or build the BOE.

Create a twin station

You can quickly create a plant bill of process (BOP) by basing it on the existing bill of equipment (BOE)
within a work package. You can also create a BOE based on the existing plant BOP within a work
package. This example uses an existing plant BOP to create a BOE.

When you create a twin station, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses the source structure to create
corresponding hierarchical levels in the target structure. In addition, plant BOP elements are mapped to
plant BOE elements for you.

Note:
You must have write permissions to create a plant BOP or BOE. Contact your Teamcenter
administrator if you do not have the correct permissions to create a plant BOP or BOE.
You must be running Active Workspace version 5.0.1 or later and Teamcenter version 12.4.0.1 or
later to use this feature.

1. Create or open a work package with a plant BOP.

2. In the Plant tile, click Add and select one of the following options:

• Generate from Plant BOP—

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO generates the BOE based on the plant BOP structure.

• Add Associated Plant BOE—

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO adds the plant BOE that is linked to the plant BOP structure.

Note:
If the plant BOP is already linked to a plant BOE, you cannot generate a twin station. You
can only add the existing linked plant BOE to the plant BOP in the work package. The plant
BOP and BOE can only have a one-to-one link.

3. (Optional) In the Plant tile, click Open to review or build the BOE.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-23

Syncing to a twin station

During planning, you can update objects and attributes in one structure, and then sync the updates from
the source to the target structure.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO performs the following tasks to synchronize between structures:

• Creates missing elements in the target structure.

• Copies attributes from the source line to the target line, including:

• Item—Name, Description

• Item Revision—Name, Description

• Occurrence—Name, Alias, Variant Condition, Find No

• Deletes elements with no links in the target, if your environment is set to delete obsolete twins.

Note:
Contact your Teamcenter administrator to find out if your environment is set to delete obsolete
twins.

When objects exist in the source but not the target, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO performs the
following tasks to synchronize between structures:

• Creates new objects in the target structure.

4-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Links new objects in the target to the correct objects in the source.

• If objects in the hierarchy below a source synchronization object are not present in the target, the
synchronization process also creates those levels in the target structure.

Sync attribute updates

This example task shows syncing updates from the bill of equipment (BOE) to the plant bill of process
(BOP).

Note:
You must be running Active Workspace version 5.0.1 or later and Teamcenter version 12.4.0.1 or
later to use this feature.

1. Create or search for and open a work package.

2. In the Plant tile, click Open .

3. Click Edit, and make changes in the BOE.

Tip:
Use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen to review and edit object attributes,
such as Item Name and Variant Condition.

4. Click Save Changes when you have completed edits to the BOE.

5. Open the plant BOP, and navigate to the hierarchy level in the BOE that you just edited.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-25

Caution:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO only connects objects that are mapped in the
BOEPlantBOPTypeAndPropertyMap.xml file. If your structure contains customized objects that
are not in this map file, those objects are not synced.
Your Teamcenter administrator uses the MEBOPToBOEObjectTypeMap preference
to support the BOEPlantBOPTypeAndPropertyMap.xml file. Contact your Teamcenter
administrator with any questions about mapped objects in your environment.

6. Click Sync.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO pulls updated attribute and object data from the BOE and syncs
the data to the plant BOP.

When the synchronization is complete, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays a message
confirming that synchronization is complete, or explaining the reason for the full or partial
synchronization failure.

Add a configurator context to a work package

By default, Teamcenter Easy Plan derives the configurator context for a work package from the
engineering bill of materials (EBOM). However, during process planning you can manually add a
configurator context to a work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan associates the configurator context to all current and future structures in the work
package, except for the EBOM and the plant structure.

Restrictions and limitations

You must be working with Product Configurator variants in your environment. This feature does not
support classic variants.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for an existing work package.

2. In the Product Variants panel under Configurator Context click More , then select Set.

4-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the Set Configurator Context to Work Package dialog box so you
can locate a configurator context and associate it to structures in the work package.

3. Type a full or partial name, click Search, and then select a search result.

4. Click Set Configurator Context and click Associate in the confirmation dialog box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan associates the configurator context to:

• Structures that are currently in the work package.

• Structures added to the work package in the future.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan does not associate the configurator context to the EBOM or to the plant
structure.

5. (Optional) Add a structure to the work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan performs one of the following actions:

• If the structure is not associated to a configurator context, Teamcenter Easy Plan associates the
structure to the configurator context and adds it to the work package.

• If the structure is associated to a different configurator context than the work package,
Teamcenter Easy Plan displays an error message and does not associate it to the configurator
context or add it to the work package.

6. (Optional) In the Product Variants panel under Configurator Context click More → Remove,
and click Remove in the confirmation dialog box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan removes the association between the configurator context and all structures
within the work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-27

Add a product structure to a work package

Note:
This task is optional. You only need to add a product structure such as an EBOM or an MBOM to
the work package if you want to display product assemblies in the steps of the manufacturing
process. After you add a product structure to the work package, you associate it to operations in
the plant BOP.

1. Search for and open a work package.

2. On the Manage Work Package page, in the Product panel, click Add Product .

3. In the Add Product to Work Package dialog box, type the name, ID, or description of a product or
product assembly to associate to the package.

4. Click Search .

5. Select the product or product assembly from the search results.

6. (Optional) Select a different revision rule.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator may customize the list of revision rules.

7. Click Add Product.

4-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
To remove a product structure from a work package, edit the work package. Hover over the
structure in the work package and click Unassign .

Create a product BOP

You can add an existing product BOP to your work package, or create one.

If you want to create a product BOP, create a work package that only contains this structure. Later, you
can fine tune a product BOP when it is in a work package with a plant BOP.

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

2. In the Product BOP section, click Create Product BOP .

3. In the Create Product BOP dialog box, enter a name in the Name box and optionally, enter
information in the Description box.

4. Click Create.

A new process structure is created and assigned to the work package.

Tip:

Click Submit to Workflow to send the product BOP directly to a workflow from this
page.

Note:
To remove a product BOP from a work package, hover over the product BOP and click Remove
associated structure , then click Remove.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-29

Plant BOPs

Create a plant bop

You can create a new plant bill of process (BOP), or add an existing plant BOP to a work package. You
can also use a template to create a plant BOP. The template creates a clone of an existing plant BOP.

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

2. In the Plant BOP tile, click Add and select Create Plant BOP.

3. In the Name box, type the name you want to use.

4. (Optional) Type additional information in the Description box and

5. Click Create.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO adds the plant BOP to the work package.

Tip:

Click Submit to Workflow to send the plant BOP directly to a workflow from this page.

Add a plant BOP

This task adds an existing plant bill of process (BOP) to a work package.

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

4-30 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. In the Plant BOP tile, click Add and select Add Plant BOP.

3. Type the partial or full name of the plant BOP you want to add to the work package and click
Search .

Tip:
Use asterisks * as wild cards during any search.

4. Select a plant BOP from the results, and select a revision rule to apply to the plant BOP.

5. Click Add Plant BOP.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO adds the plant BOP to the work package.

Click Submit to Workflow to send the plant BOP directly to a workflow from this page.

Add a plant structure to a work package

1. Edit a work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-31

2. To add a plant structure, click Add Plant in the Plant section of the Manage Work Package
page.

3. In the Add Plant to Work Package dialog box, type the name, ID, or description of a plant structure
to associate to the package.

4. Click Search .

5. Select the structure from the search results.

6. (Optional) Select a revision rule.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator may customize the list of revision rules your organization
uses.

7. Click Add Plant.

Note:
To remove a remove a plant structure from a work package, hover over the structure in the work
package and click Unassign .

4-32 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Clone a plant BOP

This task uses an existing plant bill of process (BOP) as a template to create a new plant BOP. The new
plant BOP is a clone of the existing plant BOP.

Note:
When you clone an existing plant BOP, its consumed parts and assigned resources are not copied
to the new plant BOP.

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

2. In the Plant BOP tile, click Add and select Create Plant BOP from Template.

3. Type the partial or full name of the plant BOP you want to clone, and click Search .

Tip:
Use asterisks * as wild cards during any search.

4. Select a plant BOP from the results, and select a revision rule.

Note:
The revision rule that you select is applied to the cloned plant BOP.

5. Type in a Name for the plant BOP.

6. (Optional) Type information in the Description field.

7. Click Create Plant BOP.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO clones the existing plant BOP, and adds the cloned plant BOP to
the work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-33

Click Submit to Workflow to send the plant BOP directly to a workflow from this page.

Reusing a work package based on object values

When you change the top line of a work package object, such as an engineering bill of materials
(EBOM), a BOM view revision (BVR) is saved with that object's structure by default. You can store values
other than the BVR to each object's top line in your work package so that other values are instead saved
with that object, and the work package can then be more easily reused (for example, saved without the
BVR, and with an item ID instead). The preference EPWorkPackageContentType defines the following
default values for each work package object.

Work package object Default value

Engineering bill of materials (EBOM) EBOM:PSBOMViewRevision
Manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) MBOM:PSBOMViewRevision
Bill of equipment (BOE) Plant:PSBOMViewRevision
Plant BOP (bill of process) BOP:PSBOMViewRevision

An administrator can change the values for any object to Item, ItemRevision, or PSBOMView, and then
save your work package for reuse.

Example:

EBOM:ItemRevision
MBOM:PSBOMView
Plant:Item
BOP:PSBOMViewRevision

Once the preferred preference values are defined, you can then modify the top line of the object based
on the preference value and reuse the work package with each specific value's information.

Apply a production program

Add a production program using Product Configurator

If your environment uses Product Configurator variants, you can create a production program for those
variants.

Saved variant rules (SVRs) are defined in the configurator context in Manufacturing Process Planner or
Product Configurator. As you define the production program, you can review and add existing SVRs to
your production program.

4-34 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
Before you begin, verify that:

• Your Teamcenter administrator has configured your environment to use Product Configurator.

• The work package you plan to use contains a configurator context.

1. Open the work package.

2. Click Create Production Program.

3. Type a name and click Create.

4. Click Generate all product variants from the configurator context.

Note:
For each SVR, a product variant is created with a default rate of one. You can modify the
default rate if needed.

5. (Optional) Double-click the production rate for a product variant and type a new value.

Production rates automatically update as you set them.

6. (Optional) To remove a product variant, select the product variant and click Delete.

Author a production program with classic variants

Production programs contain a collection of product variants. You can add or create a production
program, or edit an associated production program with classic variants.

Create a production program

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

2. In the Production Program section, click Create Production Program .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-35

3. In the Create Production Program dialog box, enter a name in the Name box and optionally, enter
information in the Description box.

4. Click Create.

A new production program is created and assigned to the work package.

5. Edit the contents of the new production program.

Edit a production program

Use this procedure to edit an existing production program.

1. Search for a work package, and click Manage Work Package in the results list.

2. Hover over the production program assigned to the work package and click Edit .

3. In the Production Program dialog box, click Create Product Variant .

4. In the Create Product Variant dialog box, enter a name in the Name box.

5. Enter a Production Rate value greater than zero.

This is used to calculate the probability for the variant.

6. Set the variant rule for the product variant, using the list of existing product variants.

You can select one option for a variant rule, or you can select multiple operations for a variant rule:

4-36 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

7. Click Create.

Continue using the Production Program dialog box to create, edit, or delete the product variants
you want.

Add structure

Product structures and data

Create a structure in a work package

You can create any of these structures within an existing work package:

• Bill of Equipment (BOE)

• Manufacturing Bill of Materials (MBOM)

• Plant Bill of Process (Plant BOP)

Before you begin, verify the following items.

• You must have the correct user role and permissions to create structures in Teamcenter.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-37

• You must have write access to the object you are changing. In this case, you are changing the work
package.

• The object must be in an Open and Not Reviewing state.

Note:
If you do not have the correct user role and permissions to complete this task, please contact your
Teamcenter administrator.

1. Search for and open a work package.

Caution:
The work package must contain an EBOM before you can add a manufacturing BOM.

2. Click Add in a structure tile and then select Create New [structure].

3. In the Create dialog box, type a Name.

4. (Optional) Type a description.

5. (Optional) Click Assign Projects , then search for and select the owning project to assign to the
structure.

6. (Optional) Click Revision Rule, and select an option from the list .

Note:
The default revision rule is Latest Working.

7. Click Add [structure].

Note:
The tasks that are available on the Manage Work Package page depend on the structures in
a work package.

Add an existing structure to a work package

You can search for and add any of these structures to a work package:

• Bill of Equipment (BOE)

• Engineering Bill of Materials (EBOM)

4-38 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Manufacturing Bill of Materials (MBOM)

• Plant Bill of Process (Plant BOP)

This example searches for and adds an EBOM to an existing work package.

1. Search for and open a work package.

Tip:
You must add an EBOM to a work package before you can add an MBOM.

2. Click Add in the EBOM tile.

Note:
In your role, you do not create or maintain EBOMs. You only search for and add an EBOM to a
work package.

3. In the Add Product dialog box, type a full or partial name and click Search .

4. Select the structure or the process from the search results.

5. (Optional) Click Revision Rule, and select an option from the list .

Note:
The default revision rule is Latest Working.

6. Click Add Product.

Tip:
The tasks that are available on the Manage Work Package page depend on the structures in
a work package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-39

Remove a structure from a work package

Click Remove on a product structure tile to remove it from a work package.

Tip:
You must remove an MBOM from a work package before you can remove the EBOM.

Configuring structures

Define structure configuration

Typically, the plant bill of process (BOP) inherits its effectivity from the collaboration context. You
can also define a structure by a different effectivity, revision rule, or variant. You can define structure
configuration on the EBOM-MBOM alignment, bill of equipment (BOE) authoring, or plant BOP
pages.

Restrictions and limitations

You cannot define a structure by:

• Variant rules or expansion rules if the structure contains Product Configurator-authored variants,
because Active Workspace does not support it.

• An effectivity date range on the High Level Planning page, because Active Workspace does not
support it. This feature will be fully supported in a later release.

• An effectivity date range on the EBOM-MBOM alignment page, because Active Workspace does not
support it. This feature will be fully supported in a later release.

4-40 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and navigate to the Process Planning or Work
Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click Configuration and then select EBOM, MBOM, or BOP.

The Configuration panel is displayed.

3. To define the structure by a revision rule, select a rule from the list in the REVISION section of the
panel.

4. To define the structure by effectivity, perform one of the following actions.

• To define a date-based effectivity, select a date range in the DATE section of the panel.

For the end date, you can select UP (all future dates) or SO (stock out).

• To define a unit-based effectivity, select a unit or range of units in the UNITS section of the
panel.

5. To define the structure by a variant rule, perform the following actions in the VARIANT section of
the panel.

a. To set the end item for the variant, click the Saved Variant object.

The Effective Variant For panel is displayed.

b. Select the Search tab then type part of the end item name and click Search. You can use
wildcard characters in your search. For example, type *MBOM_Easy* to search for an end
item named MBOM_Easy_Navigation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns a list of objects that match the search criteria.

c. Select the end item for the variant from the list.

d. Click No variant rule, select the variant rule you want to apply, and click Configure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan refreshes and displays the structure based on the new configuration.

Configure work structures

You can edit the configuration of each work structure in a work package. You can save a structure
configuration on the Manage Work Package page, or any other page that is defined for your work
package.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-41

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

The current structure configuration is reflected in the configuration header.

2. In the preferred page's toolbar in the upper-right corner, click Configuration , and then
select the type of structure. For example, EBOM Configuration, MBOM Configuration, or BOP
Configuration.

The Configuration panel is displayed.

Steps 3-5 below are all optional. You can apply any and all steps before applying your configuration
to the current session or work package.

3. Do any of the following:

• To show or hide structure occurrences that are excluded by applied effectivity, select or clear
the Show occurrences excluded by effectivity check box.

• To show or hide structure occurrences that are excluded by applied variants, select or clear
the Show occurrences excluded by variant check box.

• (BOP configuration only) To show or hide BOP structure occurrences based on the effectivity of
assigned occurrences as they are defined in their structure of origin, select or clear the
Show excluded assignments check box.

Note:
Do not select or clear a check box and then immediately select an End Item from the Units
section of the Configuration panel.

4. Change the configuration by modifying:

• The revision rule in the REVISION group.

• The effectivity in the DATE or UNITS groups.

Your Teamcenter administrator decides which type of effectivity is available.

• Date-based effectivity displays structure data relevant to a specific past or future date, or range
of dates. Part revisions and their related operations often have effectivities that determine
when they are used in production.

4-42 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Unit-based effectivity displays structure data relevant to a specific unit number, such as unit 1,
or range of units, such as 1-20.

Note:
• Before you can use date- or unit-based effectivity, your organization must create revision
rules that references date or unit effectivity. If you are not able to use unit-based
effectivity, contact your Teamcenter administrator.

• An end item is a final combination of consumed end products, component parts, and
materials that are hidden in the EBOM and MBOM because they are not currently of
interest in the manufacturing process, usually because they are preassembled by a
third-party. To change an end item in the UNITS group, select a defined end item, use
the Search tab to locate the end item, or select the Palette tab and select the end item
from the resulting CLIPBOARD, FAVORITES, or RECENT group. The end item is applied
to the structure.

• The variant rule in the VARIANT group and the expansion rule in the EXPANSION group by
selecting new or different variants or expansion rules.

To change to a different variant in the VARIANT group, select a saved variant, use the Search
tab to locate the variant , or select the Palette tab and select the end item from the resulting
CLIPBOARD, FAVORITES, or RECENT group. The variant is applied to the structure.

5. To save your changes to your work package, rather than apply them locally and lose your settings
the next time you open the package, select the Save this configuration to the Work Package
check box.

Note:
If your administrator has set the value of the preference
EP_ShowSaveConfigtoWorkPackageOption to true, the Save this configuration to the
Work Package check box is not available.

6. Click Configure.

The configuration is applied to the relevant structure, the Configuration panel closes, and your
changes are reflected in the configuration header.

Note:
Unless you saved your configuration changes to the work package, you can revert all work
structure configurations to the previously saved configuration by selecting Configuration
→ Reset All Configuration .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-43

Review configuration headers

You can review the data configuration for which different structures are defined as a header at the top of
each work page in a work package.

For all work pages except the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, that configuration is visible.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and navigate to the Manage Work Package page
or to another defined work page.

Available work pages in the work package reflect the structures your administrator has created.
In this example, structures for an engineering bill of materials (EBOM), manufacturing bill of
materials (MBOM), and Process (BOP) are defined, as reflected in the tiles that are displayed in the
configuration header at the top of an Process Planning page.

If no configuration is applied to a structure (the default configuration), only the structure name,
user role, and revision are displayed for that structure. If all structures are not visible in the header,
you can view hidden tiles by clicking the and buttons.

2. In the page toolbar, select Configuration → and then click the configuration you want to review
or edit (for example, EBOM).

3. In the Configuration panel, configure the structure.

The header reflects the current or revised configuration settings. Hover your mouse over each
section to review details.

The type of structure being Indicates that the Show

configured. occurrences excluded by
effectivity check box is
selected in the structure's
Configuration panel.
The structure's revision rule. Indicates that the Show
occurrences excluded by
variant check box is selected

4-44 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

in the structure's Configuration

panel.
The unit effectivity (number of Indicates that the Show
units and end item name). If excluded assignments
the structure is configured to check box is selected in
use date-based effectivity, the the structure's Configuration
date or date range is displayed. panel.

Applying configuration variants

When you define an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) or manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM)
structure configuration, you can apply configuration variants in the Configuration panel. This lets you
see which lines in that structure are affected in the Variant Formula column.

Classic or modular variants define options (for example, color) and corresponding values for each
option (for example, red and blue). The Product Configurator application in Teamcenter separates
variant data from the structure. Configuration variants are available in Easy Plan when your
administrator sets up Manufacturing Process Planner for Product Configurator. Administrators can
create predefined or custom rules in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner using the preference
ClosureRulesForBomExpansion.

The Variant Formula column shows the lines that are affected when you apply configuration variants.

Variant configuration supports:

• Options that are a mandatory choice or an accessory.

• Components that can be configured by more than one option.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-45

• Variant assemblies that can be shared between products.

Minimizing structure expansion

When you configure work structures, you can use expansion rules to minimize expansion of
unecessary structure lines just as you do in Manufacturing Process Planner. For example, you may not
want to expand an assembly if it is time consuming, if it is outsourced to a third party, or if it is not
assigned to a current project.

Expansion rules are a type of closure rule. Expansion rules specify which lines in a structure should
not load or expand when specific relationships are encountered. You can apply expansion rules to all
structures except for a production program. That is, you can apply expansion rules to an engineering bill
of materials (EBOM), a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), a product bill of process (BOP), a plant
BOP, and a bill of equipment (BOE). Administrators can create predefined or custom rules in Teamcenter
Manufacturing Process Planner using the preference ClosureRulesForBomExpansion.

In the following example, the closure rule BOMExpandSkipByPartSource, which is available by default
in Manufacturing Process Planner, contains a condition that declares that if a secondary object type of
Part exists in a BOM structure, and the primary part source is equal to Make, then the action type SKIP
is applied to the structure.

The example below shows an EBOM structure before and after the BOMExpandSkipByPartSource rule
is applied. All parts with a part source equal to Make, such as Part2 and Part4, are excluded from the
structure. All assemblies that contain parts whose primary part source is equal to Make, such as Item2,
Item3, and Item4, are also excluded.

4-46 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Before expansion rule After expansion rule

Configure structures with revision rules

You can use object revisions to manage changes to a product structure.

An object revision defines the state of an object at a particular time. When the object moves to a new life
cycle stage, you set a status and effectivity on the revision and create a new working revision.

If an object revision has no status (for example, the revision is released), you can change it directly.
However, after an object revision has a status, you must create a new revision or object to change it.

Changes that may require a new revision include:

• Adding or removing subcomponents.

• Changing encapsulated data (referenced files such as images) and the properties that describe the
object.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-47

Note:
For some types of changes, it is preferable to create a new object instead of revising the old one.

You apply the appropriate revision rule to set the configuration of the plant bill of process (BOP)
structure for a specific time. A revision rule consists of any number of rule entries. Each entry defines a
parameter that determines which revision of each object in the structure should display.

Note:
You cannot view multiple revisions at the same time in one view. If you want to see another
configuration, you must apply a different revision rule in another view.

A revision rule sets the criteria for selecting the revision. For example, the revision rule:

• Selects working revisions and, optionally, specifies the owning user or group.

• Selects released revisions by specific status, according to a status hierarchy or latest status (by date
released).

• Optionally, specifies the date or unit number effectivity of the revisions.

• Selects the latest revisions according to the revision ID, by alphanumeric or numeric order, or by
creation date. This selection is independent of whether revisions are working or released.

Product manufacturing information (PMI)

PMI

In Process Planning for ETO, you can work with product manufacturing information (PMI) when you
search for and open an existing work package that contains processes and parts and navigate to the
Work Instructions Authoring page. PMI information is displayed in the PMI Assembly Level tab.

PMI provides engineering, manufacturing, quality control, and other data in a 3D model such as a
JT file. Like a 2D drawing, PMI helps manufacturing designers and engineers to convey dimensional
markup, but uses a single source 3D format to build and measure a part, automate tasks, and verify that
manufactured results fall within specified parameters.

Note:
You cannot perform PMI commands without a PMI license.

4-48 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

PMI is governed by the industry standards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) and
the International Organization for Standardization (ISO). A primary focus is on geometric dimensioning
and tolerancing (GD&T), which is used to verify that products fall within the same specifications
in computer-aided manufacturing (CAM), computer-aided inspection (CAI), and coordinate-measuring
machine (CMM) software.

PMI can also include a bill of materials (BOM), weld symbols, surface and material specifications, change
order information, other metadata, and related notes.

Sort and filter the PMI Assembly Level tab

When authoring your process plan, you can sort and filter product manufacturing information (PMI)
objects in the PMI Assembly Level tab. As you can in most Active Workspace tabs, you can drag
columns to rearrange the column order. You can also right-click a single column and sort the table by
choosing:

• Sort Ascending to sort from A to Z and from zero (0) to the highest number.

• Sort Descending to sort from Z to A and from the highest number to zero (0).

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-49

2. To filter the list of PMI objects by a text string, in the PMI Assembly Level tab, right-click a text
column such as PMI Description, and then in the Text Filter text box, type the text that you want
included in all PMI object results, and click Filter.

For example, type dat to limit the list of PMI objects to those that only contain the text string dat,
such as Datum Feature Symbol. Text filters are not case-specific.

3. To filter the list of PMI objects by number, right-click a numeric column such as Nominal Value, and
from Numeric Filter, select:

• Equals to limit the results to only PMI objects with a specific value. For example, right-click the
Upper Specification Limit column, type -0.0.2, and click Filter.

The PMI Assembly Level tab now displays only PMI objects with USL values that are exactly
equal to -0.0.2.

• Greater Than to limit the results to only PMI objects with more than a specific value. For
example, right-click the Nominal Value column, type 1.0, and click Filter.

The PMI Assembly Level tab now displays only PMI objects with nominal values that are greater
than 1.0.

• Less Than to limit the results to only PMI objects with less than a specific value. For example,
right-click the Lower Specification Limit column, type 0.1, and click Filter.

The PMI Assembly Level tab now displays only PMI objects with USL values that are less than
0.1.

• Range to limit the results to only PMI objects that fall within a specific numeric range. For
example, right-click the Nominal Value column and:

a. In the From text box, type 0.1.

b. In the To text box, type -0.2.

c. Click Filter.

The PMI Assembly Level tab now displays only PMI objects with nominal values that fall
between the range of 0.1 and -0.2.

Note:
To clear the sort capabilities, right-click the sorted column and select No Sorting. To clear a filter,
right-click the filter column and click Clear.

4-50 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Define content in the PMI Assembly Level tab using a selection method

When defining an assembly or process plan, you can review relevant product manufacturing information
(PMI) objects by selecting a content method that is based on your selection from the Assembly or
Process tab. Methods can be applied to an entire assembly or process, or to a specific part or operation
in a process.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. From the Assembly or Process tab, select the part, assembly, process, or operation for which you
want to display PMI information, and in the PMI Assembly Level tab, click Select method.

Part or assembly selections enable Product based methods and Scope based methods. Process or
operation selections enable Process based methods.

Tip:
To select multiple operations, select the last operation you want to include in your method.

3. In the PMI Assembly Level tab, accept or select one of these methods:

• Method 1 Loaded assembly to view all PMI objects contained in an assembly selected in the
Assembly tab.

All PMI information derived from the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) for that assembly
and its parts are displayed in the PMI Assembly Level tab.

• Method 2 Selected part from loaded assembly to view all PMI objects from a part selected in
the Assembly tab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-51

Only the PMI information derived from the MBOM for that part is displayed in the PMI Assembly
Level tab. If the part contains part subassemblies, PMI objects related to those subassemblies are
displayed as well.

• Method 3 Consumption of an operation to view all PMI objects related to parts that are
consumed in the selected operation.

• Method 4 In scope of selected part (in assembly) to select an assembly and view only
PMI objects assigned to the first level of parts in the assembly's first subassembly in the PMI
Assembly Level tab.

If the first subassembly contains additional subassemblies, PMI objects associated with those
subassemblies or their subparts are not displayed. Method 4 gathers PMI objects only associated
with parts that are consumed within the selected assembly's domain scope.

4-52 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Method 5 In scope of selected part (all) to select an assembly and view all PMI objects in the
selected assembly in the PMI Assembly Level tab, regardless of whether they are or are not
consumed in the MBOM.

For illustrative purposes, the icons below indicate unconsumed parts for which PMI objects are
displayed in the PMI Assembly Level tab. The unconsumed parts are not actually displayed in
the Assembly tab.

Note:
You must have Teamcenter 14.1.0.5 server installed for method 5 to function. Teamcenter
14.2 does not contain the required preference Mci0PropertyListforFindingImpactedPMI.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-53

Note:
You can change your selections in the Assembly, Process, or PMI Assembly Content tabs as
necessary and change method selections. As you switch from an assembly to process or vice
versa, you may need to change your PMI content method.

4. Do either of the following:

• Drag any unconsumed PMI objects you want to assign to the objects selected in the previous
steps to the lower PMI tab.

The objects are displayed in the PMI tab.

• On the PMI tab, select any PMI objects to be unassigned from the objects selected in the
previous steps and click Unassign .

Displaying selected PMI information in the Viewer

You can display product manufacturing information (PMI) elements that are enabled in the View
column of the PMI Assembly Level tab to highlight them in the Viewer panel in the Work
Instructions Authoring page. You can optionally enable visualization of the part or parts to which
the element is connected from a PMI popup window.

4-54 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
• In the example above, the surface to which the PMI element is attached is highlighted in purple.

• You can also select a PMI element in the Viewer panel to highlight it in the PMI Assembly Level
tab, or by selecting assigned PMI elements in the PMI tab beneath the PMI Assembly Level tab.

Examine detailed PMI part information views

You can view the parts to which which product manufacturing information (PMI) is connected even if
they belong to a different manufacturing assembly than that which you are currently reviewing. In many
cases, the connected parts are referenced parts.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Assembly tab, select a part or assembly and then, in the PMI Assembly Level tab, select a
product-based method to see PMI elements connected to the part or assembly.

On the Assembly tab, you can also click to show the part or assembly in the Viewer.

3. (Optional) For unassigned PMI elements, select the PMI Assembly Level tab, hover your mouse
over any PMI element for which you want to identify connected parts, and click More .

For assigned PMI elements on the PMI tab of the information panel below the PMI Assembly
Level tab, you can also hover your mouse over any PMI element for which you want to identify
connected parts, and click More .

In the information popup, the PMI element's physical parts are displayed in the Connected Parts
list. Datums, if available, are listed in the Referenced Datum Parts list. If any connected or
referenced parts are not visible in the part or assembly you selected in step 2, they display icons.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-55

4. (Optional) Click to change the status of any connected parts or referenced datum parts to visible
. Those parts are displayed in the Viewer.

Note:
• If you rotate a part or assembly in the Viewer, the graphic appears backward, but when
you release, it flips to display correctly.

• You may need to zoom, rotate, or pan the part in the Viewer to completely view the PMI
information.

5. On the PMI Assembly Level or PMI tab, hover your mouse over a different PMI element and click
More to update the information popup with connected, assigned, or referenced parts for that
element.

Inspect PMI information in the Viewer

When inspecting three-dimensional product manufacturing information (PMI) in the Viewer panel, you
can zoom in or out on specific PMI elements, as well as hide all visible PMI elements without hiding 3D
parts and features from your view.

1. If you have not done so already, navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the upper-left panel, in the Assembly tab, select next to each part or assembly of parts to be
shown in the Viewer.

3. To zoom in to a specific PMI element:

a. On the PMI Assembly Level tab, select next to each PMI element to be displayed in the
Viewer.

PMI elements attached to parts or assemblies that are outside those that you selected in step
2 may appear to hang in space outside the viewer.

4-56 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

b. To zoom in to a specific element, select it in the PMI Assembly Level tab or Viewer and click
.

The view jumps to the PMI selection.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-57

c. (Optional) To zoom out to include all parts and assemblies and PMI elements, click .

4. To hide all PMI elements in the Viewer:

a. In the Viewer, click and select Hide All PMIs.

PMI elements are cleared but part and assembly elements remain in the viewer.

4-58 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
To hide all parts, assemblies, and PMI elements, click and select Hide All.

b. (Optional) To display the same or different parts, assemblies, and PMI elements, repeat this
process.

Reviewing wave-linked geometry with PMI elements

In some cases, product manufacturing information (PMI) elements reference geometry that is not
defined in an actual part occurrence, but rather in geometry stored in the upper assembly level of the
model in NX.

To save time, wave-linked geometry such as a face, body, line, or curve (called features in NX) is copied
and linked from a nominal part component in a lower-level assembly so that you can associate it with
other components, such as PMI elements. You can then display wave-linked parts to which PMI elements
are connected in detailed views by clicking to show the wave-linked face, body, or curve of the part
in the Viewer (wave linked geometry is displayed in orange in the example below).

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-59

Note:
A PMI element might be specific to the visible wave-linked feature. For example, it might measure
the length of a curve.

Visualize and review PMI assignments

Product manufacturing information (PMI) objects listed in the PMI Assembly Level tab of the Work
Instructions Authoring page that are assigned to operations display icons to indicate whether they are
assigned, overassigned, or missing in the JT source files.

You can quickly:

• Visualize PMI and parts in the Viewer panel.

• Review the parts and operations to which a PMI object is assigned or connected.

• Select an operation and jump to that operation on the Process tab.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Process tab, select a part or operation that contains PMI objects and select a method.

4-60 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The PMI objects connected to the operation are displayed on the PMI Assembly Level tab. PMI
objects that are connected to parts display an icon ( ) on the right side of the PMI Description
column when you hover over lines in the list. When you click that icon, if a part is marked as visible
in the lower Parts tab, all PMI associated with that part is also visible in the Viewer panel.

Note:
You can also show additional PMI objects in the viewer by marking individual PMI objects as
visible on the PMI Assembly Level tab. If the parts to which they are attached are not
marked as visible in the viewer, they may not appear to be attached to a part.

3. Toward the top of the window, select Show Consumption Indication and Impact State to enable
assignment indications.

The PMI Assembly Level tab displays an icon to indicate PMI objects that are:

Consumed once under a loaded process.

Consumed twice or more under a loaded process.
Consumed once outside the scope of the loaded process.
Consumed twice or more outside the scope of the loaded process.

4. Hover your mouse over an assignment icon to review operations.

In this example, Linear Dimension (5) is consumed by operation 25.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-61

5. Click the operation indication.

On the Process tab, operation 25 is selected.

Assign or unassign PMI objects to a BOP

You can assign one or more product manufacturing information (PMI) objects to an operation in a bill
of process (BOP) plan from the PMI Assembly Level tab to the lower PMI tab in the Authoring Work
Instructions page. You can also unassign PMI objects from an operation via the PMI tab.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Using the Process tab, define the operations that you want to handle specific PMI objects.

Tip:
You can assign more than one PMI object to an operation.

3. On the Process tab, select an operation.

4. In the PMI Assembly Level tab, select a content method relevant to the operation (Method 3 for
a selected operation in the Assembly list).

5. Do either of the following:

• If there are unconsumed PMI objects you want to assign to the selected operation, drag them to
the lower PMI tab.

4-62 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The objects are displayed in the PMI tab and are assigned to the operation.

• On the PMI tab, select any PMI objects to be unassigned from the selected operation and click
Unassign .

Locate PMI assembly and process definitions

Product Manufacturing Information (PMI) objects can be attached to parts that are used in assemblies
or processes that are either actively loaded or unloaded. You can quickly identify the assemblies or
processes to which PMI objects belong, both in currently loaded assemblies and processes, and in
unloaded external assemblies and processes.

Note:
All loaded and unloaded manufacturing assemblies and processes that are referenced by the PMI
data must be installed.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Select the PMI Assembly Plan tab and define content using a selection method.

Note:
Method 1 shows PMI content that is based on the loaded assembly.

For each PMI object in the tab, the Defined In column reports the names of those parts or
assemblies to which the object is assigned in the currently loaded configuration, as well as in
external configurations. A defined in location often indicates where other PMI objects may also be
defined at the same level.

3. Next to a preferred PMI object in the PMI Description column, click More .

Links to Defined In information are available in the PMI object's specific dialog box. The dialog box
also displays information on the PMI object's target assemblies and target processes.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-63

4. Click the Defined In link.

The item revision opens in Active Workspace and further details on the target assemblies and
processes are displayed.

5. (Optional) Close Active Workspace.

Review missing-in-source PMI information

Product manufacturing information (PMI) may appear missing in the manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) due to a design change, or because it is connected to, or referenced by, another external
assembly. From a single location, you can review a list of PMI objects that are assigned to a process
or operation, in the same way you can review parts that are missing in the source engineering bill of
materials (EBOM).

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click the Process tab and enable Show Consumption and Impact State.

4-64 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

To the right of Show Consumption and Impact State, the number of parts that are overconsumed
in the loaded process are reported. The next field shows the number of parts and PMI objects that
are missing in the source for the loaded process.

The Process tab displays a red indicator . Below the tab, a Missing In Source list details the
dimensions, feature control frames, and geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (GD&T) elements
that are missing from the work package source. The number of elements missing from the source
appears to the right of each kind of element.

3. On the Process tab, click a process or operation to which PMI information is assigned, and then
click the PMI Assembly Level tab.

The PMI Assembly Level tab displays a red indicator and affected PMI elements display missing-in-
source icons . The PMI tab in the information panel below the PMI Assembly Level tab also
displays a red indicator the same icon for all PMI elements missing in the source from the selected
process or operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-65

When the parts are reclaimed, the warnings are resolved.

Review impacted in-scope PMI objects

On the Work Instructions Authoring page, you can review changes to PMI properties.

If a part contains product manufacturing information (PMI) objects that have been changed by
engineering, and that part is associated with change notices, indicators and impacted in-scope partial
match warnings are displayed on the Work Instructions Authoring page to indicate the change to
PMI properties.

Note:
In-scope warnings are only displayed if an engineering change notice (ECN) is applied to the
operation that contains the affected part, and a manufacturing change notice (MCN) is applied to
that operation's work package.
For more information on change notices, see ECNs, MCNs, and CNs.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click the Process tab and enable Show Consumption and Impact State.

To the left of Show Consumption and Impact State, the MCN is reported.

The Process tab displays an orange indicator . Any operations containing consumed parts with
impacted PMI objects display the same indicator.

4-66 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. In the Process tab, select an affected operation.

If the Process tab is synchronized with the Editor tab, an orange indicator is also displayed on the
Editor tab, and the operation is indicated.

4. In the information panel below the Editor tab, click the PMI tab, and in the Work Instructions
Authoring page toolbar, click Calculate Impact on Product Views.

Impacted PMI objects display in-scope partial match warnings in the PMI tab. When you select
an impacted PMI object in the tab, any affected product views are highlighted in the Visuals panel
below the Viewer panel.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-67

When the associated ECN is verified, the warnings are resolved.

Review out-of-scope PMI objects

On the Work Instructions Authoring page, you can review PMI objects that are out of the scope of the
work package.

If a part with product manufacturing information (PMI) objects is assigned outside the scope of your
work package, an out-of-scope partial match warning is displayed next to those PMI objects on the
Work Instructions Authoring page. You can open a new browser page to view the PMI objects in scope.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click the PMI Assembly Level tab and next to an out-of-scope PMI object, click the out-of-scope
partial match warning , and then click the out-of-scope operation.

4-68 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

A new browser page opens with the PMI object now in scope, and in the Work Instructions
Authoring page toolbar, the operation is reported as Selected. You can work in the new page, or
return to the original browser page, to work as you prefer.

Define 3D PMI in Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization

When you incorporate product manufacturing information (PMI) into your assembly process plans in
Process Planning for ETO, you can define how PMI is displayed in the Viewer panel for each operation by
capturing screen shots with PMI in product views in Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization.

Note:
Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization must be installed on your client machine.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Process tab, select an operation that contains assembly PMI in the engineering bill of
materials (EBOM) that is not shared with the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) and click
to visualize the PMI with part data in the Viewer panel.

3. On the Visuals panel beneath the Viewer panel, click Manage Product Views in Teamcenter
Visualization .

Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization opens, including assemblies, parts, operations, and PMI data.

4. In the Assembly page of the Project Workspace window, expand the hierarchy structure and select
the elements that you want to show in your screen shot.

Elements include parts, assemblies, subassemblies, operations, suboperations, and PMI data.

5. Add markup text and use the Manipulate PMI and Confirm PMI Manipulation commands to move
markup and PMI information not attached to nonvisible parts in the Viewing window.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-69

For details on adding markup, working with PMI, and other information on Teamcenter Lifecycle
Visualization, see the Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization online help on Support Center.

6. In the Project Workspace window, click the Snapshots page and add new product views of the
manipulated Viewing window.

You can add as many views as you like for use in Process Planning for ETO.

7. On the Snapshots page, select the product views, right-click one, and choose Save as Teamcenter
Product View.

8. In the New Teamcenter Product View Dataset dialog box, type a name for the dataset, click OK,
and in the Information message box, click OK.

9. Close Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization and return to the Teamcenter Easy Plan browser.

The snapshot views are available for use in the Visuals panel.

4-70 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Automatically update PMI from NX and Teamcenter JT sources

Using a defined workflow in Teamcenter, you can automatically update JT data containing product
manufacturing information (PMI) when JT files in a structure are changed and saved in NX and
Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner. Alternately, you can improve performance and scalability
by updating PMI information for a manually created list of specific JT nodes, thus avoiding the need to
update PMI information for an entire engineering bill of materials (EBOM).

Note:
To update an entire structure, no action is required but to make and save the changes in a
modeling program such as NX and in Teamcenter.

1. In the modeling program, update a subassembly in a structure by modifying the preferred

subassembly of the EBOM and then saving only that subassembly to Teamcenter.

The following example illustrates a selected middle subassembly for which PMI information has
been modified.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-71

Note:
For more information on PMI in NX, search for PMI in the appropriate version of the NX
Support Center documentation.

2. In Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner, in the EBOM, open the subassembly as an

attachment, right-click the subassembly JT file, and then choose Copy.

4-72 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. In the EBOM, select any node from the structure, press Ctrl + n, and in the New Process Dialog
dialog box, from the Process Template list, select PMI Characteristics Extractor.

4. In the Attachments tab, right-click the Targets folder, choose Paste to paste the JT file copy, and
click OK.

In Teamcenter Easy Plan, the updated PMI is visible in the PMI Assembly Level tab of the Work
Instructions Authoring page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 4-73

4-74 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
5. Manage MBOM
EBOM and MBOM alignment commands
Basic commands allow you to expand or collapse and pack and unpack Engineering Bill of Materials
(EBOM) and Manufacturing Bill of Materials (MBOM) assembly levels. If necessary, complete the
following step before proceeding to the basic commands below.

• Search for and open a work package or CC object in Manufacturing-BOM Manager with a linked
engineering bill of materials (EBOM) and manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) displayed on the
EBOM/MBOM Alignment page.

Expand and contract assembly levels

1. In the EBOM or MBOM, select an assembly.

2. (Optional) In the EBOM or MBOM toolbar, click Expand →Expand Below or Collapse Below .

Note:
You can also expand the structure a number of levels below a selected element:

a. In the toolbar, click → Expand to Level.

b. In the Expand to Level text box, type a number to indicate the level to which the assembly
should be expanded or collapsed.

c. Press Enter.

The assembly expands or collapses to the level you indicated.

Pack and unpack to collapse or expand element lines

1. In the EBOM or MBOM, select an assembly.

2. In the toolbar, click Expand →Pack, Unpack, Pack All, or Unpack All.

Note:
• In the EBOM, the number of packed lines is indicated by a number followed by the letter x
(for example, 3x to indicate that the packed line contains 3 packed lines.

• Since the primary task is to correctly assign parts and features from EBOM to MBOM,
assignment status icons appear in the EBOM display. For example, a full match icon

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-1

shows that all items in a packed line are assigned to the MBOM. Assignment statuses
might also show property mismatches such as over assigned or missing in source .

Remove elements from the EBOM or MBOM structure

1. Select one or more elements in the EBOM or MBOM, and in the EBOM or MBOM toolbar, click
Remove .

2. In the confirmation dialog box, click Remove again.

The elements are removed from the EBOM or MBOM structure.

Manage EBOM and MBOM columns

You can add, resize, remove, and drag columns to a different order in the EBOM or MBOM. For more
information, see Page Layouts and Navigation in the Active Workspace Fundamentals section of the
Active Workspace help. You can also match EBOM and MBOM table properties.

EBOM/MBOM assignment status icons

When you assign parts or assembly elements from the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to the
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), assignment indication icons are displayed in the Assignment
State columns of the EBOM and MBOM panels to indicate assignment statuses and help you to locate
and correct problem elements in the MBOM. Orange icons that are displayed in the Mismatch column
of the MBOM indicate mismatch details; those displayed in the Mismatch column of the EBOM often
indicate that an element contains assignments with different revisions. Once you find EBOM problems,
locate them in the MBOM, and correct them, the error icons are no longer displayed in the MBOM.

Note:
• You can quickly find problem EBOM elements in the MBOM by clicking the element's
Assignment State icon in the left column of the EBOM structure so that the MBOM structure is
highlighted. If multiple problems exist under the element (for example, 12 of 20 rivets from the
EBOM are assigned to one part and 6 of 20 are assigned to another, resulting in a negative sum
of 18 of 20 required rivets), you must correct them individually.

• In a similar way, you can find an assigned element in the EBOM from the MBOM.

(Blank) Unassigned to the MBOM.

All selected EBOM element's children are fully assigned to the MBOM.

The EBOM element is fully assigned to the MBOM. Click the icon to jump to the MBOM area in the
current scope and highlight the element in the MBOM panel.

5-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Some children of the selected EBOM are assigned to the MBOM, but not all.

A partial quantity is assigned to the MBOM element from the selected EBOM element.

The MBOM element has a different revision of the part assigned to it.

Contains parts assigned to the MBOM with a different revision.

The selected element is assigned to the MBOM multiple times.

Some descendants of the selected element are assigned to the MBOM, and some are assigned
multiple times.

The selected element is completely assigned to the MBOM multiple times.

The operation was deleted from the EBOM after it was allocated to the MBOM. This is a missing-in-
source error.

Find parts or assemblies in the EBOM or MBOM

You can search and find parts and assemblies in an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) or a
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

1. Open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

By default, you are searching by item ID.

2. In the EBOM or MBOM panel, select an assembly.

3. (Optional) To filter the search to a specific part or assembly of the MBOM, select that part or
assembly and in the MBOM toolbar, click Focus .

Note:
In focus mode, you can search only from the MBOM toolbar.

4. In the EBOM or MBOM toolbar, click .

By default, the command searches the EBOM or MBOM for a specific keyword or text string.

5. To search only the assembly you selected, select the Find within check box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-3

Note:
If you:

• Select the root node or part in the EBOM or MBOM, the Find within check box is not
available.

• Align domain subassemblies using change management or align separate MBOM

subassemblies to an EBOM using the Focus command from the MBOM toolbar, the
EBOM search is unavailable.

• Search with focus enabled from the MBOM toolbar, the Find within check box is grayed
out in the Find in MBOM panel and the search includes parts and assemblies within the
focused assembly only.

6. For more options click Advanced Search and select a different search option.

• Item ID searches for a full or partial part or assembly item ID.

• Item Revision searches for a full or partial part or assembly item revision name.

• Quick locates the first matching item in the tree and lets you jump between next and previous
results.

7. In the Find in EBOM or Find in MBOM panel, type the search term that you want to find in the
EBOM or MBOM.

Tip:
As in any standard search, you can use asterisks or wild cards to obtain multiple similar
results.

Example:
Type bolt_* to locate bolt_1, bolt_2, and so on.

8. In the Results list, select any preferred part or assembly.

Each selection highlights the selected object in the EBOMor MBOM.

9. (Optional) If the search brings multiple results and you want to review them individually, select a
result and in the Results subtab, click any of the following buttons.

5-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

If the item is associated with a 3D model, shows the selected search result only in the 3D
viewer panel.
Shows only the most recent results of structures that are not yet indexed.
Goes to the next or previous item in the search results.

Selects all search results (closes the search and selects all item results in the EBOM or MBOM
tab).

10. (Optional) To perform EBOM or MBOM commands related to search objects:

a. Select objects in the search results.

b. Select commands in the EBOM or MBOM.

11. Close the panel.

Find an assigned MBOM or EBOM element

You can quickly find an assignment from an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) element in a linked
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) by clicking the EBOM element's Show Consumption and
Impact State icon. In a similar way, you can find assigned elements in the EBOM from the MBOM, or
vice versa.

Note:
Even if you delay EBOM and MBOM assignment comparisons using the Show Assignment
State option, you can locate an EBOM element in a linked MBOM or vice versa. You can locate
an assigned EBOM element in the MBOM even if the MBOM scope is filtered using the Focus
command in the MBOM toolbar.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. Do one of the following.

• In the EBOM, right-click a part assigned to the MBOM and select Find in MBOM.

The part, if assigned, is highlighted in the MBOM.

Note:
If the part is assigned multiple times, the Find in MBOM command displays a link to each
assigned part occurrence. To locate a specific occurrence, click the appropriate link.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-5

• In the MBOM, right-click a non-manufacturing-specific element and select Find in EBOM.

The element is highlighted in the EBOM.

Note:
• If no IDC exists in the Teamcenter Rich Client, the EBOM element is not directly assigned
to the MBOM.

• If you attempt to locate a manufacturing-specific element in the EBOM using the Find in
EBOM command, a message displays stating that it is an MBOM-specific element that is
not represented in the EBOM.

• If an entire packed line in the EBOM is assigned unpacked in the MBOM, the Find
in EBOM command informs you that the equivalent occurrences in the MBOM are
unpacked and prompts you to find any equivalent occurrence in the EBOM by using
a Find an Occurrence command. The command then highlights any equivalent
occurrence in the MBOM. If the occurrences are split between different assemblies in
the MBOM, clicking the EBOM element displays a list of assemblies where the packed
elements are assigned to the MBOM. You can then use the Find in EBOM command and
use the Find an Occurrence command again to arbitrarily find an equivalent occurrence
in the MBOM.

Set advanced accountability check rules

Administrative users must specify accountability settings to automatically define which assignment
statuses are displayed on the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) and manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) in Manufacturing-BOM Manager.

1. Log into the Teamcenter Rich Client as an administrative user.

2. Select a work package created in Manufacturing-BOM Manager and send the package to
Manufacturing Process Planner.

3. Select the top line in the EBOM and then select Tools→Accountability Check→Advanced
Accountability Check.

4. Select the Inclusion Rules tab, and then select the Search lines per filtering rule.

5. From the Source filtering rule and Target filtering rule lists, select
AccountabilityLinkedAssmOrLeaves to compare leaf nodes and assigned assembly nodes but
exclude appearance group lines.

6. Select Do not compare selected lines to ensure that lines selected in the EBOM and MBOM are not
automatically compared in Manufacturing-BOM Manager.

5-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

7. On the Reporting tab, select Display Options and select the Consider quality rollup for multiple
match check box to work with parts with quantity values.

8. On the Partial Match tab, select which properties should result in partial matches when EBOM and
MBOM are compared in Manufacturing-BOM Manager.

9. Click Save to Available Settings , and in the Save to Available Settings dialog box, give your
settings a unique name, and click OK.

The defined settings now define which assignment status icons appear in your work package's
EBOM and MBOM.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-7

Identifying assignment statuses of packed EBOM lines

In an engineering bill of materials (EBOM), if you pack a specific structure line or lines, you can view the
status of the individual packed lines (occurrences) by pausing your mouse over the EBOM assignment
icon. The example below reports that all line occurrences in a packed line with a fully assigned icon
are assigned to the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

5-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Partially assigned line occurrences in a packed line are indicated by the partially assigned icon .

If you select a partially assigned line by clicking and choosing Unpack, any line occurrence partially
assigned to the MBOM is displayed. In this example, only a single line occurrence is assigned.

To resolve the issue, click the assignment icon in the EBOM to locate the part in the MBOM where all
previously packed lines should be assigned. You can then click each unassigned line in the EBOM, and in
the MBOM toolbar, click to assign each unassigned occurrence line.

If you repack the assembly in the EBOM, it now displays as fully assigned . If you assign a line
occurrence more than once it displays an overassigned icon , and if it is packed again the overassigned
icon remains. Unpacking partially or overassigned icons in the EBOM and viewing their assignments in
the MBOM lets you better understand the nature of their overall statuses.

Match EBOM and MBOM table properties

Provided that an administrator has set preferences to do so, you can carry over certain properties from
the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) when assigning
elements so that they display as columns in both structures when you make or change assignments.
Preferences in the Teamcenter rich client related to property carry overs include:

• MEEffectivityAssigmentMode, which defines the assignment behavior from EBOM to MBOM for the
BOM line property bl_occ_effectivity. The value of this preference must be set to 1.

• MEAlignedPropertiesList, which specifies the supported BOM line properties for alignment
initialization, out-of-synch detection, and synchronization. The value of this preference must be set to
bl_occ_effectivity.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-9

When you perform the following procedure, you see how column properties set using the preferences
described above affect both the EBOM element and any MBOM elements assigned to the MBOM.

1. Open a Manufacturing-BOM Manager work package.

2. In the EBOM, select an unassigned assembly with either a specific revision level or a specific
occurrence effectivity (a date range or range of units for which the assembly is valid for
manufacturing, such as units 1 to 199).

Tip:
You can select multiple parts and assemblies as long as they reflect the MBOM parts and
assemblies to which you will assign them.

3. In the MBOM, select the assembly where the unassigned assembly will be assigned, and in the
EBOM toolbar, click Assign Parts Selected in EBOM .

The number of elements assigned to the MBOM assembly is reported. If the EBOM assembly and
parts are the same as those in the MBOM, the EBOM assembly and parts display the full match icon
and the revision and occurrence effectivity columns are carried over.

In the image below, an engineering user has changed the EBOM by for example, removing a part
from the EBOM assembly and saving it as a new revision. The EBOM displays a property mismatch
icon next to the full match icon. The property mismatch icon also appears in the MBOM
because the EBOM has a B revision while the MBOM has an A revision. The part removed by the
engineer user from the EBOM also displays a missing in EBOM icon in the MBOM.

5-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Select the part showing a missing-in-EBOM icon in the MBOM, and in the MBOM toolbar, click
Remove .

The part is removed from the MBOM.

Assign parts to the MBOM

Check out MBOM parts and assemblies

When an administrator sets the value of the preference MBM_CheckoutCheckForFocus to true, you
can check out parts and assemblies to avoid working simultaneously with other colleagues on areas of
the same manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) in the same work package. This capability is similar to
manufacturing checkin and checkout in Manufacturing Process Planner.

• In the MBOM panel, press Ctrl or Shift and select one or more parts or assemblies to be checked out,
and in the MBOM toolbar, do one of the following.

• Choose Manage →Check Out .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-11

• Click Focus , and when prompted to check out the object or objects and set the focus, click
Check Out and Focus.

The value Y appears in the MBOM Checked Out column, and your user ID appears in the Checked
Out by User column. These values are also visible to other users. If you chose to set focus, the
MBOM refreshes to indicate your selection.

Note:
• Your administrator can customize the names of the Checked Out and Checked Out by User
columns in the Teamcenter business modeler integrated development environment (BMIDE).

• To undo your checkout, select the part or assembly you checked out and choose Manage
→Cancel Checkout .

• To check in your work when finished, choose Manage →Check In .

Assign and remove EBOM elements in an MBOM

This procedure walks you through the basics of assigning and removing parts from an engineering bill
of materials (EBOM) and manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) using MBOM toolbar commands. This
example demonstrates the effect of overassigning a part from the EBOM to the MBOM and how to
correct that error.

Note:
When assigning nodes from an EBOM to an MBOM in Manufacturing-BOM Manager, ensure that
the Show Assignment State option is not selected to improve the performance. Use Show
Assignment State only when you want to check the partial or complete assignment status
between the EBOM and MBOM.

1. Search for and open a work package with a linked EBOM and MBOM, and then open the EBOM-
MBOM Alignment page.

2. In the MBOM, select an element that you want to assign from the EBOM.

3. In the EBOM, select a line without a full match assignment indication icon , and in the MBOM
toolbar, click Assign .

The variant formula of the MBOM element combines the variant formula of the selected element
in the EBOM with the variant formula of its aligned design occurrence. A design BOM is a design
structure intended to serve as a virtual represention of the product geometry.

5-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Example:
The variant formula of the element Wheel is ModelFamily = Sports in the EBOM. The
variant of the corresponding element Wheel in the design BOM is Wheel_Base = Long.
When the EBOM element is assigned to MBOM, the corresponding element Wheel in the
MBOM has the following variant formula:

ModelFamily = Sports & Wheel_base = Long

Once elements are assigned, accountability is calculated automatically. The EBOM line shows a red
icon to indicate that the element is over assigned in the MBOM. Assignment status icons help
you to locate and correct problem elements in the MBOM.

Note:
You can also assign and remove multiple parts and assemblies.

4. With the assembly still selected in the MBOM, do the following.

a. In the MBOM toolbar, click Remove .

b. In the confirmation dialog box, click Remove again.

The additional element is removed from the MBOM structure and the EBOM icon displays a full
match .

Note:
You can also remove elements from the EBOM and multiple assigned parts and assemblies.

Run a complete EBOM-MBOM assignment comparison

When working with an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) and a manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) in either standard or focus mode on the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, you can run a
complete assignment comparison.

When you run a complete comparison, all assignment statuses are shown in both the EBOM and
MBOM, across all engineering and manufacturing assignment domains. When you run a complete
comparison with focus mode set to a manufacturing assembly that is not associated with a specific
EBOM assignment domain, this approach lets you identify parts that are out of focus, overassigned, and
so on. For more details on assignment domains, see Update equivalent assignment scopes.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-13

Note:
You can also run a partial comparison that displays assignment indications in either the EBOM or
the MBOM, but not both.

Procedure

1. With the MBMOnDemandCompare preference set to true in Teamcenter, search for and open a
work package and navigate to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. Select Show Assignment State.

Assignment indication icons are now displayed in the Assignment State column of the EBOM and
MBOM panels.

3. (Optional) Filter the scope of EBOM and MBOM alignments.

a. In the EBOM, select an EBOM assembly.

b. In the MBOM, select an MBOM assembly to which parts in the EBOM assembly are assigned.

c. In the MBOM toolbar, click Focus .

All elements outside the selected EBOM and MBOM assembly and subassembly become
unavailable.

5-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. To improve performance when assigning elements from the EBOM to the MBOM, temporarily
disable Show Assignment State.

5. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, make any assignments or other adjustments between the
EBOM and MBOM, and then select Show Assignment State.

Assignment indications are not displayed in the Assignment State columns of the EBOM and
MBOM panels.

6. To finish and turn off the comparison, select Show Assignment State.

Assignment indication icons are now removed from the Assignment State column of the EBOM
and MBOM panels.

Partially compare EBOM elements in an MBOM

You can partially compare a part or assembly in an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to review its
assignment inside or outside a selected scope in a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

When you run a partial comparison, assignment statuses are shown in either the EBOM or the
MBOM, but not both. Since you are comparing specific manufacturing or engineering assemblies and
assignment domains, this approach results in much less content and in faster results.

Note:
• Partial comparison is available only in focus mode.

• You can also run a complete comparison to display assignment statuses for both the EBOM and
MBOM.

• The values of the preferences MBMEnableBOMFiltering and MBMOnDemandCompare must

be set to true.

• If the value of the preference MBM_HideOutOfScopeIndications = false, you can only

partially compare EBOM or MBOM elements with associated assignment domains. If
MBM_HideOutOfScopeIndications = false, you can partially compare any EBOM or MBOM
element.

1. Search for and open a work package and navigate to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. Filter the scope of EBOM and MBOM alignments.

a. In the EBOM, select an EBOM assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-15

b. In the MBOM, select an MBOM assembly to which parts in the EBOM assembly are assigned.

c. In the MBOM toolbar, click Focus .

All elements outside the selected EBOM and MBOM assemblies become unavailable.

3. Ensure that Show Assignment State is not enabled.

Tip:
Use Show Assignment State to compare the whole structure. When Show Assignment
State is enabled at the top of the page, the Show Assignment State right-click command,
which allows you to partially compare EBOM and MBOM structures, is not available.

4. In the EBOM panel, right-click the element that you want to partially compare to the MBOM, and
select Show Assignment State.

The EBOM displays assignment icons for the selected element and its associated elements, except
for parts or assemblies unassigned to the MBOM, which display no status icon. A message reports
the assembly for which the assignment state is displayed.

5-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. To view assignment statuses in the MBOM, reselect the MBOM assembly you selected in step 2,
right-click the EBOM assembly you selected in step 2, and then choose Show Assignment State.

The MBOM displays all assignment indications except fully assigned and assigned to the MBOM
multiple times .

6. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, make any assignments or other adjustments between the
EBOM and MBOM, and then select Show Assignment State.

7. In the EBOM or MBOM, resolve assignment mismatches, and in the Assignment state shown for
message above the EBOM, click Refresh.

Updated changes, as they relate to the BOM, are reflected in the assignment icons.

8. To finish and turn off the partial comparison, in the message at the top of the MBOM panel, click
Dismiss.

Run assign and remove actions in the background

You or an administrator can determine when assign and remove actions run in the background. This
prevents long delays and possible disconnection from the server when you assign many parts from an

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-17

engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) at the same time, or
when you remove many parts from an MBOM.

Procedure

1. Using the preference MBMMinimumLimitForBackgroundMode in Teamcenter, define the

minimum number of lines that you can select and assign or remove without any delay.

If you assign or remove more elements than you specify in the preference
MBMMinimumLimitForBackgroundMode, those actions run in the background without affecting
your system's current performance.

Example:
If MBMMinimumLimitForBackgroundMode = 1000, when you assign 1000 or more lines
from the EBOM to the MBOM, or remove 1000 or more lines from the MBOM, the actions run
in the background.

2. Search for and open a work package with a linked EBOM and MBOM displayed on the EBOM-
MBOM Alignment page.

3. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, select a number of elements greater than the number
defined in the MBMMinimumLimitForBackgroundMode preference.

• From the EBOM list, and in the MBOM toolbar, click Assign Parts Selected in EBOM .

• From the MBOM list, and in the MBOM toolbar, click Remove .

Tip:
You can also filter the scope of the EBOM and MBOM alignments that take effect when you
define the MBMMinimumLimitForBackgroundMode preference, and then assign or remove
elements. To filter the scope, select a manufacturing subassembly in the MBOM, and in the
MBOM toolbar, click Focus .

A message is displayed, informing you that you may now assign or remove assignments in the
background, and that if you choose to do so, you will receive a message when the actions are
finished.

4. In the message dialog box, click Assign in Background or Cancel.

5. (Optional) Assign or remove elements in the background as needed, and perform any other
actions, including performing work within another scope in the MBOM or working in a different
work package.

6. To verify that the background task is completed, in the lower-left corner of Teamcenter Easy Plan,
look for a notification, and if one is available, click Alerts .

5-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Details of the notification are displayed regarding the background action.

7. In the notification, click the work package link.

The EBOM-MBOM Alignment page displays the new assignments where you assigned them.

Understanding domain subassemblies

A domain is a previously defined scope created when you align separate MBOM subassemblies to a
portion of an EBOM. Assignment domain relations, which are like an accountability check that lets you
limit the scope of areas compared, might include:

An EBOM assembly that is assigned

one-to-one to an MBOM assembly.
Two or more EBOM assemblies that are
assigned to a single MBOM assembly.
An EBOM assembly with assignments
distributed across two or more MBOM
assemblies.

To define domain subassemblies, you must:

• Set the value of the preference MBMEnableBOMFiltering to true.

• Set the preference MBMEnableBOMFilteringDesc to true. This preference performs alignments

between subsections of the EBOM and MBOM by showing only relevant nodes based on a relation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-19

• (Optional) Add item types to the preference MBMAssignmentDomainMBOMTypes. This preference

specifies which item types in the MBOM structure can be used to define an assignment domain
relation. Default values include an empty input format, ItemRevision, CustomPartRevision, and
others.

Pairing a usage EBOM with an MBOM

Many bill of materials (BOM) types are used in Teamcenter. When you use an engineering BOM (EBOM)
to assign a part two or more times to a manufacturing BOM (MBOM), there is only one actual part, and
all copies assigned to the MBOM are simply occurrences or instances of that part. These instances do not
have their own separate lifecycles, so if you change the actual part, that change affects all instances as
well.

Unlike a standard EBOM, a usage EBOM is saved with an item rather than with a BOM view
revision (BVR) object. In a usage EBOM, you can revise each occurrence individually, with your own
transformation and other properties. A usage EBOM derives from one or more partitions of a product
BOM (PBOM) and defines the usages for each design. Partitions divide manufacturing products into
useful subcomponents (for example, individual cabins on a ship). All partitions are created within
partition schemes, which are hierarchical collections of partitions that can be functional, spatial, or
physical.

You can pair a usage EBOM with an MBOM in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page in a mixed-mode
state, in which elements in the usage EBOM display part or product usage icons , while the same
elements assigned to the MBOM display BVR part icons.

Assignment status icons appear and function the same as they do in standard EBOM-MBOM mode.
This is also true of all other aspects of managing the MBOM, including assigning and removing EBOM
elements in an MBOM, finding an assigned MBOM element in the EBOM, and configuring EBOM or
MBOM work structure rules.

5-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
• When you select Configure →Configuration from the EBOM toolbar, the Configuration
panel for the usage EBOM contains a PARTITION SCHEME group. When you select a preferred
scheme from the Physical Partition Scheme list, all elements specific to that scheme are visible
in the EBOM.

• The PARTITION SCHEME group is not available if you access the Configuration panel from the
MBOM toolbar.

Add a serial or lot number to a part or tool

You may be required to apply serial or lot numbers both to parts or tools in a step.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator determines which parts and tools require serial or lot numbers.

1. Display the Part or Tools list table view, and review the Quantity column for any packed lines with
values greater than 1.

You cannot apply a serial or lot number to a packed line. You must apply a serial or lot number only
to individual parts or tools.

2. Select each packed line and click Unpack .

The line is unpacked into separate lines, all of which share the same find number.

3. Select the line for which you want to add a serial or lot number and click Edit Serial and Lot
Numbers .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-21

Tip:
The Edit Serial and Lot Numbers option is only active when a part or tool requires a serial or
lot number. If the Edit Serial and Lot Numbers button is dimmed, the part or tool does not
require a serial or lot number.

4. In the Serial No. or Lot No. pane, type a value.

Tip:
You can also add numbers by clicking in either the Serial Number or Lot Number text box
and retrieving the relevant part bar code from a scanner.

5. Click Save.

In the Parts panel, the value is in the SERIAL NUMBER or LOT NUMBER columns.

6. Select one of the unpacked lines and click Pack .

Change the quantity of parts

If the quantity property value for a single part in the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) is equal
to the sum quantity of multiple parts in the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), you can set the
EBOM value to appear as equivalent (a full match) in your accountability check results. To allow you
to do this, an administrator must select the Consider quality rollup for multiple match check box on
the Inclusion Rules tab of the Advanced Accountability Check dialog box in Manufacturing Process
Planner and apply the setting to your user profile.

For more information, see Roll up equivalent line quantities in accountability checks in the
Manufacturing Process Planner section of the Teamcenter help.

Example:
For an airplane assembly in the EBOM, the quantity for a single part is set to 100. In the MBOM, 85
are assigned to one part in the right wing, and another 15 to the fuselage. The quantity property
allows the accountability check to appear as a full match in the EBOM part because the different
quantities assigned to the different MBOM parts are equal to the EBOM quantity.

1. Open a work package created in Multi-BOM Manager.

2. In the EBOM, select a part, such as a rivet, with a value in the Quality column.

5-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The selected part shows a full match .

3. In the MBOM, select one of the parts containing a quantity value and in the MBOM toolbar, click
Edit .

4. Double-click the value on the Quantity column and edit it to 80, and then in the MBOM toolbar,
click Save Edits .

In the EBOM, the rivet part displays a partial quantity icon to indicate that the EBOM part
quantity is greater than the sum of the MBOM part quantities.

• If the sum of the MBOM quantity is greater than the EBOM part quantity, the part displays an over
assigned icon .

• As long as your administrator has set up your advanced accountability check rules correctly, when
assigning an EBOM part that contains a quantity value to multiple parts in an MBOM, click Edit in
the MBOM toolbar to specify quantities for each MBOM part, and when the EBOM part displays the
full match icon , click Save Edits to save the MBOM. You can change your MBOM quantities at
any time as long as they add up to the EBOM part quantity value.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-23

Add manufacturing specific components to MBOM

Add a manufacturing-specific part or container

You can add a part, assembly, or container to your manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) without
generating errors when accountability checks automatically compare the engineering bill of materials
(EBOM) to the MBOM, because manufacturing elements such as welds, resources, and containers do
not exist in the EBOM and thus report no assignment indications. You can also create a manufacturing
element from an existing element that duplicates that element but simply reuses, or references, that
element.

To hide assignment indications, your administrator must specify a filtering rule in the Advanced
Accountability Check dialog box in the Teamcenter Rich Client.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. If you are creating a new, unreferenced manufacturing element:

a. Select an assembly in the MBOM panel, and in the MBOM toolbar, click New → Create
Manufacturing Element .

b. In the Add dialog box, type a name and optional description for the element and click Add.

The new manufacturing element is created in the MBOM under the same node as assembly
you initially selected.

3. If you are creating a manufacturing element based on a selected element:, then in the MBOM
panel:

a. Select the source element and click New → Create Based On .

In the Create Based On dialog box, the ID of the selected element is displayed in the ID text
box, with a Revision value of A.

b. To create a new element with just the ID, do not edit the ID text box; to append a name to the
same ID, in the Name text box, type the name to be appended to the ID and click Create.

The source element is duplicated in the MBOM under the same node as the source. The new
manufacturing element references the same elements with the same IDs and revisions, but
does not duplicate any effectivity.

4. Select the new or referenced manufacturing element in the MBOM, and in the MBOM toolbar, click
Edit .

5-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

You can now modify specific properties in the MBOM table columns of your manufacturing element and
click Save → Save Edits , and then use the element for manufacturing-specific operations, such as
adding fixtures and resources.

Remove a manufacturing-specific part or container

You can remove a part, assembly, or container from your EBOM or MBOM.

1. Select one or more elements in the EBOM or MBOM, and click Remove .

2. In the confirmation dialog box, click Remove.

The elements are removed from the EBOM or MBOM structure.

Assign EBOM or manufacturing representation assemblies to an MBOM

You can choose to assign EBOM or manufacturing representation assemblies, or "mini MBOMs," to
manufacturing representation lines in an MBOM.

Note:
To enable this functionality:

• The values of the preferences MBMEnableModularMBOM and

MbmReleaseStatusForModularBom must be set correctly.

• The value of the preference MBMUseEBOMAsIs must be set to true. If MBMUseEBOMAsIs =

false, you can only assign manufacturing representations.

1. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the EBOM panel, select the manufacturing
representation lines that you want to assign, and in the MBOM toolbar, click Assign .

Tip:
The manufacturing representation lines are indicated by Has Manufacturing
Representation icons.

The Manufacturing Representations dialog box is displayed, reporting the number of

manufacturing representations that exist for the first line in your selection. The name of the
selected line is reported at the top of the dialog box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-25

Note:
When MBMUseEBOMAsIs = false and the selected EBOM node has only one manufacturing
representation, the Manufacturing Representation dialog box is not displayed, and the
single manufacturing representation is directly assigned to the MBOM.

2. If you selected a single line, select one of the following, and then click Assign.

• Use existing manufacturing representation to assign the single manufacturing representation.

• Assign EBOM Assembly to assign the source EBOM assembly.

3. If you selected multiple lines, do the following.

a. To assign a manufacturing representation that exists for the first EBOM line in your selection,
select Use existing manufacturing representation or Assign EBOM Assembly.

Note:
The name of the selected line is reported at the top of the dialog box.

b. If you chose Use existing manufacturing representation, select the preferred

manufacturing representation, and click Assign and Next.

The name of the second selected line is reported at the top of the dialog box.

c. To assign a manufacturing representation that exists for the second line in your EBOM
selection, select Use existing manufacturing representation or Assign EBOM Assembly.

d. If you chose Use existing manufacturing representation, select the preferred

manufacturing representation, and click Assign.

e. Repeat this process for any additional lines in your EBOM selection.

The relevant EBOM or manufacturing representation assemblies are assigned to the EBOM.

Reuse small MBOM manufacturing representations in a single MBOM

You can assign elements from more than one manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) previously created
from an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to a single target manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).
Reusing previous work from these manufacturing representations, or "mini MBOMs," saves considerable
planning time.

1. To allow reuse of existing manufacturing representations taken from a high-level product EBOM,
set the value of the preference MBMEnableModularMBOM to true.

5-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. Open a work package containing the source EBOM that is used in other mini MBOMs, as well as the
preferred target MBOM, in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

A column in the EBOM displays Has Manufacturing Representation icons to indicate EBOM
source elements that are reused in external manufacturing representations, or mini-MBOMs. These
manufacturing representations are available for reuse in your target MBOM.

When you pause your mouse over the Has Manufacturing Representation icons, the number of
representations available for reuse in your target MBOM is reported.

3. To assign a manufacturing representation from the source EBOM to the target MBOM, select the
appropriate line containing representation elements in the EBOM and the line below which it
should be added to the MBOM, and in the MBOM toolbar, click Apply .

4. At the prompt that appears displaying one or more manufacturing representation MBOMs, select
the preferred representation and click Assign.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-27

The mini-MBOM assembly is assigned under the line you selected in the target MBOM. The
Revision Name column reports the mini-MBOM manufacturing representation source, and copies
that source's unique in context ID (IDIC) and source occurrence effectivity properties.

5. Click the assignment icon on the line that contains the manufacturing representation in the
EBOM to highlight the reused element in the target MBOM.

6. To assign other manufacturing representations to the target MBOM, repeat steps 3-5 for each line
containing manufacturing representations and each target MBOM line.

If multiple manufacturing representations are assigned to a single line, you can assign each
instance to different target MBOM lines.

Restructure the MBOM

Restructure an MBOM

You can move or restructure parts and assemblies in your manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) by
dragging elements to new locations in the MBOM structure.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts, and then open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. Select one or more parts or assemblies in an MBOM assembly and drag the contents to another
assembly.

The selected elements disappear from the first part or assembly and appear in the second.

Cut, copy, and paste MBOM elements

To further restructure your manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), you can cut or copy elements in an
MBOM structure and then paste new or referenced elements elsewhere in the same structure.

1. Search for and open a work package and navigate to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

5-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. (Optional) In the MBOM, select a manufacturing subassembly to limit the scope of your work to
that area and click Focus .

3. Select one or more elements to be copied or cut, and then do one of the following:

• To copy an instance of an element and paste it as a referenced copy of the original element, click
Copy .

• To cut and move an element to another location, click Cut .

You cannot cut or copy the top line element of an MBOM, or an MBOM element for which you do
not have permissions.

4. To paste the cut or copied element to another location, right-click the element under which the
element should be pasted, and then do one of the following:

• To paste an instance of a copied element, click Paste as Reference .

By default, referenced copies of an element display an MEOther relation in the Occurrence Type
column of the MBOM and display the same ID as the original element.

Tip:
Your administrator can define a different relation value (for example, MEHandle,
MEAssigned, or MECustAssign) using the preference MBMPasteAsReferenceType.
If no value is defined in the preference, no occurrence type value is assigned.

• To paste a cut element, click Paste .

Note:
• You cannot cut or copy an element and then navigate to a different MBOM page or work
package and then paste that element outside the original MBOM.

• When in focus mode, you cannot cut, copy, and paste elements within the focused area to
assemblies or elements outside the focused area.

Edit MBOM properties in Microsoft Excel

You can export a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), or a selected area of that MBOM, as a
Microsoft Excel (.xslm) spreadsheet file. You can then modify the properties of objects in Excel and
import it back into Manufacturing-BOM Manager to update the original MBOM structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-29

Procedure

1. Search for and open a work package with a linked EBOM and MBOM displayed on the EBOM-
MBOM Alignment page.

2. (Optional) To filter the MBOM scope, select a manufacturing subassembly in the MBOM, and in the
MBOM toolbar, click Focus .

3. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the MBOM panel, select the assembly that contains the
properties that you want to modify in Excel.

4. In the MBOM toolbar, select Excel Round-trip → Export to Excel .

5. In the Export To Excel dialog box, do the following.

a. In the SETTINGS group, select the Allow Structure Changes in Excel check box to make
MBOM line properties editable in Excel.

Note:
The Include ID as Hyperlink and Include Outline Numbers check boxes are not
functional.

b. In the PROPERTIES group, do one of the following.

• From the Template list, select an Excel template.

• Select Customize and select a specific property you want to review or modify from the list.

(Optional) From the SELECTED PROPERTIES toolbar, do any of the following.

Move Up Move the selected column up in the list for quicker access
in the future.
Move Down Move the selected column down in the list for quicker
access in the future.
Add Properties Add additional properties to be edited in Excel by clearing
any check boxes that you do not want to include from a
list of all available properties and then clicking Add.

c. Ignore the Run in Background check box, it is not functional.

d. Click Export.

In your browser download location, an .xlsm file is generated.

5-30 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. Navigate to the file location and open the file in Excel.

7. Edit and modify the object properties as needed.

8. Save and close the Excel file.

9. Return to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page and in the MBOM toolbar, select Excel Round-trip
→ Import Changes .

10. In the Import Changes dialog box, click Choose File and navigate to the Excel file.

11. With the Overwrite Conflicts check box selected, click Import.

The MBOM structure is updated with your modifications. The assignment statuses are updated as
well.

Align separate MBOM subassemblies to an EBOM

For large engineering bill of materials (EBOM) structures, assigning elements from an EBOM to a
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) can be a wide-ranging and time-consuming task. You can more
easily break this process into separate subassemblies and perform authoring tasks on smaller structure
nodes.

1. In Teamcenter, set domain subassembly preferences.

2. In Teamcenter Easy Plan, open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page of the work package that
contains the subassemblies to be aligned.

3. In the EBOM, select an assembly; in the MBOM, select the subassembly to be aligned; and in the
MBOM toolbar, click Assignment Scope →Associate Assignment Scope .

An assignment domain relation is created between the engineering assembly and the
manufacturing subassembly. You can confirm this assignment by viewing the EBOM assembly
name in the MBOM Assignment Domain column.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-31

Note:
You can remove the assignment at any time by selecting the manufacturing assembly in the
MBOM and selecting Assignment Scope →Remove Assignment Scope .

4. In the MBOM toolbar, select the manufacturing subassembly, and then click Focus .

The EBOM and MBOM panels are filtered to reflect only the scope that you selected and in the
MBOM toolbar, standard authoring commands are now available. The EBOM assembly is displayed
in the MBOM Assignment Domain column. The 3D viewer panel is also filtered to display only
elements in the selected scope.

5. From the EBOM, assign parts and other elements to the MBOM subassembly as you would from an
EBOM assembly to a full MBOM assembly.

6. To review the effect of your assignments to the complete EBOM-MBOM structure, click Focus .

You can also redefine the scope of the EBOM assembly to a different subassembly by selecting a
different MBOM subassembly and clicking Focus again.

In the EBOM, when the focus is removed, assembly indication icons are not displayed to improve
the performance. The MBOM Assignment Domain column displays the EBOM assembly for any
additional subassemblies assigned to the MBOM.

7. Select the appropriate MBOM subassembly and click Focus again.

With the focus applied, the EBOM now displays assignment icons.

5-32 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• icons indicate elements that are assigned inside the MBOM subassembly, and you can select
these in the EBOM to review their location in the MBOM.

• icons indicate elements that are assigned to a different manufacturing assembly that is
outside the scope of the MBOM subassembly. Their locations cannot be viewed by clicking them
in the EBOM.

Aligning the EBOM to the MBOM

Access EBOM-MBOM alignment data

You can align the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to the manufacturing BOM (MBOM) before you
begin process planning or author work instructions.

Note:
Unless you have special permissions, you cannot modify the EBOM. During alignment tasks, you
must make all of your changes in the MBOM.

1. Search for a work package, and select it in the results list.

2. Click EBOM-MBOM Alignment.

3. Select Work without tracking changes, and click Continue.

Tip:
To use change management during EBOM-MBOM alignment, select Track with change
notice, then select a change notice and click Continue.

4. Perform EBOM and MBOM alignment tasks.

EBOM-MBOM Alignment page

The default EBOM-MBOM Alignment interface may look different from that displayed below because
your administrator can configure many aspects of it. The page consists of two panels, an engineering bill
of materials (EBOM, left) and a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM, right). Both EBOM and MBOM
configurations are independent, as are the toolbar options above either panel. While manufacturing
engineers do not have write access to the read-only EBOM, they can access toolbar navigation
commands that allow them to compare and update EBOM-MBOM using structure and 3D graphic views,
and can make MBOM-related changes using:

• New and existing work packages that contain EBOM and MBOM data.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-33

• Assignment status icons that indicate the current status of assembly and part elements that are
unassigned or fully, partially, and over assigned from the EBOM to the MBOM. Assignment statuses
also indicate element changes that impact the MBOM, such as revisions and deletions.

• The ability to restructure, revise, and release one or more MBOM structures or the entire MBOM.

• Table columns that allow you to manually match EBOM and MBOM properties, and change part
quantities.

• Change management.

A change notice records engineering design changes to a product. You can associate work packages
with change notices or propagate changes from EBOM to MBOM using tree structures rather than
change notices.

• Variants, revisions, and occurrence effectivity settings for selected elements.

Note:
• Authoring of variant rules is not supported.

• Using a mixture of legacy and product configurator variants can cause data corruption.
By default, the system uses the preference ME_EnableMixVariantModelCheck to
prevent loading structures that use a mixture of these variants. If you are using
only one variant, or no workflow results in mixed variants, change the value of
ME_EnableMixVariantModelCheck to false. This value enables the system to open
structures without a check.

• Visual comparisons of differences between MBOM and EBOM CAD models using separate 3D viewer
panels for each.

For more information on 3D viewer options, see the Visualizing 3D Product Data section of the Active
Workspace online help.

5-34 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The top line displays the work package name. Above each panel, a bread crumb indicates
where you are in each structure (in this case, idf_air_craft for the EBOM and Wing_asm for
the MBOM). When Show Assignment State is enabled, indications in the first few columns of
the tables below the configuration areas and toolbars show assignment status and property
mismatches.

The Configuration button lets you configure EBOM, MBOM, BOP, and other structures. The
Full Screen button lets you expand the interface to hide or show everything but the task and
the EBOM and MBOM panels.

The configuration headers display current values and functions that you can modify using the
Configuration button above. You can change revision list, date, units, and variants.

The areas above the EBOM and MBOM are task-related, meaning that the manufacturing
engineer can make alterations to some properties. You can move between parent and child
elements in the panel trees using the bread crumb trail > or the tree navigation in either panel.

The EBOM toolbar lets you review part and assembly elements to be assigned to appropriate
locations in the MBOM. You can validate effectivity coverage, find parts or assemblies in the
EBOM, change configuration EBOM rules, and view selected EBOM part or assembly properties.

The MBOM toolbar lets you author and configure MBOM parts and assemblies by:

• Assigning EBOM elements to an MBOM by navigating EBOM/MBOM structures.

• Adding and removing manufacturing elements such as containers and welds (phantom
nodes) not used in the EBOM.

• Matching EBOM and MBOM table properties.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-35

• Revising manufacturing assemblies.

• Releasing MBOM changes to a workflow or submitting MBOM changes to a workflow.

• Configuring EBOM or MBOM rules such as occurrence effectivities and dash rolls.

• Finding parts or assemblies in the MBOM, or finding an assigned MBOM element in the
EBOM.

• Viewing selected MBOM parts or assemblies in the 3D viewer panel, or viewing detailed part
or assembly summary properties.

• Restructuring an MBOM by moving assigned parts and MBOM-specific nodes as needed.

• Associating a work package with a change notice and using the Change Summary panel to
decide which changes are updated from the EBOM in an MBOM.

• Editing selected object properties in Microsoft Excel.

• Configuring variant conditions on MBOM nodes just as you would on operations from the
Process Planning page.

Learn more about navigating.

By default, the panels below the EBOM and MBOM screen display summary overview
information about the element selected in either panel. From the EBOM or MBOM toolbars, you
can use the Show Summary button to view part or assembly summary properties, or switch
to the 3D viewer panel below the EBOM or MBOM panels. The 3D viewer panel lets you explore
3D data (JT) associated with parts and assemblies. You can use the panel to manipulate views,
query and measure parts and features, view part and assembly level product and manufacturing
information (PMI), and create 3D sections through your data.
For details on using the 3D viewer common to Active Workspace, see the Visualizing 3D Product
Data section in the Active Workspace help.

Partially comparing in-scope elements with no assignment domains

You can compare subassemblies with no defined assignment domains.

In the example, the third line in the EBOM has connected assignment domains and shows partial
assignment icons. The next line has no connected assignment domains and also shows partial
assignment icons. The subassemblies show partial comparisons only when both are selected in focus
mode.

5-36 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Revise manufacturing parts or assemblies

When you want to apply changes to a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) from an engineering bill
of materials (EBOM), you can implement all change revisions for a single part or assembly or multiple
parts or assemblies from the MBOM.

• In the MBOM, select one or more part or assembly lines and in the MBOM toolbar, select Manage
→Revise , and in the prompt, click Revise again.

The revision updates to reflect the changes (for example, A changes to B, B to C).

Note:
Unless you have special access, you can only revise assemblies in the MBOM, not the EBOM.

Collaborate using Share

Share collaboration in Teamcenter Easy Plan

Share project files

Share is a collaborative cloud application that allows you to share project files with your partners, team
members, and manufacturers, from anywhere, at any time.

With a simple browser-based collaboration, you can work on new products and designs, and then share
your projects with customers for approval or with manufacturers for production. File sharing with Share
is secure because you control access to the files. The sharing history is available, and the file exchange
and location is tracked and recorded.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-37

Example:
For example purposes, you are a manufacturing engineer using Teamcenter and Teamcenter Easy
Plan to create a project. You work with a supplier, who does not use Teamcenter or Teamcenter
Easy Plan, but needs to review and provide feedback about the files you create for the project.

By leveraging the Teamcenter Easy Plan integration to Share, you can share:

• CAD part files (NX and Solid Edge)

• Documents (Microsoft Office, PDFs)

• Image files (JPG, PNG, TIFF, etc.)

• Visualization files (JT)

Set up Share with Teamcenter Easy Plan

You must set up Share with Teamcenter Easy Plan before you can use it.

Prerequisites

Before you set up Share, you must have:

• An Share license.

• An account with Share.

• A Webkey account.

Setting up Share with Teamcenter Easy Plan

To set up Share, see Install Teamcenter Share in the Active Workspace documentation.

Share files from Teamcenter Easy Plan to Share

As the manufacturing engineer, you can share JT files, Microsoft Office documents, and PDFs from
Teamcenter Easy Plan to Share. Then you can invite a supplier to collaborate with you on those files.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring
page.

2. In the Process panel or tab, select a process, and click the Files tab at the bottom of the page.

5-38 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. Select the file that you want to share in the Files tab.

4. Click More , and select Send to Share.

A new browser tab is opened. If you are not logged into Share, Teamcenter Easy Plan prompts you
to log in. Use your WebKey account credentials for log-in.

5. On the Share page, perform one of the following actions:

• Select an existing project from the Share Project list.

• Create a new project.

6. Click Share.

Teamcenter Easy Plan uploads the file to Share page.

7. On the Share page select the file you want to send to your supplier and click Share .

8. On the Add Users page, select your supplier from the Available Users list and click Add.

The supplier receives an alert that a file is uploaded to the cloud. The supplier logs into Share to
collaborate on the file.

Replace files in Teamcenter Easy Plan with files imported from Share

After the supplier reviews, revises, and uploads the file, Share notifies you that an updated file is in the
cloud. You can replace the existing file in Teamcenter Easy Plan with the updated file from the shop floor
engineer.

1. In Teamcenter Easy Plan, navigate to and expand the assembly that contains the file that you want
to replace.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-39

2. Select a process and click the Files tab at the bottom of the page.

3. Select the file you want to replace, click More , and select Replace File.

4. In the Replace dialog, select Browse to Share.

Teamcenter Easy Plan lists the files in your Share project.

5. Select the file the supplier uploaded to Share and click Replace.

6. Click Edit > Replace File to display the Replace panel.

7. In the Replace panel, click Choose File and then Browse Share to view all projects in Share.

8. Download the file and review the changes the supplier made to the file.

For example, the supplier might ask for more details in the file, to ensure that their team members
can correctly build the component for you.

Modify the file as needed, and continue to use Share to collaborate with the supplier on your
project.

Share collaboration in Teamcenter Easy Plan

Share and send files from Teamcenter Easy Plan to Share

After the supplier reviews, revises, and uploads the file, Share notifies you that an updated file is in the
cloud. You can replace the existing file in with the updated file from the supplier.

1. Search for and open a work package, navigate to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, and in the
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) panel, select the assembly with the file that you want to
replace.

5-40 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. In the MBOM toolbar, click Show Summary , and next to the 3D viewer panel, select the
Overview tab.

3. In the Files section, select the file you want to replace and click Replace File .

4. In the Replace dialog box, select Choose and then select Browse Share .

All Share projects to which you have access are listed. Locate the projects to find the files that are
shared by the supplier.

5. Select the replacement file the supplier uploaded to Share and click Replace.

The existing file is replaced with the revised file from Share.

6. Download the file and review the changes the supplier made to the file.

Replace files in Teamcenter Easy Plan with files imported from Share

After the supplier reviews, revises, and uploads the file, Share notifies you that an updated file is in the
cloud. You can replace the existing file with the updated file from the supplier.

1. Search for and open a work package, and on the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) panel, select the assembly with the file that you want
to replace.

2. In the MBOM toolbar, click Show Summary , and next to the 3D viewer panel, select the
Overview tab.

3. In the Files section, select the file you want to replace and click Replace File .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-41

4. In the Replace dialog box, select Choose and then select Browse Share .

All Share projects to which you have access are listed. Locate the projects to find the files that are
shared by the supplier.

5. Select the replacement file the supplier uploaded to Share and click Replace.

The existing file is replaced with the revised file from Share.

6. Download the file and review the changes the supplier made to the file.

Import files to Teamcenter Easy Plan from Share

Suppliers can upload and share additional files with you. You can locate the Share project and attach
these files to the manufacturing assembly as new datasets.

1. Search for and open a work package, and on the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) panel, select the assembly with the file that you want
to add.

2. In the MBOM toolbar, click Show Summary , and next to the 3D viewer panel, select the
Overview tab.

3. In the Files section, select the file you want to add and then click Add to .

4. In the Add dialog box, click Choose and then select Browse Share .

All Share projects to which you have access are listed. Locate the projects to find the files that are
shared with the supplier.

5. Select the file the supplier uploaded to Share and select a relation, and then click Add.

5-42 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
You can also search for a project using the Filter box.

A new dataset is created and the file is attached to the manufacturing assembly with the relation
you selected.

6. Download the file and review the content in the file that the supplier uploaded.

Release an MBOM assembly or entire MBOM

You can submit a workflow assembly or an entire manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) to allow your
system to approve processes through which a piece of work or an entire MBOM passes from initiation to
completion.

1. In the MBOM on the Align page, select the MBOM, or one or more assemblies or manufacturing
container elements, and select Manage →Submit to Workflow .

2. In the Submit to Workflow panel, in the Workflow group, select a workflow template.

3. (Optional) Type a description, verify that assignments and targets are correct, and click Submit.

The elements are submitted to the workflow and once approved, each element originally selected
from the MBOM displays a icon to indicate that it has been successfully submitted.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 5-43

5-44 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
6. High level work breakdown
Author a process plan
1. Open an existing work package, or create one and open it.

The Planning page displays.

2. In the Process panel, select a process.

3. To add or remove processes or operations to the Process panel, do the following.

a. In the Process panel toolbar, click to create a process, to create an operation, or to

delete a selected process or operation.

• If you decided to create a process or operation:

A. In the Create Process or Create Operation dialog box, select a process or operation
type and click Next.

B. Type a Name and optional Description for the process or operation.

C. To create an additional process or operation, click Create & Add More; to create a
single process or operation, click Create.

Note:
If a process or an operation has mandatory properties (including customized
properties), those will automatically appear in the new object dialog.

• If you decided to delete a process or operation, click Delete.

4. To drill down in the planning window to show details for a specific process or operation, hover over
the element and click .

The window changes to display only the selected element's child elements in the Process panel,
and only relevant details in the Parts, Resources, Information, Document, and Details tabs.

Optionally, you can select a child element in the Process panel and drill down further using .

5. Click in the left toolbar to return to previous planning views.

6. To add a part to a process or operation, from the Product tab, select the process or operation in the
Process panel and drag:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 6-1

• One or more product parts to a process or operation in the Process panel.

• One or more product parts or resources to the Parts or Resources tab below the Process panel.

7. To remove a part or resource from a process or operation selected in the Process panel, in the Parts
or Resources tab, select a part or resource and click Remove .

6-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Search for a process without expanding the BOP in the high level
planning page
You can locate a process in the bill of process (BOP) without manually expanding the BOP.

Prerequisites

Before you begin, you must have a bill of process (BOP) with an assembly linked to it, and you must
know the name of that assembly.

Procedure

1. Search for and open a work package and navigate to the High Level Planning page.

2. In the Assembly panel, type a full or partial name for the assembly and click Search.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a list of objects that match your search query.

3. In the search results click the linked process you want and select Open in Work Instructions
Authoring.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the Open in Work Instructions Authoring dialog box.

4. Select the process that is linked to the correct BOP and click Find in BOP.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 6-3

Teamcenter Easy Plan highlights the process in the BOP panel for you.

5. (Optional) Move or copy the highlighted process to a different process area.

6-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Product BOP functional planning

Add functional groups

The data in a product BOP is organized using the product's function or system, such as electrical, or by
what parts are typically added in a certain area of the manufacturing line.

1. Search and open or navigate to a product BOP.

2. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, click Create Functional Group .

3. Choose Sibling or Child if an existing functional group was selected.

4. In the Create Functional Group dialog box, type a name in the Name box.

5. (Optional) Type additional information in the Description box.

6. Click Create.

7. (Optional) To rename a functional group, double-click it and type a new name.

Delete functional groups

1. Search and open or navigate to a product BOP.

2. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, select a functional group.

3. Click Delete Functional Group .

Click Delete to verify that you want to delete the functional group.

Resequence functional groups

You can resequence functional groups within a hierarchy, which allows you to maintain existing
operations.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-1

Note:
If an object within the structure is Released, you must revise the object before you can move
the functional group. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays a dialog box that prompts you to
revise the object. Click Yes, Revise to revise the object and move the functional group, or click
Cancel.

1. Search and open or navigate to a product bill of process (BOP).

2. Select a functional group and click Cut .

The functional group dims, and a dashed border displays around it.

3. Perform one of the following actions.

• To paste the functional group at the root level, click a blank area below the product hierarchy,
and then click Paste .

When you do not select an object in the hierarchy, the functional group is pasted at the root level
of the structure.

• To paste the functional group anywhere else in the hierarchy, select the functional group where
you want to move the object, click Paste, and select an option:

a. Paste before—Pastes the object before the selected item in the structure, as a sibling
object.

b. Paste after—Pastes the object after the selected item in the structure, as a sibling object.

7-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

c. Paste into—Pastes the object into the selected functional group, as a child object of the
selected functional group.

Create operations in a product BOP

You can either create operations directly in the plant BOP or you can add operations from a functional
plan (product BOP) to the plant BOP.

To add operations from the product BOP, perform these steps:

1. Search and open or navigate to a product BOP.

The process station page is displayed.

2. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, select a functional group to be the parent of the
operations you create.

3. In the Operations section of the Product BOP page, click Create Operation .

4. In the Create Operation dialog box, select an operation type.

5. Type a name in the Name box.

6. (Optional) Type additional information in the Description box.

7. Click Create.

Analyze operation times

To complete the product bill of process (BOP) functional planning, perform the following tasks to
analyze operation time:

• Add content to an operation – Create content and assign time to an operation using standard
elements from a supported time system and a time category.

• Analyze activity time – Analyze and calculate activity time for the operation.

• (Optional) Change time categories – Change the time category for an activity.

Navigate the product BOP to complete operations

During planning, you might first create processes and operations in the product bill of process (BOP),
and then later navigate through the product BOP structure to complete and detail operations.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-3

In prior releases, each time you returned to the product BOP page, the structure was collapsed, and you
had to drill down to return to the area in the structure where you were working. Now, you can easily
navigate between areas within the product BOP.

1. Search and open or navigate to a product BOP.

2. In the Structure section, expand the product BOP to a process, and open an operation associated
with the process.

3. Click the back button or click on the breadcrumb in the header to return to the correct
process level in the structure.

Navigate from the product BOP to the Balancing page

During balancing, you may need to create or modify operations. After you navigate the product bill of
process (BOP) and complete planning tasks, you can quickly return to line balancing.

Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Note:
The Back to Balancing button is only available when you open the product BOP from the
Balancing page.

Move or copy operations between functional groups

1. Search and open or navigate to a product BOP.

2. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, select the functional group that is the parent of
the operation you want to move or copy.

3. In the Operations section of the Product BOP page, select the operation.

7-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. In the Operations section of the Product BOP page, click Cut or Copy .

5. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, select the destination functional group.

6. In the Operations section of the Product BOP page, click Paste .

Search for operations within a product BOP

1. Search for or navigate to a product bill of process (BOP).

2. In the Structure section of the Product BOP page, type a full or partial item ID or revision name and
click Search.

3. (Optional) Select and open a search result to continue authoring the operation.

Search for and allocate operations in a product BOP

You can search the product bill of process (BOP) instead of navigating through the structure to locate
operations. This helps increase efficiency when you allocate operations from the product BOP to the
plant BOP.

Note:
You can search for operations by item ID or revision name. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO
returns results based on full or partial search criteria.

Use this procedure to search for and allocate operations from a product BOP into a plant BOP.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-5

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click Balancing.

3. Click Show Product BOP.

4. Type a full or partial item ID or revision name, and click Search.

5. Select a process station.

6. In the product BOP section, select one or multiple operations to allocate to a station.

7. Drag the selected operations from the product BOP and insert them in the Operations section, in
the order in which they should be performed.

Search for allocated operations in the product BOP from the plant BOP

From the plant bill of process (BOP), you can quickly locate and display allocated operations in the
Product BOP pane. This feature allows you to see if the operation is allocated anywhere else, and to find
other operations in the same functional group that need to be allocated.

1. In the plant BOP, open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Select a process station.

3. Click Balancing.

4. Click Show Product BOP.

5. In the Product BOP toolbar, click Show indication information .

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays icons next to operations that are allocated to a process
area in the line you are balancing. Depending on which icon is next to an operation, you perform a
slightly different action to locate the operation in the product BOP.

6. (Optional) Hover over the icon, then click it to expand the operation in the Product BOP pane.

Note:

The icon indicates that the operation is allocated to this station.

7-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

7. (Optional) Hover over the icon and click it, then select Find source in Product BOP to expand
the operation in the Product BOP pane.

Note:

The icon indicates that the operation is allocated to this station, and the properties in
the product BOP differ from the properties in the plant BOP.

Edit product BOP properties

You can edit basic properties for a product bill of process (BOP).

1. Search for or navigate to a product BOP.

2. In the top bar on the page, click Details.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-7

3. Click Start Edit .

4. Modify product BOP properties as needed.

5. Save or cancel your edits.

Plant BOP process area planning

Start work in an existing BOP

You can work with a plant BOP or product BOP structure placed in a work package object. You search for
work package object types to locate the top-level (root object) of your data. Once you find your data, you
can directly use it, save the search results for later use, or pin the object to the Home page.

To open a plant BOP or product BOP, search for its work package object:

1. Above the search box on the top of the page, click Category and select Work Packages.

2. In the search box, type a search string, such as test*, and click Search .

All work package objects whose name contains assy are shown as a result of the search.

3. Verify that List with Summary is selected. The default setting is whatever you selected the last
time.

4. On the Results tab, select a work package object to view its overview properties.

5. Select the work package object you want and click Open .

Opening a work package object displays the following content:

7-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• If the work package contains a product BOP, but not a plant BOP, then the product BOP is
displayed.

• If a work package contains a plant BOP, then the plant BOP within it is displayed regardless if it
contains a product BOP.

View process area planning

In the plant BOP, process area planning is performed on the process station and process area pages. This
includes the process stations, the process resources, and the operations to be performed in the process
area.

• Process areas

• (Optional) Process resource

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-9

A process resource object is used to group operations in a station that are assigned to a specific
active resource, such as a worker or robot. For example, Station 10 could contain these two process
resources: Left side worker and Right side worker.

• Operation

Each process station object contains operations that describe the high-level tasks to perform.
Operations can be sequenced. For example, the Station 10 process station could contain this
operation: Add Instrument Panel.

7-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Create a process area, line, or station

During process area planning, you can create process areas, process lines, and process stations if they do
not already exist in the plant bill of process (BOP).

1. Navigate to the plant BOP.

2. Click Create Process Area .

3. Type a station name.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO automatically fills in the ID and Revision fields.

4. (Optional) Type a description.

5. Click Create.

Next, create operations inside the station.

Note:

To remove a process area, line, or station, select the item in the Areas table and click Delete .

Assign resources to a target assembly

You can assign resources from the bill of equipment (BOE) to a target assembly.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the Assembly Planning or
Process Planning page.

2. Under Process, select a target assembly.

3. Click Add Work Area.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the Add Work Area dialog box.

4. Select the work area you want to associate with the target assembly and click Add.

Teamcenter Easy Plan populates the work area in the Resources tab and assigns the work area to
the scope of the assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-11

5. Under Process, select an item in the assembly.

6. Select parts and resources and then add them to the assembly item.

Tip:
To add a work area to a process station, select the process station and then add the work area
to it.

Assign target assemblies to a plant BOP

You can assign one or more target assemblies to a plant bill of process (BOP) in the High Level Planning
page and then load them into the Process Planning page. This lets you work with the plant structure
and the assembly structure data.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the High Level Planning
page.

2. Select a process from the BOP panel.

3. Assign target assemblies to the selected process by selecting an assembly from the Assembly panel
and dragging it to the Target Assembly tab in the information panel.

A Target Assembly tab is displayed in the information panel below the BOP panel. If a target
assembly is not assigned from the Assembly panel to the selected process in BOP panel, the target
is inherited by default from the plant BOP root item.

4. Select the process from the BOP panel, and navigate to the Process Planning page.

The plant BOP opens in a Process Planning page.

7-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The Process Planning page displays the target assembly from the High Level Planning page in the
Target Assembly tab. The selected process is displayed in the Process panel.

Assign resources to a process resource

You can assign resources from the bill of equipment (BOE) to a process resource.

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the Process Planning
page.

2. Under Process, expand a station and select a process resource.

3. Under Resources, select a resource from the BOE and drag it to the Workarea tab.

Easy Plan populates the Workarea tab and assigns the resource to the process resource.

Assign a work area to a process station

You can link a work area from the bill of equipment (BOE) structure to a process station. The linked work
area allows you to easily assign resources to operations.

1. Navigate to the plant BOP.

2. Open the process area or process line in which you want to work.

3. Open the process station.

4. Select the Resources subtab.

5. Click Link Workarea .

6. In the Link Workarea dialog box, expand the process line, select the process station, and click Link
Workarea.

All resources associated to the work area are available to the process station, so they can be
assigned to operations in that station.

7. Create operations for the station.

Next, you assign resources to operations.

8. Select an operation in the Operations table, and click the Assigned Resources tab in the lower
table.

9. Select and drag a resource in the Resources subtab to the Assigned Resources tab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-13

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO assigns the resource to the operation.

Consume a part to an operation

You can select multiple parts for consumption to an operation in a single step.

Prerequisites

You must set the MERelationTypePartsConsumed preference to include all occurrence type values:

• MEConsumed

• MEAssign

• MEAssemble

• MEDisassemble

• MEHandle

• MEOther

• METarget

You must also set the EP_AssignedPartsAreaColumnConfiguration preference to include the value to
ImanItemBOPLine.bl.occ_type.

In addition, you must add the MERelationTypePartsConsumed and

EP_AssignedPartsAreaColumnConfiguration preferences to the AWC_Startup_preference in the
Teamcenter rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

7-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the Process Planning or
Work Instructions page.

2. In the Process panel, expand the process and select an operation.

3. In the Assembly tab, click Show Selected to indicate which lines you want to display in the
Viewer panel.

4. On the Assembly subtab, click More and then select Manage Consumption.

Tip:
Use the Manage Consumption command to review and update the list of highlighted parts
in the Viewer while you work.

5. Select a part and click Assign Selection.

Note:
You can select and assign one or multiple parts to an operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns the parts to the operation. When you select the operation in the
Process table, the assigned parts are displayed in the Parts tab.

6. (Optional) To remove a part from an operation, select the part in the Parts tab, and click Unassign
.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-15

7. (Optional) To assign a part to multiple operations, select a part and drag it to the Part subtab for
each operation.

In the Show managed consumption list, Teamcenter Easy Plan shows the part as consumed in
both operations.

Assign resources to an operation

During process planning, you must assign the resources used during an operation to create parts. You
assign resources to an operation in the plant bill of process (BOP) structure.

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Open a process station.

3. On the Planning tab, under the Resources subtab, navigate to display the resources you want to
assign.

4. In the Operations table, select the target operation.

7-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. Select and drag from the Resources subtab to the Assigned Resources tab for the selected
operation.

6. (Optional) To remove a resource from an operation, select the resource in the Assigned Resources
tab, and click Unassign .

Assign classified resources to a plant BOP

You can assign tools and resources from a classified library to operations in the plant bill of process (BOP)
structure.

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Open a process station.

3. In the Operations table, select the operation to which you want to assign classified tools and
resources.

The Assigned Resources tab lists resources that are already assigned to the selected operation.

4. Click Assign Classified Resources .

The Classification Search page is displayed.

5. Navigate the hierarchy to a classification category in the structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-17

Note:
You can navigate a class on the left, or select a class, for example, Conveyers, and then
navigate within that class on the right.

6. Click Search Resources Under.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays resources in the selected class.

7. Select one or multiple classified resources and click Assign.

The Assigned Resources table now lists the classified objects you assigned to the operation, and
provides the following information:

• The Classifications column indicates which resources in the table are classified. If this field is
blank, the object in that row is non-classified.

• The Occurrence Type column indicates which occurrence type is assigned to each assigned
resource. Your Teamcenter administrator defines which occurrence types are assigned to
assigned resources in the structure.

7-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
To remove an assigned resource from an operation, select the row in the Assigned
Resources subtab and click Unassign .

Edit basic BOM line properties

This feature allows you to edit basic properties for a bill of materials (BOM) line and its associated
objects.

Note:
To use this feature, you must be running Teamcenter Active Workspace 4.1.1 or later and your
Teamcenter administrator must also install the EasyPlan Active Workspace Infrastructure using the
Teamcenter Environment Manager.

1. Navigate to your plant BOP.

2. Open the process line, process station, or operation that you want to edit, and click the Details tab.

3. Click Start Edit .

Note:
If the object is released, a message displays to suggest that you revise the object before you
start editing.

4. Modify properties associated with the object as needed.

5. Click Save or Cancel when you complete the property changes.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-19

Perform process area planning in PERT view

Manage process PERT flows

Use a Program Evaluation and Review Technique (PERT) view to work with processes and operations in
process structures.

This capability allows you to define the flow of materials and assemblies by viewing the sequence in
which your process plan is defined. You can also flows using standard commands in the default bill
of process (BOP) panel tree view. If your administrator has enabled line balancing, you can also view
operations that include process resources in process resource interaction (PRI) view.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning, High Level Planning, or Work
Instructions Authoring page.

When you work with operations in the PERT view, you switch between the default tree view and
the PERT view, and access all the commands at the operations level. By default, the BOP panel
displays the process tree view consisting of process, folder, and operation objects.

2. In the BOP panel, select an object for which you want to create or manage PERT flows, and then
click Sequence View .

The sequence view displays a pictorial PERT representation of the processes.

3. Click Move Mode to move objects in the PERT chart.

To reset the order of moved objects in the chart, click Reset Layout .

4. Click Flow Creation Mode , and drag an object to another object to create a flow sequence.

5. Do any of the following.

• To reorder the process view, click Reset Layout .

• To delete an object from both the PERT and tree views, select the object and click Delete .

• To change the order of an object in the process flow, right-click the object and select Set as
Successor or Set as Predecessor.

• Regenerate object find numbers using a specific place value schema.

• Submit objects to a workflow.

7-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. (Optional) Click Tree View to return to the tree view.

Create and manage operations in PERT view

Use PERT and tree commands to work with operations in the Process Planning or High Level Planning
pages.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the preferred page.

When you work with operations in the PERT view in Process Planning, you can switch between the
tree view and the PERT view to access all the commands at the operations level.

2. (Optional) From the top right corner of the Process tab, click Sequence View .

The PERT view, or sequence view, displays a pictorial representation of the processes.

Note:
The Sequence View button is visible when operations or process resources exist under a
station. If no process resources exist, the button opens a PERT view. If process resources exist,
the button opens a PRI view.

3. (Optional) Click Tree View to display the tree view.

The Tree View lists processes in hierarchical order.

4. Click Move Mode to move the PERT chart.

5. Select the required process, then click Flow Creation Mode and drag to another process to
create a flow sequence.

6. Select the process you want to delete, then click Delete to delete the process.

Note:
Commands such as Set as Successor, Set as Predecessor, Clone, Submit to Workflow, and
Create remain available in operations.

Create and manage process nodes in PERT view

You can create and manage process nodes while working in a Program Evaluation and Review Technique
(PERT) view.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-21

There are two modes in the Process Sequence view that is available from Process panels and tabs
available from application pages such as Process Planning and High Level Planning.

• Move Mode—use this mode to move objects in the Process Sequence panel during process
planning.

• Flow Creation Mode—use this mode to create new flow sequences during process planning.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan automatically saves changes when you create a new flow sequence between
process objects or move a process object to a different location within the plan.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

2. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

3. (Optional) Click Flow Creation Mode , and then drag the selected process object to another
process object.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates a sequenced relationship between the process objects, and draws a
flow line between the objects in the Process Sequence panel.

4. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

5. (Optional) Click Move Mode , and drag the selected the process object to a different location
within the plan.

7-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Select and drag other process objects and flow lines as needed to move them and revise the
process plan.

6. (Optional) Click Reset Layout to reset the entire layout to its original flow.

Tip:

You can use the Reset Layout feature after you:

• Zoom in or out on process objects.

• Focus on a specific node while you are in PERT view.

• Move PERT nodes while you are in PERT diagram view.

7. (Optional) Select a line in a process flow and click Delete .

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a confirmation message to verify that you want to delete the object.
Click Cancel or Delete.

View and edit process area properties

You can view and edit process area properties during process planning.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

2. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

Properties information for the process area displays in the Summary tab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-23

3. Click Start Edit .

Properties that you can edit are surrounded by a gray border.

4. Click inside the property you want to edit, and type in your changes.

Tip:
When you place your cursor inside a property field, the border changes to a teal color to
indicate that you are editing that property.

5. Click Save Edits or Cancel Edits when you complete the property changes.

Manage process area file attachments

You can attach and manage files for process areas while working in a Program Evaluation and Review
Technique (PERT) view.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

7-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

3. Click the Files tab.

Files attached to the process area are displayed in the Files tab.

4. Click Attach File to attach a file.

5. Click Choose File and then navigate to the file you want to attach and click Open.

6. Type a Name and then select a Type and a Relation and click Done.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uploads and attaches the file to the selected object.

View and manage process area file attachments

You can view and manage files that are attached to a process area in the Files tab.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

2. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

3. Click the Files tab.

Files attached to the process area are displayed in the Files tab.

4. Select a file within the tab.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays a preview of the selected file.

5. (Optional) In the display preview window select the file attachment menu, and then select one of
the following options.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-25

• Open—opens the file in the current window.

• Open in new window—opens a separate window and displays the file.

• Open in new tab—opens a new tab in the current window and displays the file.

6. (Optional) Select a file and click Download to save a copy of the file.

7. (Optional) Select a file and click Delete to remove the attachment from the process area node.

Submit process area objects to a workflow

You can submit process area objects to a workflow process.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

2. Select an object in the Process Sequence panel.

3. Click Submit to workflow .

4. Select a Workflow Template.

5. (Optional) Type a Workflow Name and Description.

6. Click Submit.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO submits the object to the workflow.

Enable line balancing for operations

You can define the sequence of flows between the operations and use all the PERT commands on
stations and operations in the Teamcenter rich client.

Note:
If your administrator has enabled line balancing using the preference EP_EnableLineBalancing,
you can only view operations that include process resources in process resource interaction
(PRI) view. Line balancing and sequencing of operations are not allowed at the same time.

• PERT for operations is unavailable if line balancing is enabled.

• Create process and Compound operation are unavailable if line balancing is disabled.

7-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Procedure

1. Log on with the administrator credentials to set up the preference to show or hide line balancing.

2. On the Home page, click Preference.

3. Search for EP_EnableLineBalancing in the search bar.

4. Select EP_EnableLineBalancing.

5. Set the value for the preference.

• If the value is set to False, PERT for operations is enabled.

• If the value is set to True, PERT for operations is disabled and PERT commands are inaccessible.

View operations that include process resources in PRI view

On the Process Planning page, you can view stations that have associated process resources with
assigned operations in a process resource interaction (PRI) sequence.

The PRI view is useful when you are authoring a manufacturing plan while transitioning from early
planning to more detailed planning. The view offers a snapshot similar to the time management panel in
the Line Balancing page, but with more detailed process plan information, rather than line balancing.

Note:
• To use the PRI view, your administrator must enable PERT for operations or line balancing.

• Process resources are only available in plant bills of processes (BOPs). Classic BOPs are not
supported.

Procedure

1. If you have not already done so, navigate to the Process Planning page.

2. In the Process panel, in a plant BOP, select a station that has assigned process resources.

In this example, the station contains two resources (operators), each of which are assigned
operations.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-27

When the preference EP_EnableLineBalancing = true, the Sequence View button is displayed
if:

Note:
• Process resources exist under a selected station. If nothing exists under the station,
Sequence View opens a blank PERT view. If process resources exist, Sequence View
opens a PRI view.

• If the PRI view is not displayed when you click Sequence View, your administrator has not
enabled PERT for operations or line balancing.

3. Click Sequence View .

The resulting PRI view displays a view of line balancing data that is based on the process resources
within the station.

7-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Regenerate object find number values

Use the Regenerate Find Numbers command to reorder find numbers using a specific place value
schema in both process trees and PERT sequences—for example, 5, 10, 15, 20—to save time and avoid
errors.

Find numbers in Teamcenter Easy Plan are sequential identifiers assigned to each line in the process
structure to keep elements in a specific order.

Note:
• The Regenerate Find Numbers command is based on the value of the preference
EP_AllowAutoRegenerateFindNumbers (default value = true).

• Typically, you assign widely spaced place find number values to process or operation objects in
a standard process structure, or to area, line, station, and operation objects in a plant process
structure. Compound operations and execution steps are also supported.

Example:
When you add a new object, you might give it a find number value of 25 so that it lies
between other similar object types with the broadly spaced default find numbers of 20
and 30.

• When you cut an object and then paste it before or after another object in the Process Planning
page, the sequence is maintained in:

• Both the Process and the Editor tabs in ETO.

• The process and PERT views in the Process panel in BTO.

For example, if you paste an object between objects of the same type with find number values
of 15 and 20, the pasted object will have a value of 17.5.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, select the object for which you want to generate new find numbers
and click Regenerate Find Numbers .

Tip:
You can regenerate line numbers at a specific level in the tree by clicking an object at the top
level (for example, an area at the top of a plant process tree to regenerate find numbers for

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-29

that area and all areas below it at the same level). You can also select an object containing
child objects and regenerate find numbers for that object and all of its descendants (for
example, an area at the top of the tree to regenerate find numbers for that area and all areas
below it, as well as all their station and operation descendants).

3. In the Regenerate Find Numbers dialog box, in the Start Number text box, type the number that
you want to assign to the first selected object type.

4. In the Increment text box, type the numeric value that you want to add to each subsequent object.

Example:
If start number = 5 and increment = 10, find numbers for objects from the selected line down
are 5, 15, 25, 35, and so on.

5. To consider process PERT flows between processess and operations in BTO, select the Consider
flows check box.

This option synchronizes find numbers and flows to support data transfers to downstream
applications. When you create and manage process PERT flows in BTO, you can use the Consider
flows option to update find numbers in the process tree based on that flow's changes. You can also
update find numbers using flows in a PERT sequence view.

In the example below, a plant process tree contains a station with three operations (OP1, OP2, and
OP3). No existing flows are created between them, and their find numbers, by default, start with a
value of 5, and then increment by values of 10 (OP1 = 5, OP2 = 15, and OP3 = 25).

With STATION1 selected and Sequence View enabled, you can use the PERT view to define a
flow between the operations. In the example below, this is OP3 → OP2 → OP1.

7-30 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

When you click Tree View to return to standard process tree view, and regenerate the find
numbers with Start Number = 10, Increment = 10, and the Consider flows check box selected,
the operations are regenerated in the PERT flow order (OP3 = 10, OP2 = 20, OP3 = 30).

6. To regenerate find numbers for all descendants of a selected object, select the Include
descendants check box.

In the example below, the AREA1 object in a plant bill of process (BOP) in BTO is regenerated
to include descendants using a Start Number value of 5 and Increment value of 10. The first
child object of AREA1 (LINE1) is regenerated with a start value of 5, and the second (LINE2) is
incremented by 10 for a value of 15.

Similarly, the first child of LINE1 (STATION1) is regenerated with a start value of 5, and the second
and third (STATION2 and STATION3) are incremented by 10 for values of 15 and 25, respectively.

Finally, the child objects of each station (for example, OP1, OP2, and OP3 for STATION1) are
regenerated so that the first child object has a start value of 5 (OP1 = 5) and the remaining child
objects are incremented by 10 (OP2 = 15, OP2 = 25).

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-31

Before regeneration After regeneration

7. Click Confirm.

The find numbers for the selected objects and if applicable, PERT views and descendants, are
regenerated. They can be viewed in the Find No. column of the Process tab or panel. If multiple
objects originally had identical or parallel find numbers, those objects now share the same
regenerated find number, as in the standard process example below.

7-32 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Update PERT process flows using object find numbers

Update the PERT process flow sequence of objects in a plant bill of process (BOP) using the find numbers
of the objects.

You can create a PERT sequence for all child objects contained in a single selected process tree
object—for example, all operations in a selected station—or you can update the PERT sequence of
all descendants of a selected process tree object. You can also generate a parallel PERT sequence for
objects with identical find numbers, or you can regenerate find number values from the process tree.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains a BOP
structure, and navigate to a preferred planning task in High Level Planning or Process Planning.

If your administrator has enabled line balancing using the EP_EnableLineBalancing preference,
you can also navigate to the Line Balancing page.

2. In the Process panel, in the default tree view, select an object that contains descendants for which
you want to generate a PERT process flow based on object find numbers.

Note:
The Update Flows command lets you update parallel flows in a PERT sequence. Incremental
find numbers in the Process panel usually indicate a linear flow, while identical find numbers
indicate a parallel flow.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-33

Linear flows (op1 = 10, Parallel flows (op6 and op7 = 30),after
op2 = 20, op3 = 30) linear flows) (op4 = 10, op5 = 20)

3. If you are working on the Process Planning page, in the Process toolbar, click Sequence View .

If you are working on the Line Balancing page, select the process resource interaction (PRI) view.

4. In the PERT sequence view, click Update Flows .

5. In the Update Flows dialog box, select the levels for which you want to update find numbers under
the object you selected in step 2.

• To update only those objects visible in the current sequence view, accept the default option,
Visible level only.

• To update objects visible in the current sequence view as well as all objects below that level,
select All sub-levels.

6. If the child objects contain parallel flows and you want to avoid having to manually create them
later, select the Consider Parallel Flows check box.

Depending on the sequence of flows within parallel flows, redundant flows might sometimes be
created. You can delete these based on your requirements.

7. Click Update.

Linear find number sequences are reflected in the flow (op1 = 10, op2 = 20, op3 = 30).

7-34 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Parallel find number sequences are reflected in the flow (linear op4 = 10, op5 = 20, parallel op6
and op7 = 30).

Create external PERT flows for operations

You can create external PERT flows whenever there is dependency between operations from different
stations. This allows you to define the sequence of flows between the operations of those stations.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the preferred page—for example, the Process Planning or High Level Planning page.

2. In the tree view, click Expand to see the contents of the required station.

The list of operations is displayed.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-35

3. Select the operation, click More , and set the operation as Predecessors.

4. Select the operation from the second station.

5. Click More and set the operation as Successor.

Easy Plan recognizes that the Predecessor and Successor are from different stations and generates
an external flow tab below the process tab.

A green arrow signifies that the flow has a predecessor, and a red arrow signifies that the flow has
external successor.

6. Select the external flow you want to remove, and then click Remove .

Search the MBOM for an assembly or a part

In prior releases you had to drill down through the structure to locate a part within the manufacturing
bill of materials (MBOM). Now, you can search for parts by name or revision ID, and Teamcenter Easy
Plan will expand the structure for you.

Note:
We use a part for this example, but you can perform the same steps to locate an assembly.

1. Search for a work package and select it from the list.

2. Click High Level Planning.

3. In the Assembly panel click in the Search box and type in a full or partial search term, and click
Search.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a list of results that match your search criteria.

4. Select the correct part or assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan expands the structure and highlights the object you selected.

7-36 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. (Optional) Click the object, click Open , and then select an option from the menu.

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page for the
object.

Assign a part or assembly from the scope of the entire MBOM

You can assign a part or an assembly from the scope of the entire manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) to an operation in the plant bill of process (BOP).

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Open a process station.

3. On the Planning tab, under the Parts subtab, select Show entire product.

4. Expand the parts and assemblies in the MBOM tree.

5. In the Operations table, select an operation to which you want to assign parts and assemblies.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-37

Note:
Parts and assemblies already assigned to the operation are listed in the Consumed Parts tab,
under the Operations table.

6. Drag parts and assemblies from the Parts subtab to the Consumed Parts tab to assign them to the
operation.

7. (Optional) To remove a part or assembly from an operation, select the part in the Consumed Parts
tab, and click Unassign .

Determine part and assembly consumption from the MBOM

Use this procedure to determine whether parts and assemblies are consumed from the manufacturing
bill of materials (MBOM) to an operation in the plant bill of process (BOP).

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Open a process station.

3. On the Planning tab, under the Parts subtab, select Show entire product.

7-38 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Expand the parts and assemblies in the MBOM tree.

5. Click Show Consumption Indication .

The Parts tab displays consumption icons next to parts and assemblies that are consumed.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-39

• indicates the item is consumed under the selected station.

• indicates the item is consumed under a different station.

• indicates the item is consumed multiple times under the selected station, or under multiple
stations.

• indicates the item is consumed multiple times under different stations.

Note:

If you keep Show Consumption Indication active, the icon indicators automatically
refresh when you consume and remove parts or assemblies during planning.

6. (Optional) Hover over any consumption icon to review the definition of the consumption indication.

7. (Optional) Click on any consumption icon to view details.

Example:
If you hover over the icon for part 00904/A;1-brember rotor, you learn that it is consumed
multiple times under other stations. When you click the icon, you learn that it is consumed
under Station 30.

Define the scope of an assembly to a level in the plant BOP

You can associate assemblies and subassemblies in a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) to a
specific level in the plant bill of product (BOP) during process planning.

Note:
You must be running Teamcenter 12.4.0.2 or later to use this feature.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

7-40 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. Navigate the plant BOP to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

Note:
While the plant BOP loads, the associated MBOM also loads in tree view.

3. In the MBOM tree, select and drag a subassembly onto an object, such as an area or a line, in the
Process Sequence panel.

Note:
You cannot create a scope to the operation level of a plant BOP.

The application creates a scope of the subassembly to the plant BOP at the selected level. The
Target Assemblies tab lists the new association.

Caution:
There is a known issue in Teamcenter 12.4.0.2. If you load more than one work package
during a single logon session, the Target Assemblies tab displays incorrect data.
To resolve this issue, log off Teamcenter, and then log back on again.

4. (Optional) To remove a scope, select the subassembly in the Target Assemblies tab and click
Remove .

5. (Optional) To continue process planning, you can drill down in the plant BOP structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-41

Example:
If you are working on a process line, you can open a process station.

View and analyze a scoped MBOM assembly

You can view and analyze a scoped manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) assembly within a plant bill
of process (BOP).

Note:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays target assemblies based upon scoped parts.

• If a station has assigned assemblies or subassemblies, the application displays the target
assembly for that station. You see either a partial manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM),
or the children assigned to the station.

• If a station does not have assigned assemblies or subassemblies, the application displays the
target assembly for the parent as the scope of work for the station.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Open a process area with an assembly or subassemblies assigned to it and expand the MBOM
structure.

The Product panel shows the expanded MBOM. The Process Sequence panel shows the process
area.

3. Drill into the plant structure and open a process station with a target assembly assigned to it.

7-42 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
The Parts tab shows a partially loaded MBOM in tree view. The MBOM is the target assembly
as the scope of work for the Ignition station.

4. (Optional) Open a station without an assembly or subassemblies assigned to it.

Note:
The station does not have a target assembly assigned to it. The Parts tab is showing the
MBOM for the process line, which is the parent object of the station.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-43

Display the MBOM as a graphic structure during process planning

You can use this feature to display a graphical view of the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) tree
structure while you work in a process area.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate the plant BOP to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

As the plant BOP loads, the associated MBOM also loads in tree view.

3. In the MBOM tree, select parts to display or hide in the Graphics panel.

Displays a part or subassembly

Hides a part or subassembly

Tip:
Select an item at the root of a subassembly to select all items below it.

4. (Optional) In the Process Sequence panel, open an object with an assembly or subassemblies
assigned to it. For example, open a line.

7-44 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The subassembly assigned to the selected level of the plant bill of process (BOP) is displayed in the
Graphics panel.

Tip:
Work with images in the Graphics viewer.

• Drag the 3D model to rotate and inspect an image.

• Use the mouse wheel to zoom an image.

• Press the middle and right mouse buttons to pan the image. If you do not have a middle
mouse button, press your scroll button and right button to pan.

Show or hide multiple assembly, part, or process lines in the Viewer panel

You can show or hide multiple assembly, part, or process lines in the 3D Viewer panel.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring
page.

2. If you are working in the Assembly, Process, or Parts tab or panel of the Work Instructions
Authoring page, do one of the following to select the lines that you want to show or hide in the
Viewer panel.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-45

• To select all lines consecutively, hold your Shift key and select the first and last lines.

• To select nonconsecutive lines, hold your Ctrl key and select each of the lines.

Note:
You can select lines that are currently displayed or hidden in the Viewer panel. When you
show them, displayed items remain displayed, and hidden items become displayed. When
you hide them, hidden items remain hidden, and displayed items become hidden.

3. If you are working on the Process Planning page, in the Process tab, do one of the following to
select the lines that you want to show or hide in the Viewer panel.

• To select all lines consecutively, hold your Shift key and select the first and last lines.

• To select nonconsecutive lines, hold your Ctrl key and select each of the lines.

4. In the panel toolbar, click Show Selected or Hide Selected .

Open a plant BOP in a standalone viewer

Manufacturing engineers can open a plant bill of process (BOP) in a standalone viewer to validate the
plant BOP after process planning is complete. If a product development engineer (PDE) needs to change
out a part, the PDE can open the plant BOP to determine whether the part is consumed within the plant
BOP.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator must install TCM Visualization in your environment before you can
perform this task. Contact the Teamcenter administrator if you are unable to complete this task.
User information about the standalone viewer is in the How do I? section of the Teamcenter
Lifecycle Visualization documentation, which is available on the Siemens Digital Industries
Software Support Center.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate the plant BOP to a process area or process line.

3. Select an object with an assembly or subassemblies associated to it, and then click Open in
Teamcenter Visualization .

Teamcenter Visualization opens in a separate window, and loads the plant BOP at the station level.

4. In the Project Workspace panel, expand the station and MBOM structure.

7-46 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
The standalone viewer displays graphics for all assigned parts. Scoped parts do not display in
the viewer.

5. Select check boxes to view and hide parts in the Graphics view panels.

Viewing and analyzing consumption status data

View and analyze consumption status data

When you assign operations from many Teamcenter Easy Plan process pages—such as from the Process
panel to the Editor panel in Work Instructions Authoring, or from a manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) to a product bill of process (BOP( in the Product BOP Authoring page—the application displays
icons to indicate the assignment status of assembly items.

Note:
Consumption indications are based on the line balancing scope. For example, if you are viewing a
zone with 10 stations, the line balancing scope is the zone.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click Show Consumption and Impact State .

Assignment indication icons for consumed parts are displayed in the Parts tab in the information
panel. The Show Consumption and Impact State dashboard provides quick information about
assignment statuses. The icons in the dashboard indicate how many parts are over consumed, and
how many parts are missing in the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) source.

If parts are missing in source, the Process tab or panel displays a red icon. The missing parts are
displayed in the Missing in Source panel.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-47

Tip:
As you assign and remove objects in the structure, Teamcenter Easy Plan automatically
updates consumption indication icons.

3. In the Missing in Source panel, select a part to view relevant parts in the information panel.

7-48 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. (Optional) Select an icon to review the assignment details.

5. Resolve issues within the structure.

6. (Optional) Click Show Consumption and Impact State to deactivate consumption

indications for the structure.

View and analyze net effectivity cases for parts

You can compare effectivity between an assembly and its consumed parts to identify and correct any net
effectivity mismatches between the bill of materials (BOM) and the bill of process (BOP).

Prerequisites

You must set the MEAccountabilityCheckEnableNetEffectivity preference value to true

and the MEDelegatedOccurrenceProperties preference value to bl_occ_effectivity. In
addition, you must add the MEAccountabilityCheckEnableNetEffectivity preference and the
MEDelegatedOccurrenceProperties preference to the AWC_Startup_preference in the Teamcenter
rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click Show Consumption and Impact State .

Assignment indication icons for consumed parts are displayed next to items in the Assembly panel.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan displays assignment indication icons for consumed parts and their
effectivities. As you assign and remove objects in the structure, Teamcenter Easy Plan
automatically updates the indication icons.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-49

3. (Optional) Hover over an icon to display net effectivity details for the part.

—Between the BOM and the BOP, net effectivity matches.

—Inside the scope of the current assembly, net effectivity does not match.

—Between the BOM and the BOP outside the scope of the current assembly, net effectivity
matches.

—Outside the scope of the current assembly, net effectivity does not match.

4. (Optional) Click on an icon to find information about where the part is consumed.

5. (Optional) Resolve issues within the structure.

6. (Optional) Click Show Consumption and Impact State to deactivate consumption

indications for the structure.

Assignment status icons

When you assign operations from many Teamcenter Easy Plan process pages—such as from the Process
panel to the Editor panel in Work Instructions Authoring, or from a manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) to a product bill of process (BOP( in the Product BOP Authoring page—the application displays
icons in the Parts tab to indicate the assignment status of assembly items.

7-50 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You must activate Show Consumption Indication and Impact State mode before Teamcenter
Easy Plan displays the icons. You can activate this mode by clicking the Show Consumption
Indication and Impact State button in the header area.

As you assign and remove resources in the structure, Teamcenter Easy Plan automatically updates
consumption indication icons.

Consumption indication and impact state dashboard

You can use the consumption indication and impact state dashboard for quick information about
assignment statuses.

When Show Consumption Indication and Impact State is active, the consumption indication
mode is on. Teamcenter Easy Plan will display assignment statuses for the structure you are
viewing.
Click the icon once more to deactivate the consumption indication mode.
Indicates that there are over consumed parts in the structure. The number indicates how many
over consumed parts are in the structure.
Indicates that parts are consumed in processes, but they are not in the assembly. The number
indicates how many missing in source errors you must resolve in the structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-51

Assignment indications

Assignment indications are based on the line balancing scope. For example, if you are viewing a zone
with 10 stations, the line balancing scope is the zone.

(Blank) This operation is unassigned to any process area.

The operation is assigned to a process area in the current line balancing

scope. Click the icon to jump to the process area in the current scope and
highlight the operation in the Operations list.

The operation is consumed under other processes that are not in the
current line balancing scope.
Click the icon to jump to the process area where this operation is
consumed.

The operation is assigned to multiple process areas, including areas in the

current line balancing scope and possibly in another line balancing scope.
Click the icon to see a list of the process areas where the operation is
assigned. In the example below, the operation is located in three process
areas in the current scope and three in a different scope.

The operation is assigned to multiple process areas. However, none of them

are in the current line balancing scope.
Click the icon to see a list of process areas where this operation is
consumed.

The operation has properties that were changed in the current scope of
the plant BOP or the product BOP after allocation. This is a in-scope partial
match warning.

7-52 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The operation has properties that were changed in another scope of the
plant BOP or the product BOP after allocation. This is a out-of-scope partial
match warning.

The operation was deleted from the product BOP after it was allocated to
the plant BOP. This is a missing in source error.

Find a consumed part that is within the current scope

You can use consumption indication icons to locate parts that are consumed within the current scope.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning, Work Instructions Authoring, or
Product BOP Authoring page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, select a process with assigned parts and click Show Consumption and
Impact State .

Assignment indication icons for consumed parts are displayed in the Parts tab in the information
panel.

Tip:
As you assign and remove resources in the structure, consumption indication icons are
automatically updated.

3. Search the Parts tab for these icons.

• —The operation is assigned to a process area in the current line balancing scope.

• —The operation is assigned to multiple process areas, including areas in the current line
balancing scope and possibly in another line balancing scope.

4. (Optional) Mouse over an icon to get details about where the part is assigned.

5. (Optional) Click the to icon jump to the process area in the current scope and highlight the
operation in the Operations list.

6. (Optional) Click the icon to see a list of the process areas where the operation is assigned.

In the example below, the operation is located in three process areas in the current scope and three
in a different scope.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-53

7. (Optional) Click Show Consumption and Impact State to deactivate consumption

indications for the structure.

Find a consumed part that is out of scope

You can use consumption indication icons to locate parts that are consumed out-of-scope.

Note:
See Assignment status icons for detailed information about each consumption icon.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, select a process with assigned parts and click Show Consumption and
Impact State .

Assignment indication icons for consumed parts are displayed in the Parts tab in the information
panel.

Tip:
As you assign and remove resources in the structure, consumption indication icons are
automatically updated.

3. Search the Parts tab for these icons.

• —The operation is consumed under other processes that are not in the current line balancing
scope.

• —The operation is assigned to multiple process areas. However, none of them are in the
current line balancing scope.

7-54 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• —The operation has properties that were changed in another scope of the plant BOP or the
product BOP after allocation. This is a out-of-scope partial match warning.

4. (Optional) Mouse over an icon to get details about where the part is assigned.

5. (Optional) Click the icon to review the assignment.

6. Resolve out-of-scope issues within the structure.

7. (Optional) Click Show Consumption and Impact State again to deactivate consumption
indications for the structure.

Find consumed operations from an assembly

You can use assignment indication icons in an assembly to locate consumed operations within the
process scope.

Note:
By default, assignment indicators do not display for custom object types. You must edit a closure
rule to display assignment indicators for custom object types.

2. Click Show Consumption and Impact State .

Assignment indication icons are displayed.

Tip:
As you assign and remove objects in the structure, consumption indication icons are
automatically updated.

3. Review the icons.

• indicates the item is consumed under the hierarchy of loaded processes.

• indicates the item is consumed under a hierarchy of different processes.

• indicates the item is consumed multiple times under the hierarchy of loaded processes, or
under multiple hierarchies of loaded processes.

• indicates the item is consumed multiple times under a hierarchy of different processes.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-55

4. (Optional) Hover over any consumption icon to review the definition of the consumption indication.

5. Click a consumption icon to view details, and in the Process tab or panel, select an operation from
the list.

Process Planning for ETO syncs to the operation you selected, and the Parts tab displays the
consumed part that you selected for your search.

6. (Optional) Resolve any issues within the structure, or continue with process planning.

7. (Optional) Click Show Consumption and Impact State to deactivate consumption

indications for the structure.

Show assignment indications for custom objects

By default, assignment indications do not display for custom object types. You must edit a closure rule
to display assignment indications for custom object types. You can also edit the closure rule to exclude
specific custom object types and ensure that assignment indications do not display for the excluded
object types.

See the PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration documentation for detailed task instructions.

Note:
You must log into the Teamcenter Rich Client with a database administrator (DBA) user account to
perform this task.
If you do not have Teamcenter DBA permissions, contact your Teamcenter administrator.

1. Close Teamcenter Easy Plan.

2. Open the Teamcenter Rich Client and log in as a DBA user.

3. Open the PLM XML/TC XML Export Import Administration application.

7-56 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Locate the AccountabilityAll closure rule.

Note:
By default, Process Planning for ETO uses the AccountabilityAll closure rule to manage
assignment indications for objects. The AccountabilityAll closure rule manages assignment
indications for source data and for product structures.
If you work with target data or process structures, use the
AccountabilityProcessConsumption to manage assignment indications in your
environment.
Contact your Teamcenter administrator if you are not sure which closure rule to use.

5. Take action as needed to configure assignment indications:

• To include custom object types and display assignment indications, double-click

the Conditional Clause field to add custom object types in the format
SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class=="<custom operation name>Revision".

Example:
If the custom operations in your environment are named Ng5_customProcRevision and
Ng5CustOp1Revision, edit the Conditional Clause field as follows:
PRIMARY.bl_me_appgroup =="0" && SECONDARY.bl_has_children=="true"
&& (SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class=="MEProcessRevision"
|| SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class=="MEOPRevision" ||
SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class=="Ng5_customProcRevision" ||
SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class=="Ng5CustOp1Revision" ) &&
SECONDARY.bl_load_state=="0"

• To exclude custom object types and conceal assignment indications, double-click

the Conditional Clause field to add custom object types in the format
SECONDARY.bl_line_object_class !="<custom operation name>Revision".

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-57

6. Click Modify to save the changes, and close the Teamcenter Rich Client.

7. View and analyze consumption status data.

Create or update a DIPA in a work package

You can create and update a dynamic in-process assembly (DIPA) for a process structure in Easy Plan.

Prerequisites

Your work package must contain a plant bill of process (BOP) to use this feature. Teamcenter Easy Plan
does not support DIPA with classic BOP data.

You must create a sequence flow between the process stations that you use in a DIPA node. Another way
to think of it is that every process station except the last one in a DIPA node must have a predecessor.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan supports external sequence flows for DIPA.

You must set the following preferences to use this feature:

• MEDynamicIPAOccurrenceTypes—Determines which part occurrence types are collected into a

DIPA node. The default value is MEConsumed. If you use other occurrence types, such as custom
occurrence types, your administrator must add these occurrence types to the preference. Otherwise
the DIPA does not contain parts assigned to the process structure with those occurrence types.

• MEDynamicIPARemoveOccTypes—Determines which occurrence types to consider for removal from

aggregated parts of the predecessors in the given process structure to generate the DIPA. Set the
value to valid Teamcenter occurrence type in your structure.

• MEDynamicIPADisplayName—Determines the property of the predecessor in the given process

structure to be considered when generating the name of the In-Process Assembly (IPA). A valid value
is one of the following plant BOP line properties: bl_item_object_name or bl_rev_object_name.

• MEDynamicIPARecursiveCreateProcessTypes—Determines which object types are used to

recursively generate DIPAs in the process sub-hierarchies. Default values include
Mfg0MEProcStatnRevision and MEProcessRevision.

• MEDynamicIPARootItemTypes—Determines the types of root item allowed by the product or

manufacturing bill of material (MBOM) structures that are part of a DIPA. The default value is Item.

7-58 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
If you create a custom item type that is subclassed instead of subtyped, or vice versa, you must
edit the value of MEDynamicIPARootItemTypes and add your custom type.

• MEDynamicIPATraversalClosureRule—Determines the closure rule to be used for traversal of the

process structure to calculate the DIPA. The default value is DynamicIPAProcessOnlyWithPA.

Note:
If you customize your process and add your own closure rule type derived from the item type,
you must edit the transfer mode value of MEDynamicIPATraversalClosureRule.

• MEDynamicIPADisableRepopulateForPS—Determines the closure rule to use to traverse the process

structure to calculate the DIPA. The default value is DynamicIPAProcessOnlyWithPA.

In addition, you must add these preferences to the AWC_Startup_preference in the Teamcenter rich
client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning
page.

2. In the Process panel, expand the assembly and select a station.

In this example, Station 2 is selected.

3. Click the Background Parts tab, then click More and select Create DIPA.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the DIPA node, and includes all the parts that were consumed in the
process before the station you selected.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 7-59

4. (Optional) In the Process panel, select an operation and then drag the DIPA node to the Resources
tab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns the DIPA node to the operation.

5. (Optional) In the upper-left panel, in the Background Parts tab, select next to each object you
want to display in the Viewer.

6. (Optional)

Click the Background Parts tab, then click More and select Update DIPA.

Teamcenter Easy Plan updates all consumed parts within the DIPA node and all predecessor
relationships.

If you assigned the DIPA node to an operation, Easy Plan updates the same information that is
assigned to the operation. You do not need to manually refresh it there.

Tip:
After you apply a different configuration to a structure, update the DIPA node. You might
have configured out part of the DIPA node.

7. (Optional) To remove a DIPA node, you must manually remove any predecessor relationships within
the node.

In addition you must manually remove any assignments to operations, if you assigned a DIPA node
to an operation.

7-60 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Process resources and operators

Create a process resource

You can create human or machine process resource types. Process resource types perform different
operations. Typically automated tasks are done by machines, and manual tasks are done by humans.

Note:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO only counts human process resources when it calculates total
waiting time and the total number of process resources.

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. Select a station and click the More icon.

4. Select Create Process Resource .

5. Select a type of Operator or Machine.

6. Type in a Name and click Create.

7. Assign and unassign operations to the new process resource in the station.

Create a process resource in the plant BOP tree

You can create a process resource in the plant bill of process (plant BOP) tree and then assign operations
to it. The process resource can be an operator or a machine.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-1

Prerequisites

You must set the TCAllowedChildTypes value to Mfg0ProcResourceRevision. In addition, you must
add TCAllowedChildTypes to the AWC_Startup_preference in the Teamcenter rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the Process Planning
page.

2. Expand the assembly, select a station, and then click Create Process Resource .

Note:
You must create the process resource from a process station. You cannot create the process
resource from other objects within the product BOP.

3. In the Create Process Resource dialog box select the process resource type, then type a Name and
click Create.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the process resource as a child of the station.

4. (Optional) In the assembly, select the process resource you created and click Create Operation .

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the operation as a child of the process resource, and assigns that
operation to the process resource.

Manage process resource interactions

During line balancing, you must ensure that stations and process resources (PRs) do not exceed their
defined takt time. You can define and evaluate dependencies between operations that PRs perform,
because one operation may not be able to start until another operation is completed.

Example:
A machine can begin working only after materials are loaded into it. Or during an operation,
material can be unloaded from a machine only after all operations are complete.

Interoperational dependencies may cause gaps in work executed by a PR. That gap is wait time, because
the PR is idle. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO helps you to identify wait time for each PR and to
increase utilization by assigning one PR to multiple operations, when possible.

8-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
In a process station, process resources may be humans or machines. Humans are often called
operators, and machines are often called process resources.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO supports:

• Filtering data by product variant —you can analyze and manage balancing for one product variant
without affecting balancing for other product variants.

• Shared PRs—if an operator in one station is also assigned to operations in another station, that is a
shared operator.

• to the left of an operator indicates a shared operator is assigned to operations in the station

• to the left of an operation indicates the operation is assigned to a shared PR at another station

Tip:
Hover on the symbol to view information about the shared operator.

Analyze operator capacity

Some operators are not assigned 100% of the time to a line during every cycle. Part-time operators often
have other tasks to complete in parallel with work on the line.

Example:
For example, an operator may only be available to work 50% of the time at the balanced line. The
rest of the time, the operator may work on a mirrored line in the next station.

When you perform balancing, account for any part-time operators assigned to the line, so the line does
not exceed defined takt time.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-3

Note:
An operator with a capacity of less than 100% may not be shared, meaning that the operator is not
available to do work in other stations. If an operator is already shared, the person cannot have a
capacity less than 100%.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO treats operators as process resources (PRs) during calculations. Process
Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses this formula to calculate available takt time for a part-time PR:

Line takt time * capacity of PR.

Example:
Takt = 60
Operator is assigned to station 50% of their time
Calculated takt time for the part-time operator is 30
Allocated work = 25
Available time = 5

Define capacity for part-time operators

You set operator capacity to help analyze your plan, and determine how many operators the plan is
using.

Note:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO counts each part-time operator as a single person.

Perform the following steps to define capacity for part-time operators.

1. In the plant BOP, navigate to a process line or process area and click the Balancing tab.

2. Select a process station.

3. Select an operator (PR) in the station.

4. Click the More icon.

5. Select Edit Process Resource Capacity .

8-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. Click Capacity, select the operator's availability as a percentage, and click Done.

Note:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses a percentage of the available time to calculate
operator capacity, then lists capacity for part-time operators next to those resources in the
station tile.
Process resource capacity is set with a predefined list. Your Teamcenter administrator may
create custom values that are not listed in this example by adding values to the site specific
preference EP_ProcessResourceCapacityValues.

7. View, analyze, and adjust the line to ensure that takt time is not exceeded.

Wait times for part-time operators

If a part-time operator works in a station, work time is calculated from when the operator starts working
until relative takt time is completed for that operator. For an operator allocated 50% of the time, relative
takt time is 50% of total station takt time.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-5

Example:
In the Operations Sequence, total station takt time is 60 seconds. The second operator is
allocated at 50%, so that operator's relative takt time is 30 seconds.
The second operator does not start work until Operator 20 (the first operator) completes the
first operation, and the second operator must complete the next operation in 30 seconds. That
operation takes 28.40 seconds, so the second operator's wait time is calculated as 1.6 seconds.

Assign operations from Product BOP to stations

Operations

Define dependencies between operations

Use this procedure to define dependencies between operations.

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. Select a station.

8-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

When you select a Station tile, the Operations table updates to list all operations in that station.
The Operations table provides the following information:

• The Station tiles list all operators (PRs) assigned to each station.

• The table header states how many operations are missing a time allocation. Any operations
without a time allocation are highlighted in orange text.

• The table list operations (REV NAME), Allocated and Estimated times for each operation, and the
associated Process Resource (Operator) for each operation.

Below the Operations table, the Operations Sequence table lists operators assigned to the
station, and the sequence of tasks performed at the station.

Note:
You can resequence operations during line balancing if needed.

4. In the Operations Sequence table, hover at the end of an operation until you see the diamond
symbol.

5. Drag the diamond symbol to draw the required sequence (flow) from the first operation to the next
required operation in the sequence.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO updates the Operations Sequence table with the dependencies
you just defined and updates related calculations.

Delete a dependency in a plan

To delete a dependency, select the dependency line and click Delete .

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO prompts you to verify the deletion. Next, Process Planning for
BTO/BTS/CTO verifies that the deletion does not cause errors within or between other dependencies,
and updates calculations for the station.

Resequence operations

You can sequence operations during functional planning when you create them. You can also use the
table to resequence operations during line balancing if necessary.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-7

Note:
You must resequence operations from the process station. You cannot resequence operations from
a process resource.

Note:
If a process resource (operator) is shared between multiple stations, the process station sequence
order determines the sequence in which operations are performed.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), navigate to a process area or process line and click the Balancing
tab.

2. Select a station tile.

The Operations table updates to display only operations assigned to the selected station.

3. In the Operations section of the Product BOP page, drag the operation and drop it between two
other operations.

4. Select an operation and drag it to a new spot in Operations table.

The order of operations changes.

Tip:

(Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Search for operations from the line balancing page

You can search on the line balancing page to find specific operations.

Note:
You can search for operations by item ID or revision name. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO
returns results based on full or partial search criteria.

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. Click Show Product BOP.

4. Type a full or partial item ID or revision name, and click Search.

8-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. (Optional) Select and open a search result to continue authoring the operation.

Assign or reassign operations to a process resource to equalize allocated time

You can assign operations to a process resource that were previously unassigned or assigned to another
process resource of the station. You may do this to equalize the time allocated to two workers in a
station.

Note:
You can also drag and drop operations to assign them to a process resource in the station.

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. In the table, select operations and click Assign to Process Resource .

At least one process resource must exist to see the Assign to Process Resource command.

4. Select a process resource from the list.

You can select Unassign to return the operation to the Not Assigned list for this station.

An operation can be assigned to a single process resource at once. Assigning an operation to a process
resource either unassigns it from another process resource or removes it from the Not Assigned list. The
roll up times are updated on the station tile.

Assign operations to a process resource in a different station

You can assign the operations to a process resource in another station without moving them to the other
station. This shares the process resource between the two stations. You may do this if a worker in a

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-9

nearby station is under utilized and operations in a station that exceeds the takt time cannot be moved
to his station.

Note:
You can also drag and drop operations to assign them to a process resource in a different station.

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. Select operations and click Assign to Process Resource .

At least one process resource must exist to see the Assign to Process Resource command.

4. Click Assign to Another Process Resource.

The Assign to Process Resource panel is displayed.

The number of operations and total time shown in the Assign to Process Resource panel
increases.

5. Select a process resource in another station.

6. In the Assign to Process Resource panel, click Assign to Process Resource.

The process resource is added to the source station as a shared resource. Operations assigned to
the process resource remain in the original station, and the total time of the process resource in

8-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

both stations is updated with a new total time that includes its previously assigned operations and
newly assigned operations.

After the operation is assigned to a shared process resource, an icon is shown next to it in the
target station.

If you unassign all operations a shared process resource is performing in one station, it is removed
from the station into which it was shared.

Move operations to a process resource in a different station

You can move an operation to a process resource in another station. You may want to do this if one
station exceeds the takt time, and another station is under utilized.

Note:
You can also drag and drop operations to move them to a process resource in a different station.

1. Open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Click the Balancing tab.

3. Select one or multiple operations and click Cut .

4. Select a process resource of a station from the list and click Paste .

Plan plant BOP operations

View operation planning

In the plant BOP, operation planning is performed on the operation page. This includes the activities,
parts, and tools that are needed to perform the operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-11

• Operation

• Time

Each operation contains time objects that describe the more detailed tasks to be performed in the
operation and can be sequenced. For example, you could create these activities to describe how to
insert an instrument panel into a car: Maneuver Lift Assist Holding Instrument Panel through Car
Door, Secure Instrument Panel to Car, and Remove Empty Lift Assist from Car.

• Parts

These are the parts associated to the operation.

• Tools

8-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

These are the tool associated to the operation.

• Documents

Reference documents can be added to operations and activities.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-13

Create operations

You can either create operations directly in the plant BOP or you can add operations from a functional
plan (product BOP) to the plant BOP.

To create operations directly in the plant BOP, perform these steps:

1. Search and open or navigate to a process station.

The process station page is displayed.

2. Click the Planning tab.

3. Click Create Operation .

4. In the Create Operation dialog box, select an operation type.

5. Type a name in the Name box.

6. (Optional) Type additional information in the Description box.

7. Click Create.

8. (Optional) You can create station reports.

Add content to an operation

Add an activity

1. Search and open or navigate to an operation.

2. Click the Time tab.

3. Determine where to create the new activity step using one of these techniques:

Note:
Activities are performed in an operation from top down.

• If you select an activity, a new activity is added after the selected activity.

• If no activity is selected, a new activity is added as the last for the operation.

4. Click Add Activity from Data Card .

8-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. Type a string in the Search by code box to locate the time code from the data card and click
Search .

6. Select the time code, and then type the Quantity and Frequency.

7. Select a time Category from the list.

8. Click Create to add the activity, or click Create & Add More to add more activities.

9. (Optional) Double-click the Name and Activity Description for an activity to edit the fields and
provide details specific to your environment.

10. Click Close when you have added all activities to the operation.

11. (Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Create activities and define roll-up time on operations

Time management

Time analysis

Use time analysis to assign approximate time values to operational activities that workers must perform
to manufacture products on a line. Time analysis uses standard time elements from a time system. A
standard time element is the historical, measured time used as a baseline that is required by an average
skilled operator, working at a normal pace, to perform a specified task using a prescribed method.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-15

You use standard time elements to ensure that time calculations are accurately defined per your
company standards. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO supports the following time systems.

• TiCon integration

• Methods – Time – Measurement (MTM) Association

Access the Time Management panel

Use the Time Management panel to create or modify activities that workers must perform for specific
operations to manufacture products on a line.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package, or create one and open it.

2. Navigate to work package planning tasks, and then navigate to the Process Planning page.

3. In the Process tab or panel, select an operation, and in the page toolbar, click Show Time
Management .

The Time Management panel replaces the Viewer panel and displays a list of activities associated
with the selected operation.

8-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The name of the operation selected in the Process panel. Below the operation name
are the names and descriptions of all activities that are currently displayed in the Time
Management panel.

Duration displays the sum of all currently displayed activity work time values in the
selected operation, 11.52 + 2.16 + 2.16 = 15.84. Time units of measure, in this case
seconds, are displayed in the page header.

The activity code and unit time values for each activity.

The quantity and frequency, as well as the time category of activities to be

completed. These values are editable and changes to them impact work time and
duration.

Example:
Changing the quantity of the Response time activity from a value of 2 to
4 doubles that activity's total work time to 4.32. The additional work time is
added to the duration sum, 15.84 + 2.16 = 18.0.

The Work Time column displays the total time necessary to complete the activity.
Work time - unit time * (quantity * frequency).

4. (Optional) Create a time activity from another activity or from an MTM.

5. To close the Time Management panel and return to the Viewer panel, click Show Time
Management .

Create a time activity from another activity

Create an operational activity for use in time analysis by searching for a copy of a similar activity and
reusing or modifying specific properties of that copy.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-17

Note:
Time activities require that your administrator sets the value of the preference
EP_TimeAnalysisMode = ACTIVITIES.

Procedure

1. Access the Time Management panel.

2. In the Time Management toolbar, click Search Activity .

3. In the Search Activity dialog box, type a full or partial activity name and click Search .

4. Select the activity to be copied and edit any of the following to reflect the requiremnts of your new
activity.

• In the Quantity text box, type a different quantity for the number of activities to be completed.

• In the Frequency text box, type a different number to represent how frequently the activity must
be completed.

• From the Category list, select a different time category.

5. Do one of the following.

• To create the activity and define another activity, click Create & Add More.

• To create a single activity and close the Search Activity dialog box, click Create.

The new activity or activities are created in the Time Management panel as new instances of the
activity you selected in step 4, with the properties you modified.

Create a time activity from an MTM

You can create an operational activity for use in time analysis by accessing a Methods-Time
Measurement (MTM) data card, if MTM data is configured by your administrator.

Note:
Time activities require that your administrator sets the value of the preference
EP_TimeAnalysisMode = ACTIVITIES.

Procedure

1. Access the Time Management panel.

8-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. In the Time Management toolbar, click Add Activity .

3. In the Add Activity dialog box, from the left tree panel, select a preferred data card.

4. In the selected data card, hover your mouse overs cells in time-measurement unit (TMU) columns
to read their descriptions.

5. To create a new activity as an instance of a TMU cell's properties, click the cell.

The new activity is created in the Time Management panel with the properties of the selected
MTM.

Time categories

You assign one or more time categories to each activity type. These time categories are supported for
time analysis:

• NA – A time category is not assigned. The Category box for the activity is gray.

• VA – Value-added activities are shown with a green Category box.

• NVA – Non-value added activities are shown with a red Category box.

• NVABR – Non-value added but required activities are shown with an orange Category box.

You assign time categories according to business practices. Time categorization affects how time is
calculated and shown in reports.

You separate activities into categories so you can determine where time can be minimized for efficiency.
For example, you may want to reduce how much time you spend doing non-value added activities such
as walking. Below are several examples of value-added and non-value added activities.

Value added Non-value added

Get and dispose part or tool Walk

Position or apply Enter or exit vehicle

Secure Inspect

Assemble or subassemble Track sheet

Route, connect, or clip Scanning

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-19

Default units of time

During planning, you can view and change units of measure for time. A selection of default time units is
provided for you, including those shown here.

Multiplier to
Time unit seconds

1/1000th min 0.06

1/100th min 0.6

1/10th min 6

FAC 0.18

MOD 0.129

TMU 0.036

day 86400

hour 3600

minute 60

second 1

Set time units of measure

You can set time units of measure for your project. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO saves those units
of measure for the project until you change them. In this example, time is measured in seconds.

In Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO 2.8, this feature is not supported on Internet Explorer. Use a
different browser to set time units of measure.

1. In the header, beside Time Unit, click the unit of measure.

2. Select a time unit from the Time drop-down list.

Time units of measure are updated for your project. Those units of measurement are saved for the
project until you change them.

8-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
Hover over an object on the page (for example, a station, operation, or process resource) to
display time-related data in a tool tip for that object.

Allocated time and weighted time

In the process station page, the Operations tab contains an Operations section. You must configure the
product variants displayed on this tab.

You can add, delete, and edit operations, depending on your user access rights. Editing an operation in
the list changes its properties.

Allocated time is the sum of the time assigned to activities within the operation. It includes the
time taken to perform the operation, including value-added, non-value added, and non-value
added but required time. Because its value is rolled up, you must make changes to allocated time
on the activities within the operation, rather than on the process station page. Allocated time is
determined using the activity’s time analysis, but if an activity has an assigned time system code,
the assigned time is used instead of the allocated time.

Weighted time is automatically calculated using the following equation: (weighted time) =
(allocated time) x (the assigned probability from the production program). You cannot edit
weighted time directly in this chart.

Warning:
Before you perform line balancing, verify that each operation's allocated time and variant
probability are greater than zero. If either the allocated time or the variant probability for
an operation is zero (or less), Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO ignores the operation during
balancing.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-21

Calculating station work content and remaining time

When you use a production program, operations may or may not have variants assigned to them.
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO calculates station work content and remaining time differently,
depending on whether variants are assigned to an operation.

With variants

For an operation with variants, the active mode for calculating work content determines the operation
time that displays in line balancing.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses two methods to calculate work content and time with variants:

• Average work content mode (default)—uses probability to weight the operation time, which then
weights the station work content.

• Minimum and maximum work content mode—uses only the worst and best case variants of a
particular station to calculate the work content.

Note:
Probability is used only in conjunction with variants. See the Teamcenter Manufacturing Process
Planner documentation for a description of variants and their effect on line balancing.

Without variants

Allocated time is how long it takes to complete a specific operation assigned to a process.

Station work content is the sum of allocated time for all operations assigned to a station.

Operation name Allocated time

Obtain seat 17

Install seat 15

Secure seat 10

Station work content 42

(total time)

Takt time is the time allocated to the station. It represents how long the product being manufactured
remains within the station. On a moving line, the takt time is controlled by the speed of the line, the
length of the station, and the distance between products being manufactured on the line (also known
as the pitch).

8-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The station remaining time represents the total time a station is idle of work, and is calculated using this
equation:

Station remaining time = (station takt time) - (station work content)

Note:
After operations are allocated, you can compare the workload of each station to balance the load
between them. Your aim is to create a balanced line where the remaining time value for each
station equals zero, meaning each station is occupied 100% of the time.

Calculating variant probability

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses allocated time to calculate process and station work content. It
can also calculate for variant probability, which is a percentage that describes how often the mix of
products on a line includes a given variant.

If there are variants:

(station work content) = (time of assigned operations) x (operation’s variant probability)

For example, consider the interior color variant in a certain plant: 40% of the time the interior is brown,
45% of the time the interior is red, and 15% of the time the interior is black. If the insert seat operation
time is 20 seconds:

Operation Product Product Allocated Weighted

name program program time time
(variant) (variant)
probability

Install seat Brown 0.40 20 8

interior

Install seat Red interior 0.45 20 9

Install seat Black 0.15 20 3

interior

If all three operations are allocated to the same process area:

Operation Product Line

name program balancing
(variant) operation
time

Install seat Brown interior 8

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-23

Install seat Red interior 9

Install seat Black interior 3

Station work content 20

Generate reports

You can generate reports for the various Teamcenter objects (such as a process area, process station, or
operation).

Reports are generated in Excel or PDF format. The Teamcenter administrator defines the report
parameters and the output format for each report. Your Teamcenter administrator also creates any
custom reports.

Note:
If you filter the balancing view to display a specific product variant, the report shows data for that
variant only.

1. Navigate to the object on which you want to run a report.

2. Click Reports .

3. In the Create Report dialog box, choose a default or company-specific report and then click
Create.

Note:
The following default report types are provided. Report types listed in the dialog box vary,
according to the object you used to run the report.

• Operation runs a report for an operation listing the activities and details about the
operation (such as estimated time, picture, or name).

• Material runs a report for an operation listing the consumed parts and tools assigned to
the operation.

• Time Analysis runs a report for an operation listing activities in the operation, and the
assigned clock time, MTM data card, or TiCon time standard information.
Teamcenter Easy Plan generates report output to Microsoft Excel or PDF format.

4. Open or save the report.

8-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Balance the line

Edit operation frequency

You can edit operation frequency to produce a more accurate operation time.

Note:
In the Operation Frequency field, the left number in the fraction is the Repeats value and the
right number is the Per Cycle value. To calculate the total operation time, you multiply this
fraction by the sum of the activities. For example, if the sum of the activities is 2, and the
frequency is 1 repeat per 2 cycles (1/2), the operation total time is 2 * (1/2) = 1.

1. Search for and open or navigate to an operation.

2. Click the Time tab.

3. In the summary row at the bottom of the table, click Edit Operation Frequency .

4. Type in new values for the operation frequency.

Reorder the activities

1. Search and open or navigate to an operation.

The operation page is displayed.

2. Click the Time tab.

3. Drag an activity to the line in between two activities where it should take place.

The order of activities is changed.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-25

4. (Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Edit or delete activities

Edit activities

1. Search and open or navigate to an operation.

2. From an operation page, select the Time tab.

3. Double-click the Name, Activity Description, Quantity, Frequency, or Category for an activity to
type something different.

The time code is used to add a new activity to the operation. A default Name and Activity
Description is shown.

4. (Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Delete activities

1. Search and open or navigate to an operation.

The operation page is displayed.

2. From an operation page, click the Time tab.

3. Select the activities you want to delete.

4. Click Delete .

5. At the prompt, click Delete to permanently delete the object.

6. (Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

8-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

View production program information

If the manufacturing line you are planning contains either a mixture of products or products with
options, you can display information about the production program, or variants.

1. Navigate to your plant BOP.

2. Click Show Production Program on the one-step commands.

The Production Program dialog box appears. It shows information about the plant’s assigned variants,
production rate, and variant probabilities. You use this information during line balancing.

Tip:
You can create or edit this information using either the Manage Work Package page in Process
Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO, or the Teamcenter rich client.

View object details

The Details tab displays properties according to the type of object you are viewing. The Teamcenter
administrator can configure which properties display for objects in your environment.

1. Search for and open or navigate to an object.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-27

2. Click the Details tab.

You can view properties information for a plant BOP, process line, process area, process station, or
operation.

This example shows the Details tab for a plant BOP object.

View operation details

You can open an operation to review related time, parts, tools, and activities information.

1. Search for and open or navigate to an operation.

Note:
Activities in the Time tab are measured in seconds. This time is rolled up to the Activities
Time for the parent operation. The Activities Time should be equal to or less than the
allocated Operation Total Time.

2. Click the Time tab.

3. Review data related to the operation.

The summary row at the bottom of the Activities table displays:

• Activities Time (seconds) – The sum of all activity times, without consideration of the
frequency.

• Operation Frequency – The frequency of the operation. You can view and edit the operation
frequency to produce a more accurate operation time.

8-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Operation Total Time – The allocated time of the operation, which is the total activity time
multiplied by the frequency.

4. (Optional) Click Back to Balancing to return to the Balancing page.

Manage station comments during line balancing

During line balancing, you can use the comments feature to add notes about changes you make. This
helps you track planning changes and avoid confusion when multiple planners work within the same
structure.

If a station contains comments, the station displays a comment bubble. Hover over the comment bubble
to review the comments.

Add or edit a comment

Use these steps to add or edit comments to a station.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), navigate to a process area or process line and click the Balancing
tab.

2. Select a station tile, click More , and select Add Comment.

3. Type text in the Add Comment dialog box, and click Done.

Note:
If a station is released, a message displays stating that the object must be revised to complete
the action. If you add, edit, or delete a comment, that is considered a revision to the station.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-29

Click Yes, Revise.

Delete a comment

Use these steps to delete an existing comment from a station.

1. In the plant BOP, navigate to a process area or process line and click the Balancing tab.

2. Select a station tile, click More , and select Edit Comment.

3. Click Delete comment for this station.

The comment permanently disappears from the station.

Note:
If a station is released, a message displays stating that the object must be revised to complete
the action. If you add, edit, or delete a comment, that is considered a revision to the station.

Click Yes, Revise.

Author production program and evaluate balancing by variants

Product configurations

Analyzing product configurations

If you work with product configurations (variants) during line balancing, you can filter data by product
variant to identify production bottlenecks. You can use this information to determine which variants
use the minimum and maximum amounts of time, and reassign resources and operations as needed.

Production Process Planning supports both classic variants and Product Configurator variants; however,
you cannot use a mixture of classic and Product Configurator variants in the same structure.

Note:
Your Teamcenter administrator must configure and enable Product Configurator in your
environment before you can filter and view data that uses the Product Configurator variant
functionality.
If you use Product Configurator variants, verify that your environment meets prerequisites.

You perform the following tasks to analyze product configurations:

• Analyze existing variant formulas on operations.

8-30 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Define the variant formula.

• Filter by product variant.

• Review variant time distribution to balance the line.

Optimize product configuration on the balancing page

During line balancing, you can optimize the balancing of each variant by operation.

Note:
With classic variants, you work with the variant condition, and with Product Configurator variants,
you work with the variant formula. You use this same procedure to refine the variant condition or
formula in your environment.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line and click the
Balancing tab.

2. Select a station, and select an operation or multiple operations.

3. Click Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box opens.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-31

Within the Variant Formula dialog box:

• Each operation that you selected is a table column.

• Table cells indicate the status of variant formulas for each operation. A check mark in a table cell
indicates that a formula is defined for that operation.

• The variant families or options are listed as table rows.

• The caret in each column heading opens a drop-down menu with additional options for that
operation.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Click Start Edit .

6. Click inside a table cell to add a variant formula to an operation.

A check mark is displayed in the table cell.

7. (Optional) Click inside a table cell to remove a variant formula from an operation.

8. Click Save Edits , and click X.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO returns to the Balancing tab. The Variant Formula column
displays defined variant formulas for each operation within the station.

8-32 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
In the Overview section click Product Variant and select a variant family or condition to filter data
by the selected product variant. You can also select Weighted to see the weighted time for all
product variants.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 8-33

8-34 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Use Teamcenter tools to manage study

Use Teamcenter Manufacturing Access while planning a process

When you perform process planning using Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner, you create,
search, and load studies.

Administrator

See the Teamcenter Easy Plan Deployment documentation.

Your administrator completes the following data setup steps:

1. Deploy your environment

Install and configure Teamcenter and Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

2. Convert legacy studies

Convert studies created before using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access with a workflow.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-1

Process planner

The process planner completes the following steps in Manufacturing Process Planner:

1. Log on to the Teamcenter rich client and open the Manufacturing Process Planner
application.

See the Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner documentation.

2. Search for a collaboration context using the Study Manager, and look at its studies.

Note:
The Study Manager is available to Manufacturing Process Planner users with
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access configured.

3. (Optional) Create a study

If after searching, you cannot find a study for the desired purpose, create a study using the
Study Manager.

4. Load a study

Load a study using the Study Manager.

5. Use Manufacturing Process Planner to begin planning a process.

See the Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner documentation.

6. Approve the completed study.

Set the status for briefcase export using the Study Manager.

Managing studies in Manufacturing Process Planner

Study basics

Working with studies

After you open a study from the Study Manager view, you see one of these study types:

• Shared study

In the Study Manager, a shared study uses this icon . In other Manufacturing Process Planner
views, a shared study uses this icon .

9-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Isolated study

In the Study Manager, an isolated study uses this icon . In other Manufacturing Process Planner
views, an isolated study uses this icon .

Sync and publish to studies

The sync and publish buttons are typically not needed for shared studies. They are frequently used with
isolated studies. Isolated studies are normally used for event-based work in Process Simulate or as a way
to set up alternative processes. When using isolated studies, the study contains alternate processes and
operations, but has shared resources.

There are several commands related to isolated studies:

• Synchronize to Study – Updates the processes and operations in the study.

• Publish from Study – Updates the processes and operations in the process structure.

For more information, see the Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner documentation.

Adding operations to studies

To add operations from another station into a study, a copy and paste can be used. As data associated
to these operations is shared, it is updated in all places. The user should take care to put only operations
into the study that they intend to update, for example, OP1 in the diagram below. As this operation is
linked to specific resources from Sta1, it is also included in this study.

Adding resources to studies

Additional resources that are not included as children to the linked station from the plant structure
(BOE), can also be added to the study. These resources may be added to the study in order to evaluate
adjacent clearances. If there is no intention to move a resource while preforming the study analysis,
then the resource should be added to the study by assigning as a MEWorkarea directly to the study
process (RES/A in the diagram). However, if there is a requirement to reposition a resource and the user
would like this information to be propagated back to the plant structure (BOE), then the immediate
parent to the resource should be assigned as MEWorkarea instead. See GUARDING/A in the diagram
below.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-3

Study Manager

Note:
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access must be installed and configured to use Study Manager.

You can use Study Manager to:

• View all studies in a collaboration context tree.

• View only those studies in a particular process or plant structure contained in that tree (the structure
or zone itself, the stations within it, and operations inside those stations).

• View multiple process or plant structures in separate Study Manager views.

• Verify if an existing study might already meet your needs before creating a new study.

• Create a new study.

9-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Open a study.

• Load a study directly into Process Simulate and run a simulation.

Locate a study using Study Manager

View studies in the Study Manager

1. In the Manufacturing Process Planner, open the Collaboration Context Tree view.

2. (Method 1) View all the studies of the collaboration context:

• In the Collaboration Context Tree view, right-click a collaboration context and choose Open
with → Study Manager to open a new Study Manager view.

• In the Collaboration Context Tree view, select a collaboration context and choose

Set input to recent selection to switch the active object in the Study Manager.

The Study Manager view displays all the studies of the collaboration context. This list may include
several hundred studies.

3. (Method 2) View all the studies associated to the selected process object or its subprocesses:

• In the process structure, right-click a process object and choose Open with → Study Manager
to open a new Study Manager view.

• In the process structure, select a process object and choose

Set input to recent selection to switch the active object in the Study Manager.

The Study Manager view displays all the studies associated to the selected object and its
subprocesses. You can use this technique to narrow the list of studies shown in the Study
Manager.

The study properties are displayed in columns, for example, Name, Owner, Description.

4. Select a study.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-5

(Optional) View the study properties

1. View studies in the Study Manager.

The studies are displayed in a table. Each column is a property of a study revision object.
You can configure the columns that are displayed in this table. The columns are stored in the
TCMA_StudyMgrStudyGrid_Column user preference.

2. In the Study Manager view, click Table Columns and choose Select Columns.

The Columns Selector dialog box is shown.

3. By default, 17 properties of a study revision are shown in the Available Fields list.

You can enter part of the name of the column you wish to display in the Filter to find it easily.

The contents of the Available Fields list can be configured by your administrator. See the
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment documentation for details.

4. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the left and click Add .

For example you could add Release Status and Is Approved.

5. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the right and click Remove .

6. (Optional) Drag the properties on the right to change the order of the columns.

7. Click OK.

The new properties are displayed in the table.

(Optional) Sort and organize table columns

1. View studies in the Study Manager.

2. (Optional) To reorder the columns: In the Study Manager view, drag a column header and place it
in between two others.

For example, drag the Description column to the left of the Object column.

3. (Optional) To sort the studies by a property: In the Study Manager view, click a column header.

For example, sort by the Object column.

9-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

(Optional) Filter the list of studies by name

1. View studies in the Study Manager.

2. In the Study Manager view, type part or all of a study name in the Search box.

For example, type sh.

Note:
You cannot use wildcards (*) in your search (for example, Isolate*).

3. Press Enter or click Search .

A subset of studies are shown.

All studies with names that begin with sh are displayed and all other studies are hidden. The search
string is highlighted in yellow in the study name and description.

(Optional) Filter the list of studies using a study property

1. View studies in the Study Manager.

2. In the Study Manager view, click the down arrow to the right of the Search box, and choose an
object property.

For example, you could select Owner, then type either the user's name or ID in the parenthesis.

You can add additional properties to the search string, for example, Name(me00),
Description(Big). You can also type the search string manually.

Note:
Your administrator can customize the properties listed in this field.

3. Type in a value, and press Enter.

Create a study in Study Manager

If you want to use a study in Study Manager view or the Load Study dialog box, you must create
the studies in Study Manager. Any studies created using the legacy New Study command must be
converted before they can use used.

1. In the Manufacturing Process Planner, right-click the collaboration context, an object in a process
structure, or an object in the plant structure, and choose Open with → Study Manager .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-7

The Study Manager view opens.

Tip:
To switch the active object in the Study Manager, select a different object and choose Set
input to recent selection .
To open a second Study Manager view, right-click a different object and choose Open with
→ Study Manager .

2. In Study Manager view, click Create Study .

The Create Study dialog box opens.

3. In the Create Study dialog box, select Isolated Study or Shared Study .

4. Type a name and optional description.

5. Click Create.

The new study is shown in the Study Manager view.

The new study is also shown in the Collaboration Context Tree view.

The study is now attached to the collaboration context, but its relation is not shown by default in
the Collaboration Context Tree. Your environment may contain hundreds of studies, and showing
the relation for each study would cause the data to load slowly.

6. Copy the structures you want into the new study. You can add one or more of the following to the
study:

• Process area objects from the process structure.

• Work area and resource objects from the plant structure.

9-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
The objects that you add directly to a study are the root objects, which are searchable.

The new study opens in its own view and appears at the bottom of the collaboration context tree.
You can see it in Study Manager when you select the collaboration context and click .

Remove study in MPP

1. In the Manufacturing Process Planner, right-click the collaboration context, an object in a process
structure, or an object in the plant structure, and choose Open with → Study Manager .

The Study Manager view opens.

2. In Study Manager view, select a study.

3. Click Remove Study and click Remove.

The study is removed from the collaboration context. However, it still exists in the database and
you can reattach it to the collaboration context using the Manufacturing Process Planner.

Open a study with Study Manager

1. Locate a study using Study Manager.

2. Open a study by selecting it in the Study Manager and clicking Open .

A view is opened for the study.

Load a study into Process Simulate

You can load a study directly into Process Simulate from Study Manager. Teamcenter Manufacturing
Access keeps the collaboration context configuration when you load the study into Process Simulate.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-9

Note:
Your administrator must configure Process Simulate on Teamcenter before you can use this
feature.

1. Use Study Manager to locate and view a list of studies.

2. Select a study.

3. Click Load in Line Simulation Mode or Load in Standard Mode to load the study in
Process Simulate.

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access loads the study directly into Process Simulate. Process Simulate uses
the same collaboration context configuration to display the study.

Set study status

In the Study Manager dialog box, the Set Status command becomes available when you select
one or multiple studies. This command is used to add or remove a status on the selected study using
workflows.

Note:
Your administrator must configure what status and workflows are used by the command to apply
and remove the status. The Briefcase default is the approved status. However, there is no default
workflow used by the Set Status command.

Example business process

1. After completing the tasks for a milestone, a planner at a supplier uses the Set Status
command to approve a study for inclusion in a Briefcase export back to the OEM.

2. The data manager at the supplier creates a Briefcase export of all approved studies.

3. The simulation engineer uses the Set Status command to remove the approved status before
working on the next milestone.

Manage the status of a study using Study Manager

Add a status to the study

1. Locate a study using the Study Manager view.

2. In the Study Manager view, select one or multiple studies.

9-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. Click Set Status → Approved.

Status is added to the study object.

View the status of a study

1. Locate a study using Study Manager.

2. In the Study Manager, choose Table Columns → Select Columns.

The Columns Selector dialog box is shown.

3. In the Columns Selector dialog box, type stat in the Available Fields box.

4. In the Columns Selector dialog box, select Release Status in the list of available fields, click Add
, and click OK.

The Release Status column is added to the table.

Remove a status from the study

1. Locate a study using Study Manager.

2. In the Study Manager view, select one or multiple studies.

3. Click Set Status → Remove Approve State.

Status is removed from the study object.

Convert study objects

Overview of the conversion process

If your Teamcenter database contains study objects created in the Manufacturing Process Planner
using File → New → Study , you must convert them so that they can be seen in Teamcenter
Manufacturing Access and the Teamcenter Study Manager view. The conversion process is performed
using a Teamcenter workflow named Attach_studies_to_cc.

Convert legacy studies

If you are using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access to create and load your studies, you can no longer
use File → New → Study to create studies. Studies should be created in the Study Manager view
in Manufacturing Process Planner. Legacy studies—studies that you created before working with Study
Manager—must be converted to view them in the Study Manager view and Load Study dialog box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-11

Note:
Converting a study allows it to work with Teamcenter Manufacturing Access, however, legacy tools
and methods of opening and using studies continue to work.

1. In Manufacturing Process Planner, select the process object with the associated study and choose
Tools → Search Study .

2. From the search results view, double-click the study to open and display it in the Collaboration
Context .

3. In the Collaboration Context , select one or many studies, as well as the collaboration context
object.

4. Select File → New → Workflow Process .

The New Process dialog box is opened. The selected collaboration context and studies are shown
in the Targets folder of the workflow to be created.

5. For the Process Template, choose Attach_studies_to_cc.

If the Attach_studies_to_cc process template is not shown, select All for the Process Template
Filter.

6. (Optional) Add a configuration context to the Targets folder.

If a configuration context is not specified, the workflow references the Latest Working revision
rule.

Note:
Your administrator can configure the workflow to create or share a configuration context
for each study structure context. See the Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment
documentation.

7. Click OK.

The study is now converted and attached to the collaboration context object. By default, this
attachment relation is hidden.

Note:
In Teamcenter 11.2.3, Study Manager studies are only visible when the collaboration context is set
as the current object. This issue is resolved in Teamcenter 11.3 and higher.

9-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Perform the study conversion

The Attach_studies_to_cc Teamcenter workflow connects legacy studies to a collaboration context

object. Studies that are connected to a collaboration context object can be viewed in the Teamcenter
Manufacturing Access and the Teamcenter Study Manager view.

Note:
Each study is placed in a new structure context object within the collaboration context and is
related to the structure context using the Mfg0CCStudyRel relation.

1. Log on to the Teamcenter rich client.

2. In the Teamcenter rich client, open a collaboration context using the Manufacturing Process
Planner.

The collaboration context is shown in the Collaboration Context Tree view.

3. Search for studies related to process objects in the collaboration context using Tools → Search
Study .

4. Open the studies from the Search Study Results view.

The studies are shown in the Collaboration Context Tree view.

5. In the Collaboration Context Tree view, select the collaboration context and studies.

6. Choose File → New → Workflow Process.

The New Process dialog box is opened. The selected collaboration context and studies are shown
in the Targets folder of the workflow to be created.

7. In the New Process dialog box, select Attach_studies_to_cc for the Process Template.

If the Attach_studies_to_cc process template is not shown, select All for the Process Template
Filter.

8. (Optional) Add a configuration context to the Targets folder.

If a configuration context is not specified, the TCA0_attach_studies_to_cc action handler

references the Latest Working revision rule by default using the argument -revision rule with
the value of Latest Working.

A configuration context can be created shared for each study structure context. To share it, use the
argument -config context with the value of share.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-13

9. Click OK.

10. In the Collaboration Context Tree view, right-click the collaboration context and choose Open
with → Study Manager .

The related studies are shown in the Study Manager view.

Use NX tools to manage study

Use Teamcenter Manufacturing Access while designing a fixture

When you perform fixture planning using NX, you need to create, search, and load studies.

Administrator

See the Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment documentation.

Your administrator completes the following data setup steps:

1. Deploy your environment

Install and configure NX, Teamcenter, and Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

2. Convert legacy studies

Convert studies created before using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access using a workflow.

Fixture planner

9-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The fixture planner completes the following steps in NX:

1. Start NX in managed mode

See the NX documentation.

2. Search for a collaboration context using Study Manager, and review its studies.

Note:
The Study Manager is available to NX Fixture Planner users with Teamcenter
Manufacturing Access configured.

3. (Optional) Create a study

If after searching, you do not find a suitable study, create a study using the Study Manager.

4. Load a study using the Study Manager.

5. Use NX Fixture Planner to begin designing a fixture.

See the NX Fixture Planner documentation.

Study Manager for fixture planning

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access is developed on top of the Active Workspace platform and is the
technology behind the NX Fixture Planner Study Manager tab of the resource bar. This tab enables
fixture planners to perform more of their tasks within NX and reduces the dependency on the
Teamcenter rich client.

Using the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, fixture planners can do the following:

• Search for a collaboration context, and view a list of its studies.

• Set the project on which you are currently working, so you can see the project's related collaboration
contexts and studies.

• Create a study.

• Edit study contents.

• Load a study into NX.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-15

Note:
Fixture Planner is an application within Teamcenter Integration for NX that you can use to design
and manage the stations and other components using resources stored in Teamcenter. For more
information see the NX Fixture Planner documentation.

Modifying session settings in NX Fixture Planner

As a fixture planner, you can modify the user name, current project, role and user group under which
you are working in Study Manager before you load a study. Modifying any of these settings impacts the
data that is loaded, and any new data that is created.

Note:
Full functionality for this feature is available with NX Fixture Planner 12.0.2 or later. If you are
running earlier versions of NX Fixture Planner, you can see settings information, but you cannot
change it.

This table provides information about how session settings behave in Study Manager.

Note:
The use cases in the following table depend on the Teamcenter configuration in your environment.
For more information, contact your Teamcenter administrator, or refer to the Teamcenter Active
Workspace Deployment documentation.

If you... Then...

Change session settings in Study Manager Teamcenter Manufacturing Access loads those
settings the next time you start Manufacturing
Process Planner or NX Fixture Planner.

Close Study Manager while working with updated The next time you launch Study Manager, it
session settings displays the last session settings in which you
were working.

Do not have access to a process, project, or plant That data does not display for you in the
collaboration context.

Switch projects, user, or group roles Access to data you can view does not change.
You are able to access only data to which you are
assigned.

Do not have access to studies within a loaded Those studies do not display for you in the
collaboration context collaboration context.

Change your user, group, or role while a study is A message warns you that the current study will
loaded in NX Fixture Planner be unloaded.

9-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

If you... Then...

• Click Yes: Current study is not loaded, and any

unsaved changes are lost

• Click No: The change you intended to make is

canceled, and you can continue working in the
current study

Modify session settings in NX Fixture Planner

The Study Manager dialog box contains a header that lists your session settings (user name, current
project, role, and group). Use this process to modify session settings in NX Fixture Planner.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box header, click a session setting. For example, click the project.

2. Select a different session setting (in this example, a project) from the drop-down list.

• Study Manager refreshes the page with data for the setting you selected.

• After you select a new session setting, any new data you create (for example, a study or station)
is affected by the selected session. For example, if you select a different project and create a new
station, that station is assigned to the project you selected.

• When you close this session, the next time you open Study Manager, the session settings you
selected are applied.

Locate a study using the Study Manager

In NX, fixture planners use the Study Manager tab of the resource bar to search for and load studies
in a particular collaboration context object. When using this dialog box, it is not necessary to search for
structures in the Teamcenter rich client and send them to NX.

Note:
If you want to be able to use a study in the NX Study Manager tab of the resource bar, you
must create the study in the Teamcenter, NX, or Process Simulate Study Manager dialog box. Any
studies created using the legacy New Study command must be converted before they can use
used.

Note:
For detailed information on collaboration contexts, see the Tecnomatix Collaboration Context
Reference Manual.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-17

View studies using the NX Study Manager

1. From the NX Fixture Planner resource bar, choose the Study Manager tab.

The Study Manager view appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened in the
Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. (Optional) In the Search More Collaboration Context box, type a search string to search for a
collaboration context.

3. Select a collaboration context object in the list in the left pane.

All studies associated to the collaboration context are displayed in the right pane.

9-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The study properties are displayed in columns, for example, Name, Owner, Description. The
object type is also shown.

• Shared study

In the Study Manager, a shared study uses this icon . Changing the process in the study
affects the original process in the process structure.

• Isolated study

In the Study Manager, an isolated study uses this icon . Changing the process in the study
does not affect the original process in the process structure.

4. Select a study in the right pane.

(Optional) View the study properties

1. View studies using the NX Study Manager.

2. On the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, click Table Columns and choose Select
Columns.

The Columns Selector dialog box is shown.

3. By default, 17 properties of a study revision are shown in the Available Fields list.

You can enter part of the name of the column you wish to display in the Filter to find it easily.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-19

The contents of the Available Fields list can be configured by your administrator. See the
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment documentation for details.

4. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the left and click Add .

For example you could add Release Status and Is Approved.

5. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the right and click Remove .

6. (Optional) Drag the properties on the right to change the order of the columns.

7. Click OK.

The new properties are displayed in the table.

(Optional) Sort and organize table columns

1. View studies using the NX Study Manager.

2. (Optional) To reorder the columns: On the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, drag a column
header and place it in between two others.

For example, drag the Description column to the left of the Object column.

3. (Optional) To sort the studies by a property: On the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, click a
column header.

For example, sort by the Object column.

(Optional) Filter the list of studies by name

1. View studies using the NX Study Manager.

2. On the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, type part or all of a study name in the Search box.

For example, type sh.

Note:
You cannot use wildcards (*) in your search (for example, Isolate*).

3. Press Enter or click Search .

A subset of studies are shown.

9-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

All studies with names that begin with sh are displayed and all other studies are hidden. The search
string is highlighted in yellow in the study name and description.

(Optional) Filter the list of studies using a study property

1. View studies using the NX Study Manager.

2. On the Study Manager tab of the resource bar, click the down arrow to the right of the Search
box, choose an object property.

For example, you could select Owner.

3. Enter a value, and press Enter.

For example for Owner, type either the user's name or ID in the parenthesis.

You can add additional properties to the search string, for example, Name(me00),
Description(Big). You can also type the search string manually.

Note:
Your administrator can add custom fields to this list using Business Modeler IDE and then
adding them to the required preference described in the Teamcenter Easy Plan Deployment
documentation.

Create a study in NX

1. In the NX Fixture Planner, click the Study Manager tab of the resource bar.

The Study Manager dialog box appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened
in the Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. Select a collaboration context or search for another one.

3. In Study Manager view, click Create Study .

The Create Study dialog box opens.

4. In the Create Study dialog box, select Isolated Study or Shared Study .

5. Type a name and optional description.

6. Click Create.

The Edit Study Scope page is shown.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-21

You are now ready to add content to the study.

Edit a study in NX Fixture Planner

Rename a study

1. In Study Manager, double-click the study to be renamed.

2. Type the new study name and press Enter.

Edit study content

1. In Study Manager, select the study to be edited.

2. Click Edit Study Scope .

Add process or plant elements to the study

Use this procedure to add process or plant elements to a study. Work in the Process tab while adding
process elements, and use the Plant tab to add plant elements.

Note:
This procedure tells you how to quickly locate and add a specific element (for example, a process
station) to your study, without having to browse an entire structure to locate elements. You can
also browse a structure to add elements to a study.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box, select the Process or Plant tab.

2. Select a study in the collaboration context, and click Edit Study Scope .

3. In the Search for field, type a partial name for the element for which you are searching.

Tip:
You can type this wildcard character * for the search.

4. Click Search .

5. Select the correct element from the list of matches returned.

6. Click Drill in to expand data within the element.

9-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

7. Drop an element object into the Study Elements area of the dialog box.

The element is added to the Process or Plant tab.

8. (Optional) You can remove study elements as well.

9. Return to the load study page by clicking Back .

Browse to process and plant elements

Use this procedure to browse to process or plant elements so you can add them to a study.

You can also search for specific elements and quickly add them to a study. You can also Browse to
process and plant elements, as described in the next topic.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box, select the Process or Plant tab.

2. In the Process or Plant tab, navigate the structure and locate the element you want to add to the
study. Use the following options to navigate the structure:

Button Action Description

Expand Displays the complete object content. Click to the left
of the object.
Backward Replaces the content of the section with the previous
content in this section’s history.
Forward Replaces the content of the section with the next content
in this section’s history.
Home Use it to return to displaying the top-level of the structure
as the root object of the section. This button is displayed
in the Product or Operations sections when the current
focus is not the top-level of the structure.
Drill up You can select the parent objects from the Hierarchy
breadcrumbs to navigate to them.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 9-23

Remove study in the NX Fixture Planner

1. In the NX Fixture Planner, click the Study Manager tab of the resource bar.

The Study Manager dialog box appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened
in the Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. Select a collaboration context or search for another one.

3. In the Study Manager dialog box, select a study.

4. Click Remove Study and click Remove.

The study is removed from the collaboration context. However, it still exists in the database and
you can reattach it to the collaboration context using the Manufacturing Process Planner.

Open a study from NX

1. Locate a study using the Study Manager tab of the resource bar.

2. Click Open to open the study in NX.

9-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Use Teamcenter Manufacturing Access while validating a process

When you perform process validation using Process Simulate on Teamcenter, you need to create, search,
and load studies. You also may need to insert additional resources or manufacturing features.

Administrator

See the Tecnomatix Installation and Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment documentation.

The following data set-up steps are completed by an administrator.

1. Deploy your environment

Install and configure Process Simulate, Teamcenter, Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

2. Convert legacy studies

Convert studies created before using Teamcenter Manufacturing Access with a workflow.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-1

Simulation engineer

The simulation engineer completes the following steps in Process Simulate.

1. Start Process Simulate from the Teamcenter Rich Client or the desktop.

2. Log on to Teamcenter.

3. Search for a collaboration context in the Load Study dialog box, and review its studies.

Note:
The Load Study dialog box is available to Process Simulate users with Teamcenter
Manufacturing Access configured.

4. Load a study using the Load Study dialog box.

5. (Optional) Create a study using the Load Study dialog box or Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

If after searching you do not find a suitable study, create a study using the Load Study dialog box
or Teamcenter Manufacturing Access.

6. Search Teamcenter and insert classified or nonclassified resources (items) into the current Process
Simulate session.

7. Search Teamcenter and insert manufacturing features into the current Process Simulate session.

8. Use Process Simulate to begin creating a simulation and validating a process.

See the Process Simulate on Teamcenter documentation.

9. Set the status for briefcase export using the Load Study dialog box.

Starting Process Simulate (connected) from the desktop

Methods to start Process Simulate on Teamcenter

You can start Process Simulate on Teamcenter using three methods:

1. Right-click a process or study in Teamcenter Manufacturing Planner and choose a command such
as Open with Process Simulate . Your database connection from your Teamcenter rich client
session is shared with Process Simulate.

2. From your Windows desktop, start Process Simulate.

10-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. If Teamcenter Manufacturing Access is installed and configured, from your Windows desktop, click

the Process Simulate Standalone - Teamcenter compatible icon.

Start Process Simulate from the desktop

1. From your Windows desktop, click the Process Simulate on Teamcenter icon.

2. Log on to Teamcenter.

After authenticating your Teamcenter login credentials, the Load Study dialog box appears.

The Recent Collaboration Contexts list displays the most recent collaboration contexts you
opened.

3. Locate a study using the Load Study dialog box.

4. Click Load in Standard Mode or Load in Line Simulation Mode to load the study in Process
Simulate.

Create study in Process Simulate

Study Manager overview

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access is developed on top of the Active Workspace platform and is the
technology behind the Process Simulate Study Manager command. This command enables
simulation engineers to perform more of their tasks within Process Simulate and reduces the
dependency on the Teamcenter rich client.

Note:
As of Process Simulate 14.1, the dialog box formerly called Load Study is renamed to Study
Manager.

Simulation engineers can use the Study Manager dialog box to do the following:

• Log on to Teamcenter, search for a collaboration context, and view a list of its studies.

• Set the project on which you are currently working, so you can see the project's related collaboration
contexts and studies.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-3

• Load a study into Process Simulate in standard mode or line simulation mode

• Add or remove a status on a study.

• Create a new study.

Modifying session settings information in Study Manager

As a simulation engineer, you can modify the user name, current project, role and user group under
which you are working in Study Manager before you load a study. Modifying any of these settings
impacts the data that is loaded, and any new data that is created.

Note:
Full functionality for this feature is available with Process Simulate 15.0 or later. If you are running
earlier versions of Process Simulate, you can see settings information, but you cannot change it.

This table provides information about how session settings behave in Study Manager.

If you... Then...

Change session settings in Study Manager Teamcenter Manufacturing Access loads those
settings the next time you start Manufacturing
Process Planner or Process Simulate.

Close Study Manager while working with updated The next time you launch Study Manager, it
session settings displays the last session settings in which you
were working.

Do not have access to a process, project, or plant That data does not display for you in the
collaboration context.

Switch projects, user, or group roles Access to data you can view does not change.
You are able to access only data to which you are
assigned.

Do not have access to studies within a loaded Those studies do not display for you in the
collaboration context collaboration context.

Change your user, group, or role while a study is A message warns you that the current study will
loaded in Process Simulate be unloaded.

10-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

If you... Then...

• Click Yes: Current study is not loaded, and any

unsaved changes are lost

• Click No: The change you intended to make is

canceled, and you can continue working in the
current study

Modify session settings in Process Simulate

The Study Manager dialog box contains a header that lists your session settings (user name, current
project, role, and group). Use this process to modify session settings in Process Simulate.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box header, click a session setting. For example, click the project.

2. Select a different session setting (in this example, a project) from the drop-down list.

• Study Manager refreshes the page with data for the setting you selected.

• When you close this session, the next time you open Study Manager, the session settings you
selected are applied.

Check out studies from Study Manager

You can check out a study before you work on it in Process Simulate. The checkout feature helps you
verify that no one else is editing a study before you load it, and it allows you to lock the data so that no
one else can change it while you work with the study.

Prerequisites

You must set the CO_FOR_EDIT preference value to TRUE. In addition, you must add CO_FOR_EDIT to
the AWC_Startup_preference in the Teamcenter rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

You must have write access to the data you want to edit.

Procedure

1. From the Process Simulate on Teamcenter ribbon, choose File → Study Manager .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-5

2. In Study Manager, select a study and click Checkout

3. In the Checkout dialog box, indicate which study objects you want to check out:

• Include sub-hierarchy—Checks out the study and objects in the first level of the study hierarchy.

• Include assigned Workareas and Resources—Checks out work areas and resources assigned to
the study.

• Clear all checkboxes on the dialog box—Checks out only the study.

Teamcenter Easy Plan checks out the study and any related objects you selected, and locks those
objects to prevent anyone else from changing them. In addition, a lock icon is displayed next to the
study and any related objects that you checked out.

4. (Optional) In Study Manager, hover over a study to determine who has the study checked out.

5. Perform simulation tasks within the study as needed.

6. (Optional) Select the study and click Cancel Checkout.

Teamcenter Easy Plan cancels any changes you made to the study and its related objects, and
releases the locks on each object so other users can access them.

7. Click Check in .

All items within the study are checked in, and the data is unlocked so that other users can access it.

Create a study in Process Simulate

1. From the Process Simulate on Teamcenter ribbon, choose File → Study Manager .

10-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The Study Manager dialog box appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened
in the Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. Select a collaboration context or search for another one.

3. In the Study Manager dialog box, click Create Study .

The Create Study dialog box opens.

4. In the Create Study dialog box, select Isolated Study or Shared Study .

5. Type a name and optional description.

6. Click Create.

The Edit Study Scope page is shown.

You can now add process and plant objects to the study.

Edit a study in Process Simulate

Rename a study

1. In Study Manager dialog box, double-click the study to be renamed.

2. Type the new study name and press Enter.

Edit study content

1. In Study Manager, select the study to be edited.

2. Click Edit Study Scope .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-7

You can now add process and plant objects to the study.

Add process or plant elements to the study

Use this procedure to add process or plant elements to a study. You can add process and plant elements
to the study.

Note:
The ability to add plant elements at a granular level, for example at the station, equipment, and
robot level is in a Beta state. When this ability is fully functional, you can create a study with
specific parts of a station, instead of using the entire station.
These issues will be fully resolved in a future Active Workspace 6.2.x patch release.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box, select the Process or Plant tab.

2. Select a study in the collaboration context, and click Edit Study Scope .

3. In the Search for field, type a partial name for the element and click Search .

Tip:
You can type this wildcard character * for the search.

4. Select an element from the list of matches returned.

5. (Optional) Click Drill in to expand data within the element.

6. Drop an element into the Study Elements area of the dialog box.

The element is added to the Process or Plant tab.

Starting with version 6.2, you can add plant elements at the station, equipment, and robot level.

7. (Optional) You can remove study elements as well.

8. Return to the load study page by clicking Back .

Browse to process and plant elements

Use this procedure to browse to process or plant elements so you can add them to a study.

10-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You can also search for specific elements and quickly add them to a study. See the Add process and
plant elements section of Edit a study in Process Simulate for details.

1. In the Study Manager dialog box, select the Process orPlant tab.

2. In the Process or Plant tab, navigate the structure and locate the element you want to add to the
study. Use the following options to navigate the structure:

Button Action Description

Remove study from Process Simulate

1. From the Process Simulate on Teamcenter ribbon, choose File → Study Manager .

The Study Manager dialog box appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened
in the Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. Select a collaboration context or search for another one.

3. In the Study Manager dialog box, select a study.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-9

4. Click Remove Study and click Remove.

The study is removed from the collaboration context. However, it still exists in the database and
you can reattach it to the collaboration context using the Manufacturing Process Planner.

Open a study using the Study Manager command

1. Locate a study using the Study Manager dialog box.

2. Click Load in Standard Mode or Load in Line Simulation Mode to load the study in Process
Simulate.

Set Study Manager status

Note:
Your administrator must configure which statuses and workflows are used by the command to
apply and remove the status. The Briefcase default is the approved status. However, there is no
default workflow used by the Set Status command.

Example business process

1. After completing the tasks for a milestone, a simulation engineer at a supplier uses the Set Status
command to approve and include a study in the Briefcase export back to the OEM.

2. The data manager at the supplier creates a Briefcase export of all approved studies.

3. The simulation engineer uses the Set Status command to remove the approved status before
working on the next milestone.

10-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Resource Search viewer

Resource Search

Note:
In earlier versions of Process Simulate, this viewer is called Classification Search. Starting in
Process Simulate 14.0, this viewer is called Resource Search. In the documentation, the viewer is
referred to as the Resource Search.

You can use the Resource Search viewer to search for classified resources and add them to a loaded
study in Process Simulate. You can use different sets of attributes a text search to filter search results.
After you load a single resource into Process Simulate, you can drag the resource to the correct location
in the Graphic Viewer. Then, click your mouse to place the resource at that location in the Graphic
Viewer. You can use the Resource Search viewer to search for library classified and general unclassified
resources in Teamcenter and add them to the current study.

Note:
Resource Search is part of the Teamcenter Manufacturing Access application. Teamcenter
Manufacturing Access is based on the Active Workspace platform and provides tools for accessing
and loading data from Teamcenter to Process Simulate.

Open the Resource Search viewer

You can use the Resource Search viewer to locate and filter resources, and insert resources into a study.

1. Open a study (or process) into Process Simulate on Teamcenter.

For more information, see the Process Simulate on Teamcenter documentation.

2. From the Process Simulate ribbon, choose View tab → Screen Layout group → Viewers →
Resource Search.

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access opens the Resource Search viewer.

If you select a parent object in the Resources folder, the object you insert from the Resource
Search is added to the plant structure.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-11

3. Locate a resource to add to the study.

4. Insert the resource into the loaded scope (a process or study).

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access adds the selected item to the current study. You can find it under
the first compound resource listed in the Object Tree (for example, the first station or line).

5. Move the resource you just added into the correct compound resource.

Get a list of desired classified resources

1. Open the Resource Search.

2. (Optional) Navigate a Classification hierarchy to filter the components.

For example, in Resource Search under Classification, select a group such as Manufacturing
Engineering.

After Teamcenter applies the filter, fewer resources are displayed in the right pane.

The Classification grouping shown in Resource Search may be defined as groups, classes, or
abstract classes. For more information, see the Teamcenter Classification Admin documentation.

3. Continue browsing into the Classification subgroups. For example, select Automation, Robotics,
and then Robots.

As you browse the structure Teamcenter applies additional filters to the results.

4. Scroll down the left pane to the bottom of the list to see the Classification attributes for this
Classification grouping.

10-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Classification attributes are only shown for the last Classification grouping (classes). However,
you can still use the search box to search for Classification attributes at other levels (abstract
classes).

5. (Optional) Enter search criteria to limit the results. For example, for Manufacturer select Fanuc.

The resources that are located at this level of the structure and have a Manufacturer of Fanuc are
shown.

Get a list of resources (not limited to classification)

By default, nonclassified resources are not displayed during a regular search because the Resource
Search applies a filter. To search for all resources regardless of classification, you can deselect
Classification in the left pane. Then, Resource Search returns all results, regardless of whether the
objects are classified.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-13

1. Open the Resource Search.

2. Locate a resource to add to the study.

Resources are shown in the right pane.

3. (Optional) In the search box, enter a search string. For example, enter part of the name for an
object, such as wrench.

Several resources are shown in the right pane that begin with wrench.

4. (Optional) In the Refine list, click an attribute such as Owner to filter the results.

5. (Optional) Enter additional search criteria textually.

Searching for objects using object properties

It is easiest to filter the search results using the left pane of the Resource Search dialog box. However,
not all attributes show in this pane.

In addition to performing simple text searches, you can define search criteria to refine the results of
global searches. You can use this technique to search for resources based on any property on the object.
Multiple properties can be specified at once.

The most basic syntax involves specifying the property name, a colon, and its value. Strings with spaces
in them should be inclosed in double quotes and the asterisk is the wild card. For additional advanced
syntax, see the Tips on searching in the Active Workspace documentation.

For example:

1. Open the Resource Search dialog box.

2. (Optional) Filter based on the resource name beginning with wrench by typing wrench in the
search box.

3. (Optional) Filter based on the manufacturer by typing Manufacturer:Acme in the search box.

4. (Optional) Filter based on the owner and application type Owner:me00; "Application
Type":"Material Handling" in the search box.

Insert resources into Process Simulate

You can locate a single resource or multiple resources and insert the resources into Process Simulate.

10-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You must use Process Simulate 14.1.1 or later to select and insert multiple resources into a study
at once. If you use an earlier version of Process Simulate, you can select and insert a single
resource at a time into a study.

1. From the Process Simulate ribbon, choose View tab → Screen Layout group → Viewers →
Resource Search.

2. Search for resources.

In the Resource Search, you can view items or item revisions. However, Process Simulate only adds
item revisions to a work area.

3. In the right pane of the Resource Search, select a single resource or multiple resources.

Tip:
Press and hold Shift to select multiple resources listed next to each other. Press and hold Ctrl
and click each resource to select multiple, non-contiguous resources. A checkmark displays
next to each selected resource.
Click a resource once more to deselect it.

Tip:
You can also select an item from the results list to see a summary of its Teamcenter attributes
and a list of attachments.

Click Search Filters to return to the initial view and perform another search.

4. (Optional) To select all resources your search returned, click the Select All tooltip.

Note:
The Select All tooltip displays after you select multiple resources.

5. Click Open in Process Simulate .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-15

Note:
You must switch to the Graphics Viewer so that you can correctly position resources you
loaded from Process Simulate.

The Graphics Viewer displays a preview of a single, selected resource. If you select multiple
resources, the Graphics Viewer displays the Multiple Objects tooltip when you switch to Process
Simulate.

Manufacturing feature search from Process Simulate

Mfg Search

Note:
The Mfg Search feature will fully align with Active Workspace in a future release. Before you use
the Mfg Search feature on Teamcenter Manufacturing Access, verify that your environment meets
these requirements:

• Process Simulate 16.1 or later is installed in your environment.

• Beginning with Teamcenter Manufacturing Access 6.2, you can only use the
TCMAccessHosting.RAC.URL preference to connect to Teamcenter.
Configure the hosting preference for TCMAccessHosting.RAC.URL and set the value to http://
web_server:port/EasyPlan. For example, for a server named hostname on port 3000, set the
value to http://localhost:3000.

Tip:
If you use the ActiveWorkspaceHosting.PS.URL preference, you cannot connect to NX or
use the MFG Search in Process Simulate. Contact your Teamcenter administrator for help
setting hosting preferences in your environment.

Use the Mfg Search command to search for manufacturing features in Teamcenter, view the

results, and load them in Process Simulate on Teamcenter. This includes spot-welds and arc-welds
(continuous features).

Search for manufacturing features

Use the Search dialog box to locate discrete and continuous joint features that match your search
criteria.

10-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
To search within dynamic in-process assemblies (DIPAs), the data you search for must be part of an
operation.

1. In Process Simulate, select a standard operation.

Note:
Compound operations are not supported.

2. From the Server tab, in the Scope group, click MFG Search .

The MFG Search dialog box is displayed with the Search tab active.

3. In the structure to be searched, select and add parts, operations, or stations to the Connected to
Parts group.

This step may take some time, depending on the number of manufacturing features included in the
search.

Note:
• If you do not specify anything, your search returns every MFG in the structure that matches
your criteria (Unassigned MFGs, Assigned MFGs, or Both).
For example, if you load a study into Study Manager that contains a process station with
consumed parts, and then use the MFG Search dialog box to search for Unassigned
MFGs, your search returns all objects that are connected to consumed parts in the process
station, even though you did not specify an object in the dialog box.

• For isolated studies, you can add only operations to the search. You cannot add parts.

The Object list displays the objects you added. Teamcenter Manufacturing Access searches within
the listed objects (process lines, process stations, operations, or parts) for manufacturing features
that match your search criteria.

4. (Optional) Select the Include Dynamic In Process Assembly (DIPA) check box to also search inside
dynamic assemblies assigned to the selected processes or operations.

5. For Connected to, select one of the following:

• Any of the selected parts—Returns any manufacturing feature connected to any of the selected
parts (similar to an OR operation).

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-17

• Exact match-connected only to the selected part—Returns only those manufacturing features
connected to all the selected parts (similar to an AND operation).

Note:
A manufacturing feature is not returned when a manufacturing feature is connected to all
the selected parts and an additional part that is not in the Objects list.

6. To filter search results, in the Manufacturing Type group, select a Class.

• To search for discrete features, select Discrete.

• To search for continuous joint features, select Continuous.

7. (Optional) To filter search results within a feature class, select a Type.

• Results in the Discrete Features class are filtered by weld type.

• Results in the Continuous Joint Features class are filtered by process.

Note:
If you do not select a type, the search returns all results in the class.

8. (Optional) In the Assigned to Operation group, select whether to search for Unassigned
Features, Assigned Features, or Both (the default setting).

9. Click Search.

The Results tab is displayed.

Remove an object from a search

1. In the CONNECTED TO PARTS group, hover over the object.

2. Click Delete .

Teamcenter Manufacturing Access removes the object from the object list, and no longer includes it
in your search.

Assign weld features from a Process Simulate MFG search

Use the Select All and Insert Feature commands in Process Simulate to quickly select all welds in the
Mfg Search dialog box.

10-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
Alternatively, you can select multiple elements in the dialog box by clicking Selection mode
and then selecting objects without pressing your Shift or Ctrl key.

1. In Process Simulate for Teamcenter, on the Server tab, organize your structure using commands
in the Scope group. In addition to the operation to which you want to assign weld features, your
structure might contain:

• Loaded parts that contain relations to welds.

• Process stations.

Tip:
When you search for a process station, the query considers welds that are related to
all consumed parts in that station. When you search for a process station with dynamic
in-process assemblies (DIPAs), you can consider not only the welds that are related to all
consumed parts, but also the DIPA calculated to the station.

2. Create or select the operation to which you want to assign weld features.

Note:
Compound operations are not supported.

3. From the Process Simulate ribbon, click MFG Search .

The MFG Search dialog box is displayed with the Search tab active. The operation that you
previously selected is displayed in the search title (for example, MFG Search - weldOp1).

4. In the structure you created in step 1, select parts, operations, or stations, and in the Connected to
Parts group in the MFG Search dialog box, click Add.

5. (Optional) Select the Include Dynamic In Process Assembly (DIPA) check box to search inside
dynamic assemblies.

6. From the Connected to list, select one of the following:

• Any of the selected parts to include welds that are connected to parts but are not consumed in
a station or DIPA.

• Exact match to include only those manufacturing features connected to consumed parts.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-19

Example:
If three parts exist with weld features that connect them (Part1, Part2, Part3), and the
structure only consumes two of those parts (Part1 and Part2), Exact Match returns only
welds from those two parts. Selecting Any of the selected parts returns welds from all three
parts.

7. To filter search results, in the Manufacturing Type group, select a Class.

• To search for discrete features, select Discrete.

• To search for continuous joint features, select Continuous.

8. (Optional) To filter search results within a feature class, select a Type.

• Results in the Discrete Features class are filtered by weld type.

• Results in the Continuous Joint Features class are filtered by process.

Note:
If you do not select a type, the search returns all results in the class selected in step 7.

9. (Optional) In the Assigned to Operation group, select Unassigned Features to detect unassigned
welds.

10. Click Search.

The listed objects (process lines, process stations, operations, or parts) for manufacturing features
that match your search criteria are displayed.

11. Click Select All .

All search results are highlighted in the results list.

Note:
To deselect all results, click Deselect All . You can also remove any unwanted objects from
the list by deselecting them.

12. Click Insert Feature .

The weld features are added to the selected operation in Process Simulate.

13. Click Close to close the dialog box.

10-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Add manufacturing features from the search results to a study

1. Search for manufacturing features in Process Simulate using the Search tab of the MFG Search
dialog box.

The Results tab is displayed.

Note:
Features listed in bold text on the Results tab already exist in the current study.

2. (Optional) Click any table column header to sort data in ascending or descending order.

3. (Optional) Select a manufacturing feature to preview.

Note:
Selected manufacturing features are synchronized with Process Simulate and display in its
graphic viewer. Process Simulate displays selected manufacturing features as blue cubes in
the graphic viewer.
When you select a manufacturing feature, it is only previewed in the study. Process Simulate
does not add the manufacturing feature to the study.

4. (Optional) To preview multiple manufacturing features at once, perform one of the following
actions:

• Press the Shift key to select multiple, adjacent manufacturing features and click Show .

• Press the Ctrl key to select multiple manufacturing features and click Show .

5. (Optional) To hide a manufacturing feature that you do not need to see in the graphic viewer,
right-click the feature and select Blank.

6. (Optional) To add manufacturing features into the Process Simulate study, select one or more
features and click Insert Feature .

7. Click Close to close the dialog box.

Configure columns for features search results

You can configure the MFG Search results table to control the properties of features that are displayed.

1. Search for manufacturing features using the Search tab of the MFG Search dialog box.

The Results tab is displayed.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-21

2. Click Table Columns .

The Columns Selector dialog box contains Available Fields and Table Fields columns. The
Available Fields column lists fields you can add to the table. The Table Fields column lists fields
that are currently in the table.

3. (Optional) To remove data from the table, select and move items to the Available Fields list.

To add data to the table, select and move items to the Table Fields list.

4. (Optional) To change the order of data on the table, drag items on the Table Fields list to a new
location in the list.

Load study

Locate a study using Study Manager

In Process Simulate, simulation engineers use the Study Manager command to search for and
load studies in a particular collaboration context object. When using this command, it is not necessary to
search for structures in the Teamcenter rich client and send them to Process Simulate.

10-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
If you want to be able to use a study in the Study Manager view or the Study Manager dialog
box, you must create the studies in Study Manager. Any studies created using the legacy New
Study command must be converted before they can use used.

Note:
For detailed information on collaboration contexts, see the Tecnomatix Collaboration Context
Reference Manual.

View studies in using Study Manager

1. From the Process Simulate on Teamcenter ribbon, choose File → Study Manager .

The Study Manager dialog box appears, listing the most recent collaboration contexts you opened
in the Recent Collaboration Contexts list.

2. (Optional) In the Search More Collaboration Context box, type a search string to search for a
collaboration context.

3. Select a collaboration context object in the list in the left pane.

All studies associated to the collaboration context are displayed in the right pane.

The study properties are displayed in columns, for example, Name, Owner, Description. The
object type is also shown.

• Shared study

In the Study Manager, a shared study uses this icon . Changing the process in the study
affects the original process in the process structure.

• Isolated study

In the Study Manager, an isolated study uses this icon . Changing the process in the study
does not affect the original process in the process structure.

4. Select a study in the right pane.

(Optional) View the study properties

1. View studies in the Study Manager dialog box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-23

2. In the Study Manager dialog box, click Table Columns and choose Select Columns.

The Columns Selector dialog box is shown.

3. By default, 17 properties of a study revision are shown in the Available Fields list.

You can enter part of the name of the column you wish to display in the Filter to find it easily.

The contents of the Available Fields list can be configured by your administrator. See the
Teamcenter Manufacturing Access Deployment documentation for details.

4. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the left and click Add .

For example you could add Release Status and Is Approved.

5. (Optional) Select the properties to add from the list on the right and click Remove .

6. (Optional) Drag the properties on the right to change the order of the columns.

7. Click OK.

The new properties are displayed in the table.

(Optional) Sort and organize table columns

1. View studies in the Study Manager dialog box.

2. (Optional) To reorder the columns: In the Study Manager dialog box, drag a column header and
place it in between two others.

For example, drag the Description column to the left of the Object column.

3. (Optional) To sort the studies by a property: In the Study Manager dialog box, click a column
header.

For example, sort by the Object column.

(Optional) Filter the list of studies by name

1. View studies in the Study Manager dialog box.

10-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. In the Study Manager dialog box, type part or all of a study name in the Search box.

For example, type sh.

Note:
You cannot use wildcards (*) in your search (for example, Isolate*).

3. Press Enter or click Search .

A subset of studies are shown.

All studies with names that begin with sh are displayed and all other studies are hidden. The search
string is highlighted in yellow in the study name and description.

(Optional) Filter the list of studies using a study property

1. View studies in the Study Manager dialog box.

2. In the Study Manager dialog box, click the down arrow to the right of the Search box, choose an
object property.

For example, you could select Owner.

3. Enter a value, and press Enter.

For example for Owner, type either the user's name or ID in the parenthesis.

You can add additional properties to the search string, for example, Name(me00),
Description(Big). You can also type the search string manually.

Note:
Your administrator can add custom fields to this list using Business Modeler IDE and then
adding them to the required preference described in the Teamcenter Easy Plan Deployment
documentation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 10-25

10-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Authoring a process plan without work instructions

Author a container in the product BOP

You can create a container to hold high-level structures within the product bill of process (BOP).

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to author a process and expand the assembly.

3. In the Process panel, select the object under which you want to add the container and click Create
Container .

4. Type in a Name and click Create.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the new container.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan adds the new child as the last object in the substructure under which
you added it.

5. (Optional) Select an object from the Assembly or the Process panel and click Open , then
select a page from the menu.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-1

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the planning page to the same scope level in which you are working.

Author a process without work instructions

If you do not author work instructions, perform this task to create a process.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to author a process and expand the assembly.

3. In the Process panel, select the object under which you want to add the process.

4. In the process toolbar, click More → Create .

5. Type in a Name and click Create.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the new process and associates the process to the assembly to which
you navigated.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan adds the new child as the last object in the substructure under which
you added it.

6. (Optional) Select an object from the Assembly or the Process panel and click Open , then
select a page from the menu.

11-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the structure at the same scope level in which you are working.

Tip:
To delete a process or an operation, select the object you want to delete, and click More →
Delete . When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click Delete again.

Author an operation without work instructions

If you do not author work instructions, perform this task to create an operation.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to author an operation and expand the assembly.

3. In the Process panel, select the object under which you want to add the operation.

4. In the process toolbar, click More → Create .

5. In the Create Operation dialog box, select the type of operation to be created.

6. Type in a Name and click Create.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the new operation and associates the operation to the assembly to
which you navigated.

Note:
Teamcenter Easy Plan adds the new child as the last object in the substructure under which
you added it.

7. (Optional) Select an object from the Assembly or the Process panel and click Open , then select
a page from the menu.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-3

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the structure at the same scope level in which you are working.

Tip:
To delete a process or an operation, select the object you want to delete, and click More →
Delete . When the confirmation dialog is displayed, click Delete again.

Assign parts to an operation without work instructions

If you do not author work instructions, perform this task to create a assign parts to an operation.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to assign parts to an operation.

3. In the Process panel expand the structure and select the operation.

4. In the Assembly panel select one part or several parts and drag them to the Parts tab below the
Process panel.

11-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:
To remove an assigned part from an operation, select the operation in the Process panel. In the
Parts tab select the part and click Remove .

Clone a process without work instructions

If you do not author work instructions, perform this task to clone a process.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to clone a process and expand the assembly.

3. In the Process panel, select the process that you want to clone.

Note:
You must select a process and an assembly to enable clone feature. If you select a different
object, for example, a container, the clone feature is disabled.

4. In the Assembly panel, select an assembly to associate to the cloned process and click Clone.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a confirmation dialog box to verify that you selected the correct
target assembly and process.

5. Click Continue to clone the process.

Teamcenter Easy Plan clones the selected process.

The cloned process is added to the structure as a sibling of the original process, and the cloned
process is associated to the selected target assembly.

6. (Optional) Select the target assembly and click Open , and then select Process Planning.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-5

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the Process Planning page for the target assembly that is associated
to the cloned operation.

Attachments

Attachment types

You work with two types of attachments in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO:

• Attachments are non-managed documents, because they follow the life cycle of the object to which
they are attached. You use the Information tab to add attachments.

• Managed documents, or reference documents, have their own life cycle. You use the Documents tab
to add managed documents.

Manage attachments

You may want to add attachments to your process plan. For example, you may add images to show how
an operation is performed, or documents that provide background information about the operation.

You can also delete, view, and download attachments.

Note:
You can also add and remove file attachments in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner. See
the Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner documentation for more information.

1. In Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO, navigate to the plant bill of process (BOP).

2. On the Planning tab, select a child object.

11-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

For example on the process station page, select an operation in the Operations section.

3. Select the Information subtab.

4. Click Attach File , and then click Browse.

5. In the dialog box, select the file and click Open.

6. (Optional) Type a name and a description.

If the file type is not automatically detected, from the Type list, select a supported type.

7. From the Relation list, select the document's relation to the object (for example, part or process
element).

8. Click Done.

The attachment loads and is selected on the Information tab.

Delete an attachment

1. Select the attachment and click Delete .

2. At the prompt, click Delete.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-7

View an attachment

If viewing is supported for the file type, do the following:

1. Click Large Preview .

The attachment opens in a new page.

2. Review the attachment and when finished, in the upper-right corner, click .

Download an attachment

1. Select the attachment and click Download .

2. At the prompt, click Open or Save.

View summary information about attachments

1. Navigate to the plant bill of process (BOP).

2. On the Planning tab, select a child object.

For example on the process station page, select an operation in the Operations section.

3. Select the Information subtab.

4. In the pane to the left, select a file (dataset) from the list of Attachments.

Add reference documents to Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO

You add reference documents to an object so that they can be attached to operations. You use reference
documents for any files that require a separate life cycle.

Note:
From a Teamcenter perspective a reference document is an item type, not a dataset.

Documents may contain requirements, change notices, design information, descriptions, reports,
procedures, or other content, depending on your industry and system configuration.

1. Choose Home from the global navigation bar.

2. Click the Create Document tile.

11-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. In the Add panel, type a Name.

4. (Optional) Type meta data in the following fields:

• Description

• Document Title

• Document Author

• Document Subject

5. (Optional) In the Workflow field, click the drop-down arrow and select a template.

6. Under File Attachments drop a file.

You can also click Choose file and navigate to the file you want to upload into Process Planning for
BTO/BTS/CTO.

7. (Optional) Under Projects, click Add Project, then search for and select the owning project to
assign to the document.

8. Click Close.

Assign reference documents

You can assign reference documents to operations.

1. Search and open a document, or navigate to the Home folder.

2. In the Home folder, select one document, or use the Ctrl key to select multiple documents.

3. Click Copy .

4. Search and open or navigate to a process station.

The process station page is displayed.

5. Click the Planning tab.

6. Select an operation.

7. Click the Documents subtab.

8. Click Paste .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-9

The document is assigned to the operation.

View reference documents

You can view the contents of reference documents in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

1. Search and open or navigate to a reference document on an operation.

The process station page is displayed.

2. For an operation, click the Planning tab and select an operation.

3. Click the Documents subtab on the right.

4. On the subtab, hover over the document and click Open .

5. Click the Viewer tab to view the file contents.

Plan processes by adding security markings

During process planning, you might work with sensitive data that should be handled with caution.
For example, the data might contain proprietary or classified information. Teamcenter Easy Plan allows
design engineers to add a security marking to sensitive data. The security marking acts as a prompt,
reminding you to be cautious before you display the data. Security markings are displayed only once per
session and work package, regardless of the Teamcenter Easy Plan product in which the part containing
sensitive data is opened/

Note:
• You must acknowledge the warning message before Teamcenter Easy Plan will display data with
a security mark.

• If you open the part in a different work package or a different work session, you are still
prompted to provide a security marking acknowledgment.

1. Search for and open an existing work package that contains processes and operations, navigate
to an appropriate planning task, and expand the process structure.

2. Select an operation within a process.

3. Select an object in the Parts tab below the process panel.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a dialog box that states the data you selected contains a security
marking.

4. Click I acknowledge the marking to view the marked data.

11-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Work instructions authoring

Getting started with work instructions

Author work instructions

You can author work instructions at the station level within Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO.

1. Navigate to the plant bill of process (BOP).

2. Open a process area or process line.

3. Open the process station.

4. Click the Work Instructions tab.

5. Expand the station in the Process list, and select an operation.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO automatically selects parts and subitems related to the
operation.

Note:
You can author work instructions in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO or Process Planning for ETO.
However, you must use Process Planning for ETO for any planning tasks.
For detailed information about creating work instructions, see the Process Planning for ETO
documentation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-11

Your Home page

Your home page may look different than the example above.

– Takes you back to the previous screen.

– Takes you to the Home page.

– Takes you to your mailbox and current work.

– Displays tasks assigned to you.

– Contains the list of objects that you marked as your favorites.

– Contains a list of available change objects.

Global search, including access to prefilters and Advanced Search. In this section, the
revision status of the current view (in this case Latest Working) is displayed.

Work area.

11-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The tiles on the work area allow you to perform many tasks, such as access to your
Home folder and saved searches. If there are more tiles than fit the screen, you can
scroll vertically to view them.

– Allows you to change the theme of the interface and to show or hide
button labels.

– Displays online help or Active Workspace version information.

– Displays:

• Your current project, group, and role.

• The current revision rule setting.

• The current change context setting.

Also provides access to display and profile settings and allows you to sign out of
Electronic Work Instructions. To log off from Teamcenter, click Sign Out.

Electronic Work Instructions user interface

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-13

Note:
This graphic displays the default Electronic Work Instructions user interface. Your user interface
may look different as your administrator can configure many aspects of it.

Selected work package or process

View the work package or process that is currently selected and whose work
instruction information and associated documents you see in the different panes.
You can also move between parent and child processes or operations using the bread
crumb trail.

Note:
Your administrator can:

• Specify which item types are used as a navigation structure in the

EWI_NavigationStructure preference.

• Hide the bread crumb using the EWI_HiddenComponents preference.

• Configure which object properties are displayed in the following preferences:

EWI_package_header_cc_properties
EWI_package_header_process_properties
EWI_package_header_product_properties
EWI_package_header_plant_properties

• Hide the header using the EWI_HiddenComponents preference.

Instructions pane
View a work instruction attached to a selected process or operation in the
Instructions pane.
Your administrator can define the properties or relations that appear in the
Instructions pane in the EWI_InstructionRelationsInfo preference.
Your administrator can specify different layouts using the EWI_Layout preference and
also configure which tabs are visible using the following preferences:

EWI_SinglePanelLayout
EWI_TwoPanelLayout
EWI_ThreePanelLayout

Gallery viewer
Display 3D product views and images in the Viewer pane.

11-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

View mandatory documents associated with the selected process or operation in the
Documents pane, if available.
View optional documents that support the selected process or operation in the
References pane.
View movies associated with the selected process or operation in the Animations
pane.
View individual activities that support the selected process or operation in the
Activities pane.

Note:
If there are no items of a specific type, the tab for that type of item is not
displayed. For example, if no animations are attached, you do not see an
Animation pane.

Your administrator can configure which objects are loaded in the following
preferences:

EWI_ImageRelationsInfo
EWI_AnimationRelationsInfo
EWI_DocumentRelationsInfo
EWI_ReferenceDocumentRelationsInfo

Parts and Tools panes

Display parts consumed and tools used by a step.
Your administrator can configure what is shown in these panes.

Navigation buttons
Move through the work package steps.
Your administrator can hide the navigation buttons using the
EWI_HiddenComponents preference.

Authoring work instructions

Work Instructions Authoring page

Use the Work Instructions Authoring page to review and add to your assembly plan, to enrich text
and graphical work instructions for workers on the shop floor, and to capture 2D images from linked 3D
geometry as well as product views from Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization. The page is similar to the
Process Planning page, but offers enhanced capabilities for use in a manufacturing environment.

To access the Work Instructions Authoring page, see Navigate to work package planning tasks.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-15

The Work Instructions Authoring page header lets you jump to:

• Another work package planning task. Click the tile or text, and then select the task
from the resulting list.

• The work package page, from which you can navigate to primary work package planning
tasks. Select the work package icon .

The last two sections in the Work Instructions Authoring page header display the work
package's root assembly and process (in this example, LGear_upper_gear_support and p),
that appear in the Assembly and Process tabs.

For more information on these tabs, see below.

11-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The Work Instructions Authoring work space toolbar lets you:

• Enable the Show Consumption and Impact State to:

• Locate processes, operations, and product reviews affected by change notices

• Verify MBOM consumption of many parts

• Review missing-in-source PMI information

• Use the toolbar with Assembly and Process tab selections to perform various tasks. For
more details, see:

• Improve time management information in operations

• Check data in and out

• Run process data validation checks

• Configure work structures

The configuration header lets you review the data configuration for each structure in your
work package.
Using the Assembly and Process tabs. You can select key part, assembly, and process
elements to work in the remaining authoring panels.

Note:
Depending on your structure configuration, other tabs may also be available from this
panel.

• The Assembly tab contains the manufacturing bill of management (MBOM) structure.
This tab is similar to the Assembly panel in the Process Planning page. The Assembly
tab and the PMI Assembly Level tab are synchronized so that selecting an object in the
assembly structure displays related product manufacturing information (PMI) in the PMI
structure. You can review the MBOM hierarchy and define the BOP skeleton accordingly, as
well as perform additional tasks such as:

• Pack and unpack an assembly

• Unpack parts consumed to an operation

• Verify MBOM consumption of many parts

• Manage multiple occurrence effectivities

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-17

• The Process tab contains objects that define the manufacturing process: a list of processes
made up of one or more operations that you link to components needed to complete
those operations, such as parts, assemblies, tools, and resources. The Process tab and the
Editor tab are synchronized so that selecting an operation in the process structure selects
the same operation in the editor, and vice versa. You can review the process hierarchy and
define the process skeleton accordingly, as well as perform additional tasks such as:

• Edit object properties in Microsoft Excel

• Regenerate object find number values

• Resequence or move operations

• Submit objects to a workflow

• Preview a process plan in Electronic Work Instructions

• Assign an operation to a work area

Using the Editor and PMI Assembly Level tabs, you can author work instructions and
review, assign, and visualize PMI information on key part, assembly, and process elements
that you select in the Assembly and Process panels.

• Use the Editor tab to add and edit textual work instructions to processes and operations
selected in the Process tab. You can automatically add part, process, and image names
using textual markers to increase text consistency and quality.

From each operation section on the panel, you can:

• Add or delete an operation in work instructions

• Clone processes and operations

• Set occurrence effectivity on a process or operation

• Use the PMI Assembly Level tab to review, display, and consume PMI, such as linear
dimensions and Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerancing (GD&T), assigned to parts and
assemblies in the Assembly tab.

For more information, see PMI.

The information panel synchronizes with a selected process or operation in the Process tab.
You can drag parts from the Assembly tab to the Parts tab to assign them to the selected
process or operation.

• Parts tab. You can perform many of the same tasks as those available from the Assembly
tab, plus:

11-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Set occurrence effectivity on a process or operation

• Find consumed operations from an assembly

• Find a consumed part that is out of scope

• Find a consumed part that is within the current scope

• Locate processes, operations, and product reviews affected by change notices

• View and analyze consumption status data

• Resources tab. You can assign classified resources to the selected process or operation.

• Work Area tab. You can assign or remove the selected process or operation to or from a
work area as described in Assign an operation to a work area.

• Summary tab. You can view and edit process or operation properties such as item
description and find number.

• Files tab. You can attach, remove, download, and replace files to the selected process
or operation. You can also share files to Share.

• Documents tab. You can view web links in an operation outside of Process Planning for
ETO.

• PMI tab. Work with PMI information assigned to the selected process or operation in much
the same way as you work with parts assigned to the same elements in the Part tab. From
the PMI tab, you can also:

• Assign or unassign PMI objects to a BOP

• Examine detailed PMI part information views

• Review missing-in-source PMI information

The Viewer panel lets you visualize 3D elements in the Work Instructions Authoring work
space.
You can hide, show, and manipulate 3D graphics, as well as capture 2D images and product
views in Visuals panel for use with operations authoring.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-19

Navigating the Work Instructions Authoring page

Note:
You cannot insert images into the Editor panel of the Work Instructions tab.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, or create a work
package, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Work Instructions page, populate the Viewer panel as described in Interact with the Work
Instructions Authoring page.

The upper-left panel displays an Assembly tab that consists of parts and assemblies, as well as
a Process panel that displays child operations and processes. Clicking objects on the Process tab
shows consumed parts and assigned resources in the Parts tab of the middle-bottom panel.

The Editor tab in the upper-middle panel is populated with work instructions for the loaded process
and its process planning objects: child operations and processes. It displays the name of the process
or operation before each work instruction section, as well as highlighted gray authoring tips if no
work instructions exist yet. You can scroll down in the Editor panel to display child processes and
operations.

Note:
If you edit a section to add additional instructions to a process or operation, the scroll area
increases.

3. Write the work instructions for the selected process or operation. You can use the tools in the
Editor panel to:

• Create numbered steps or billeted lists, indent or outdent paragraphs, and specify text
alignment.

• Create work instructions that contain bidirectional text. For example, you can create one set of
work instructions that contains text in Hebrew and English.

• Create tables into which you can insert text and symbols.

• Find and replace text with matching text, including whole words and cyclic patterns of text,
except in text created using the [[ and {{ characters (see tip below).

• Specify the font, font size, and paragraph format of your text (default = Normal).

• Boldface, italicize, underline, and change the color of text as well as the background color, copy
text formatting, and add special characters.

11-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Add symbols to indicate work situations such as prerequisites, safety precautions, or dangerous
materials.

4. Type one of the following shortcut options to locate and add the correct parts and resources for a
work instruction.

Tip:
• As you start typing in the field, part and resource names based on the loaded assembly in
the process plan are filtered.

• Press the down arrow to select the preferred part or resource part of the name or ID to
filter the list until a unique selection is displayed, and then press Enter.

• Type [[ to select from a list of parts and resources that are assigned to the selected process or
operation:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-21

• Type {{ to display a list of visuals assigned to the selected process or operation:

• Type \\ to display a list of standard work instructions that you can apply to the selected process or
operation. You can also enter text to refine the results.

Note:
Manually typing part, resource, and visual names or IDs can lead to mistakes. Use the [[ and
{{ characters to reduce such mistakes.
You can insert a part, resource, or visual name, but you cannot edit it. To delete a name,
place your cursor after the name and press the Back key.

When you select the part, resource, or visual, the part or resource name is displayed and the
shortcut characters are removed from the text. When you specify a visual, the text "as seen in:"
precedes the visual name.

11-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. (Optional) Click Maximize Horizontally to expand the Editor panel; click Restore Horizontally
to collapse the Editor panel and restore the Viewer panel..

6. (Optional) Add symbols to indicate work situations such as prerequisites to an activity, safety
precautions, or dangerous materials by doing the following.

a. Click Insert Symbol and navigate to the custom symbol file you want to add to the note.

b. In the Open dialog box, navigate to the symbol file you want to upload, select the file, and
then click Open.

The image appears in the work instruction.

Note:
Symbol file height cannot be greater than 132 pixels. If you add a higher-resolution
image, both the height and the width of the image are resized.

c. To delete a symbol, in the Editor tab, select it, and then press Delete.

7. Click Save .

Note:
If you save a new or update an existing work instruction for an object with a status of
Released, Teamcenter Easy Plan will suggest that a new item revision be created. If you
accept, Teamcenter Easy Plan will create a new revision and save the work instruction. If you
cancel, no new revision is created and the changes to the work instruction are discarded.

Save a work instruction

You can create work instructions for specific objects including parts, operations, product views, and
assemblies. If the object has a status of Released and you save a work instruction, Process Planning for
ETO automatically prompts you to create a new item revision.

Note:
You must create a new item revision if an object is statused as Released before you can save the
work instruction.

You have two options when you save a work instruction for a Released object:

• Yes, Revise—Teamcenter Easy Plan creates a new item revision number for the object and the work
instructions.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-23

• Cancel—Teamcenter Easy Plan does not create a new item revision number and allows you to discard
the work instruction you created.

Interact with the Work Instructions Authoring page

The Work Instructions Authoring page shows process content relevant to one worker in one shift. It
does not display or navigate an entire process plan.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, or create a work
package and then navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

By default, parts are displayed in the Assembly tab of the upper-left panel but nothing is visible in
the Viewer panel.

2. To visualize:

• Parts and assemblies in the Viewer panel, in the Assembly tab of the upper-left panel, click .

The icon changes to show the part or assembly in the Viewer panel.

Note:
Click again to hide a part or assembly.

• Parts and assemblies with assigned processes and operations in the Viewer panel, in the Process
tab of the upper-left panel, click .

The icon changes to show associated parts or assemblies in the Viewer panel.

Note:
Click again to hide parts or assemblies associated with the process or operation.

Visual parts and assemblies in the Assembly tab, or visual parts assigned to selected
processes and operations in the Process tab, are displayed in the Viewer panel.

11-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
• Displaying additional data in the graphic viewer may cause the viewer to zoom out. Click
to fit all shown parts and assemblies to the view.

• If a line does not contain visual data to render, Process Planning for ETO will display a
message.

3. Drag the 3D model to rotate and inspect it in the Viewer panel; use your mouse wheel to zoom in
and out, and press your middle and right mouse buttons to pan. If you do not have a middle mouse
button, press your scroll button and right button to pan.

Note:
You can also use the Rotate , Zoom , and Pan buttons in the Viewer toolbar.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-25

4. To blank or hide content in the 3D viewer, click Hide All →Hide All.

Note:
You can also show or hide PMI information in the Viewer panel.

5. To add product information, an object note, or a free note to a part in the Viewer, select the part,
click , and do one of the following:

• To display part number, revision, and part name, click Add Object Information.

The Viewer displays object information attached to the selected part.

• To create a object note containing general information about a part or resource, click Add
Object Note. In the Create Note dialog box, type the required information, and then click Done.

• To create a free-style note, click Add free note, and in the Create Note dialog box, type the
required information, and then click Done.

Note:
You can also add a symbol to a free-style note, or use the Preset list to add text styles to a
selected line in the note.
You must define the styling presets with the WI_SavedPresets preference before you
can use preset styles. See Configuring Process Planning for ETO in the EasyPlan 2.11
Deployment for information about defining this preference.

11-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You can also add a symbol to a free-style note, or use the Preset list to add text styles to a
selected line in the note.

• (Optional) Change the font, font size, and text color in the Create Note dialog box.

Note:
• As needed, select the text and use text styles to emphasize a certain situation to workers
on the shop floor, such as a red color to indicate a hazardous or dangerous step, or a
gray color to indicate reference geometry.

• If you receive a message box stating that the operation needs to revised because of a
revision change, click Yes, Revise or Cancel.

• You can remove a label or note at any time by selecting the object and clicking Delete
object information .

• To edit text after it has been created, in the Viewer, double-click the note.

6. To change the color and transparency of a part in the Viewer, select the part and click Highlight
Part .

7. In the Highlight Part dialog box, select a color. To change the transparency of the part so that you
can see parts behind it, drag the Set Transparency slider to the appropriate percentage.

8. Click Apply.

To remove transparency and return to the original color, select the part, open the Highlight Part
dialog box again, and click Reset.

9. To see the color and transparency, deselect the part by clicking outside the assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-27

Authoring a process plan with work instructions

Preview a process plan in Electronic Work Instructions

While authoring work instructions, you can preview the process plan and operations in Electronic Work
Instructions, to visualize the plan on the shop floor.

Note:
Before you can use this feature, your Teamcenter administrator must install and configure
Electronic Work Instructions.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring
page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, expand the structure and select an operation.

Note:
Select a single operation. Multiple operation selection is not supported.

3. Click Show Menu → View in EWI .

11-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Electronic Work Instructions opens directly to the process and operation that you are viewing. You do not
need to locate the correct work package, or navigate through the bill of process (BOP) to see the data.

Create and remove DCDs from processes and operations

Create and remove data collection definitions (DCDs) to processes and operations to better define your
inspection plan.

Note:
• The purpose of DCDs is to collect operational production data that is associated with production
equipment and processes on the shop floor.

• You can add DCDs by creating them yourself, importing them from CAD applications to
operations, or defining them in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner (MPP).

• DCDs that you create share the same behaviors as those generated in MPP.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, or create a new
work package, and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Process tab or panel, select the process, operation, compound operation, or execution step
for which you want to add or remove DCDs.

3. In the information panel, select the DCDs tab.

The DCDs tab contains any DCDs previously created for the selected process, operation, compound
operation, or execution step.

4. If you need to remove one or more DCDs, press Ctrl and select the DCDs to be removed in the list,
and in the DCDs tab toolbar, click Remove DCD .

When you select Yes to the prompt verifying that you want to remove the DCDs, the selected DCDs
are removed.

5. If you need to create DCDs, in the DCDs tab toolbar, click Create DCD .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-29

The Create DCD dialog box is displayed.

6. In the Create DCD dialog box, select the type of data collection definition (DCD) you want to
create.

You can choose from:

• Boolean

• Integer (whole number)

• String

• Duration

• Buyoff

• Time Stamp

• Real Number (can include fractions)

• User Defined LOV (list of values)

• Procedure Completion

7. In the String Data Collection dialog box, type a unique name, and add any properties required for
the DCD type you are creating.

8. Do one of the following.

• To create the DCD and define another DCD type, click Create & Add More.

• To create a single DCD, click Create.

9. In the list on the DCDs tab in the information panel, review the properties you defined in step 7.

10. (Optional) Scroll to the Value column and type a value relevant to the DTD type.

Planning processes

Plan processes while you write work instructions

You can create a process plan while you write work instructions. You can start in Teamcenter Easy Plan
within the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), create a process linked to an assembly, and then
consume parts to an operation at the assembly level.

11-30 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You can add a new work instruction or edit an existing work instruction within an assembly. This
example demonstrates adding a new process and a new work instruction.

1. Open a work package.

2. Under the Planning tab, and under the Product subtab, drill into the assembly and select the
subassembly you want to work with from the list.

3. Click Open Work Instructions , and then select New Work Instructions.

4. In the Create New Process dialog box, select a process type and click Next.

5. In the Name box, type a process name, and click Create.

Note:
Process Planning for ETO creates a process and loads it to the Work Instructions page.
Process Planning for ETO connects the new process to the subassembly exactly as if you used
the associate product as target command in Manufacturing Process Planner.

6. Click Open Work Instructions and select the process that you just created.

The new process is loaded, and it is connected to the subassembly that you selected. The Work
Instructions tab is active.

Note:
Alternately, you can create a new work instruction or load an existing work instruction from
the New Work Instructions menu.

7. Under the Assembly subtab, expand the subassembly.

Parts for the subassembly are available for consumption.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-31

8. In the Editor, select the new process, click More , and select Add New Step.

Note:
• If you add a new step at the process level, Process Planning for ETO creates the operation
as the last step in the process.

• If you add a new step at the operation level, Process Planning for ETO creates the new
operation directly after the current operation.

9. Select an operation type, and click Next.

10. In the Name box, type in an operation name, and click Create.

The operation is created and added to the process.

11. Author work instructions for the operation.

Note:
You cannot add images to the Editor panel of the Work Instructions tab.

12. (Optional) Consume parts to the operation.

11-32 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Clone processes and operations

If you have authored a process or operation, you can use that process or operation as a template to
create a new process.

Note:
When you clone a process, Teamcenter settings determine whether consumed parts and assigned
resources are copied to the new process. Contact your Teamcenter administrator with questions
about cloning rules in your environment.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning
page.

2. Do one of the following.

• If you are on the Work Instructions Authoring page, do the following.

a. In the Process tab or panel, select a process or operation.

b. In the Editor tab, next to the process or operation name you just selected, click More →
Add Clone .

• If you are on the Process Planning page, in the Process panel, select the process or operation
beneath which you want to create the clone and click More → Add Clone .

3. In the Add Clone dialog box, in the search box, search for the process or operation that you want
to clone.

4. From the results list, select a process or operation.

5. (Optional) Click Revision Rule, and select an option from the list.

Note:
The default revision rule is Latest Working.

6. Click Clone.

If you are on the Work Instructions Authoring page, the cloned process or operation appears at
the bottom of the Editor tab and the Process tab.

If you are on the Process Planning page, the cloned process or operation is and added to the
structure beneath the process or operation you selected in step 2.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-33

Tip:
If cloning rules in your environment copy all objects associated with a process, objects
associated with the cloned process are displayed in the Parts tab in the information panel at
the bottom of the page.

Resequence or move operations

You can move operations during process planning for various reasons, such as to place them in a specific
process or resequence the order in which they are performed in a process.

Note:
When you resequence an operation, all part and resource references assigned to it move with that
operation.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, select an operation and in the Process toolbar, click Show Menu →
Cut , and do one of the following.

Caution:
When you move operations, always use the cut and paste method. Do not use the copy and
paste method.

• To move an object operation within its current process, select another operation in the process
and click Show Menu → Paste → → Paste Before or Paste After.

The operation is resequenced before or after the selected operation within the process.

• To move an operation to a different process, select the process into which you want to move the
operation and click Show Menu → Paste → → Paste Into.

The operation is moved into the selected process, as the last operation within that process.

Note:
Paste Into is only listed as an option when you select a process into which to move an
operation.

• To move an operation before or after a specific operation in a different process, select that
operation in the process and click Show Menu → Paste → → Paste Before or Paste After.

11-34 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• To move an operation to the same level as a subprocess (process beneath the root level of the
process tree), select the process and click Show Menu → Paste → → Paste Before or
Paste After.

Teamcenter Easy Plan resequences the operation before or after the selected process.

Remove multiple operations and processes

Note:
In this procedure, you perform the task to remove multiple processes. You can also perform this
task to remove multiple operations.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. Navigate to the assembly in which you want to remove a process or operations and expand the
assembly.

3. In the Process panel, press and hold Ctrl, then select each process.

4. In the process toolbar, click More → Delete .

When Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the confirmation dialog, click Delete again.

Attach a file to a selected process, process container, or operation

Perform the tasks for an attachment to a process. You can also create and attach files and documents for
a process container or operation.

You work with two types of attachments in Teamcenter Easy Plan:

• Attachments are non-managed documents, because they follow the life cycle of the object to which
they are attached. You use the Files tab to add and maintain attachments.

• Managed documents, or reference documents, have their own life cycle. You use the Documents tab
to add managed documents.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Select a process in the Process panel and then click the Files tab.

3. In the tab toolbar, click More , and then select Add to .

4. In the Add task pane, choose the objects you want to add by doing one of the following.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-35

• Click New to create and attach a file to the object.

• Click Palette to select from the Favorites, Recent, or Clipboard sections.

The Clipboard section displays objects previously copied to the paste buffer using Copy .

Note:
All objects on the clipboard are preselected to paste as attachments. Alternatively, you can
select specific objects to paste as attachments to the process.

• Click Search.

You can filter search results in the task panel.

5. Accept the file Name, type an optional Description, accept the file Type, and if an appropriate
Relation is not selected automatically, select a relation.

6. Click Add.

7. (Optional) To download or delete the attachment, select the attachment in the Files tab.

8. (Optional) To search for files in Teamcenter Easy Plan, copy those files, and paste them into the
Files tab for the selected process.

Open a duplicate structure

You can open a duplicate of a work structure in a bill of process (BOP) and make changes that do not
affect the original structure. This allows you to review changes before you make them.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package and then navigate to the preferred page.

2. Select a process from the BOP panel or from the Assembly panel and click View Other
Configuration .

The entire work package is duplicated and opens in a new tab.

Toolbar commands are hidden in read-only mode.

3. In the new tab select an item, make any changes, and save the configuration.

The changes made in this window do not affect the original work structure and you can move back
and forth between the two views to easily compare your structures.

11-36 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
The administrator can delete the duplicated work packages.

View and edit process properties

You can view and edit property information for a selected process during process planning.

1. Navigate to a plant bill of process (BOP) that has parts and tools assigned to processes.

2. Select an object in the Process panel.

Properties information for the process area displays in the Summary tab.

3. Click Start Edit .

Properties that you can edit are surrounded by a gray border.

4. Click inside the property you want to edit, and type in your changes.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-37

Tip:
When you place your cursor inside a property field, the border changes to a teal color to
indicate that you are editing that property.

5. Click Save Edits or Cancel Edits when you complete the property changes.

View PMI while authoring a process plan

You can view and filter product and manufacturing information (PMI) while you author a process
plan.

1. Open a work package that contains an assembly with PMI.

2. On the Work Instructions tab, under the Process subtab, expand the structure.

3. Select a process or operation for which you want to author a process plan.

The PMI Assembly Level subtab populates with PMI data for the selected object.

Note:
If you select a process or operation that does not have associated PMI data, Process Planning
for ETO displays a message in the PMI tab.

4. (Optional) To view connected parts for PMI data, hover on a line in the PMI Assembly Level panel
and click More .

Process Planning for ETO displays the list of parts connected to the PMI data.

Planning operations

Add or delete an operation in work instructions

To perform planning tasks, load a target process and its assembly, then add operations and work
instructions to the assembly.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Assembly tab, select a part or assembly that has assigned processes and operations.

Processes and operations assigned to the part or assembly are displayed in the Editor tab.

11-38 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. In the Editor tab, next to a process or operation, click More → Create Operation .

Note:
• If you add a new operation to a process, the operation is added as the last in the process.

• If you add a new operation to an operation, the operation is added after the current
operation.

4. In the Create Operation dialog box, in the Name box, type an operation name, and click Create.

The operation is added to the Editor and Process tabs.

5. Author the work instructions for the process or operation.

6. (Optional) Add additional operations to the process plan.

Tip:
As you plan a process, click on process objects to synch the work instruction to the processes
or operations you need to document. The tabs in the information panel beneath the Editor
tab are also synched to the selected process or operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-39

7. (Optional) To remove or replace a process or operation, next to its heading, click More → Delete
.

Add compound operations and execution steps

You can add compound operations to a process or a process area. Unlike a standard operation, which
can define only a single activity, a compound operation can contain multiple execution steps that break
that operation into specific steps to be executed.

Procedure

1. Open an existing work package, or create one and open it.

2. Navigate to work package planning tasks, and then navigate to the Process Planning page.

11-40 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. On the Process Planning page, select a process, and in the process toolbar, select Create →
Create Compound Operation .

Note:
If you add a compound operation under a released process, you are prompted to revise the
process before continuing.

4. In the Create Compound Operation dialog box, type a Name and optional Description.

5. Do one of the following.

• To create a single compound operation, click Create.

• To create an additional compound operation, click Create & Add More.

Note:
The compound operations are created as the last child element of the selected process.
If the compound operations have mandatory properties (including customized properties),
those automatically appear in the new object dialog box.

6. In the Process panel, select the compound operation, and in the process toolbar, select Create .

7. To create one or more execution steps, type a Name and optional Description.

8. Do one of the following.

• To create a single execution step, click Create.

• To create an additional execution step, click Create & Add More.

Note:
The execution steps are created as the last elements under the selected compound
operation.

Once they are created, compound operations and execution steps are visible in the Process tab and
Editor pane of the Work Instructions Authoring page, as well as in Electronic Work Instructions.

Clone operations

If you have authored operations, you can use those operations as templates to clone new operations,
and paste duplicate multiple operations at once.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-41

Note:
When you clone an operation, Teamcenter settings determine whether consumed parts and
assigned resources are copied to the new operation. Contact your Teamcenter administrator with
questions about cloning rules in your environment.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. Under the Work Instructions tab, with the Process tab active, expand the structure.

3. In the Process table, select the operation you want to clone and click Open .

• To clone the operations and add them to the current process, select another operation in the
process and click Paste Before or Paste After.

Note:
If you open a separate browser tab, you can use the Paste Before or Paste After
commands to clone operations:

a. into a different process scope.

b. into a different work package.

• To clone the operations to a different process, select the process and click Paste Into.

Note:
Paste into is only an option when you select a process into which you want to clone
operations.
If you open a separate browser tab, you can use the Paste into command to clone
operations into a different process scope.

• To clone the operations and add them to the same level as a process, select a process in the
structure and click Paste Before or Paste After.

4. Click Clone and select Clone Operation .

Select one of the following options:

• To clone the operations and add them to the current process, select another operation in the
process and click Paste Before or Paste After.

11-42 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
If you open a separate browser tab, you can use the Paste Before or Paste After
commands to clone operations:

a. into a different process scope.

b. into a different work package.

• To clone the operations to a different process, select the process and click Paste Into.

• To clone the operations and add them to the same level as a process, select a process in the
structure and click Paste Before or Paste After.

Teamcenter Easy Plan clones the operation and adds it to the structure.

Tip:
If cloning rules in your environment copy all objects associated with an operation, the Parts and
Resources subtabs display objects associated with the cloned operation.

Product Configurator variants

Analyze variant formulas defined for an operation

You can view and analyze the variant formulas that are defined for an operation. You can complete this
task while you work in a process station, or while you work on operations from the line balancing page.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

You can also select and analyze a single operation.

3. Click Open Variant Formula icon.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-43

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Review and analyze variant formulas defined for the operations.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

6. (Optional) Click Initial Validation to validate whether defined variants meet the rules.

Note:
If all variant conditions are within guidelines, Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a message that
states "Variant Conditions were validated."
If some variant formulas are not within guidelines, Teamcenter Easy Plan displays a message
that states some variant conditions were not validated. You must resolve those variant
formulas.

7. Click X to return to the Balance page.

Define variant formulas for operations

You can add and remove variants from operations in your production plan. You can complete this task
while you work in a process station, or while you work on operations from the line balancing page.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

You can also select and define the variant formula for a single operation.

3. Click Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box opens.

11-44 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Within the Variant Formula dialog box:

• Each operation that you selected is a table column.

• Table cells indicate the status of variant formulas for each operation.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

• The variant families or options are listed as table rows.

• The caret in each column heading opens a drop-down menu with additional options for that
operation.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Click Start Edit .

Click inside a table cell to add a variant formula to an operation.

6. A check mark is displayed in the table cell.

7. (Optional) Click inside a table cell to remove a variant formula from an operation.

8. Click the caret in a column heading to open a menu for that operation, and select an option:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-45

• Split—Creates a second column for the operation, so that you can author variants with an OR
formula.

• Clear—Removes all variants that are defined for the operation.

• Copy—Copies all variants for the operation, so that you can paste them onto another operation.

• Hide Column—Hides data for the selected operation.

This setting is active only while the dialog box is open.

• Freeze—Locks data for the selected operation. Other users cannot change variant definitions for
the operation.

This setting is active only while the dialog box is open.

9. Click Save Edits , and click X.

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns to the Balancing page. The Variant Formula column displays defined
variant formulas for each operation within the station.

11-46 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Copy defined variant formulas to another operation

After you define the variant formula for an operation, you can copy and paste the variant formula into
other operations to save time. You can complete this task while you work in a process station, or while
you work on operations from the line balancing page.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

Tip:
One operation must contain the variant formula you want to copy.

3. Click Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box opens.

Within the Variant Formula dialog box:

• Each operation that you selected is a table column.

• Table cells indicate the status of variant formulas for each operation.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

• The variant families or options are listed as table rows.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-47

• The caret in each column heading opens a drop-down menu with additional options for that
operation.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Click Start Edit .

6. Click the caret for the operation from which you want to copy variants, and select Copy from the
menu.

7. Click the caret for the operation into which you want to paste the copied variants, and select Paste
from the menu.

8. Click Save Edits .

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns to the Balancing tab. The Variant Formula column displays defined
variant formulas for each operation within the station.

11-48 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Assign classified tools to operations

You can assign tools and resources from a classified library to operations.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. On the Work Instructions tab, under the Process subtab, expand the structure.

3. Select the operation to which you want to assign classified tools and resources.

4. Click the Resources tab in the table at the bottom of the screen.

The Resources tab shows resources that are already assigned to the selected operation.

5. Click Assign Classified Resources .

6. Select a class from the list, and click Search Resources Under.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-49

7. Select items from the filtered list.

Note:
You can select one or multiple classified resources to assign to the operation.

8. Click Assign to apply classified resources to the selected operation.

The Resources table now lists the classified objects you assigned to the operation, and provides the
following information:

• The Classifications column indicates which resources in the table are classified. If this field is
blank, the object in that row is not classified.

• The Occurrence Type column indicates the occurrence type assigned to a resource. Your
Teamcenter administrator defines which occurrence types are assigned to resources in the
structure.

Note:
To remove an assigned resource from an operation, select the row in the Resources subtab and
click Unassign .

11-50 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Assign an operation to a work area

You can assign an operation to the work area where it is to be performed.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, or create a work
package, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, expand the structure and select an operation.

Note:
A single work area can have one or multiple operations assigned to it. Press Ctrl to select
multiple operations.

3. Click More → Assign Work Area .

The Assign Work Area dialog box lists all plants and work areas in the plant bill of equipment
(BOE).

4. Select a work area, and click Assign.

5. (Optional) In the information panel at the bottom of the screen, click the Work Area tab.

The Work Area tab shows work areas that are assigned to the selected operation. You can also
assign work areas to the selected operation from the Work Area tab.

Note:
To remove an assigned work area from an operation, select the row in the Work Area tab and
click Remove Work Area .

View the full BOE and assign objects to the BOP

You can view the full bill of equipment (BOE) structure in a tree view, and efficiently assign objects from
it to the bill of process (BOP).

This is most useful if the BOE for your product has one layer or a few layers. It is not practical for a larger
product that has a larger BOE.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-51

Prerequisites

You must set the EP_ShowFullBOEInResources preference value to true. In addition, you must add
EP_ShowFullBOEInResources to the AWC_Startup_preference in the Teamcenter rich client.

See the Preferences section in the Active Workspace Administration documentation for a description of
preferences and how to set them.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package, and then
navigate to the Process Planning page.

2. In the Assembly panel, select the Resources subtab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the BOE for the structure.

3. Expand the structure in the Process panel, and select the process object to which you want to
assign an object from the BOE.

4. Drag items from the BOE to the Resources tab in the Process panel.

You can also drag classified resources from the BOE to the Resources in the Process panel.

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns those objects from the BOE to the object in the Process panel.

11-52 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Assigning operations to a process resource

You can assign operations to a process resource such as a worker, fixture, or robot, on both the Process
Planning page and the Work Instructions Authoring page.

In this example, on the Process Planning page, the Process panel shows two process resources,
Operator1 and Operator2, who are assigned to a station. Two operations are associated with
Operator1, while Operator2 is currently unassociated with any operations.

On the Work Instructions Authoring page, the Process panel shows the same structure. Here, the
operation is a node in the Editor panel, where you can add instructions to the operator using all
standard editing tools.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-53

Note:
Process toolbar options such as cut, copy, and paste are not available when you select a process
resource in the process tree.

Improve time management information in operations

You can modify time values for each activity in an operation associated with a process in the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

Procedure

1. Search for and open an existing work package, or create one and open it.

2. Navigate to work package planning tasks, and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work
Instructions Authoring page.

3. In the Process tab or panel, select a process or operation, and in the page toolbar, click Show Time
Management .

The Time Management panel replaces the Viewer panel and displays a list of activities associated
with the process and its associated operations, or the selected operation.

4. Select an activity in the Time Management panel.

The selected activity synchronizes with its associated process or operation.

5. Review the selected operation to verify whether the time values are accurate based on the Time
Unit measurement selection displayed in the upper-right corner of the page.

11-54 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. (Optional) If you are working in the Work Instructions Authoring page, in the Editor panel,
modify operation work instructions associated with the activity.

7. (Optional) Correct the time values in the editable columns in the Time Management panel by
double-clicking the existing values and typing new values.

Tip:
Editable columns include:

• Activity Unit Time (the time required to complete a single instance of an activity, such as
the time to walk one meter).

• Frequency (the number of times to perform the activity).

Note:
Activity Work Time is the calculated total time to perform a specific activity, and is not
editable. Activity Work Time = Activity Unit Time * Frequency.

8. (Optional) To close the Time Management panel, click Hide Time Management .

Linking previously associated BOPs and revised MBOMs

When a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) assembly is revised, any bill of process (BOP) associated
with that MBOM retains its relationship only to the previous version. Process associations are not
automatically carried forward to the new MBOM revision.

For this reason, when an MBOM revision exists and you use it to navigate to the Process Planning
or Work Instructions Authoring page, Teamcenter Easy Plan prompts you to associate the correct
process revisions to the assembly revisions, according to several scenarios. These scenarios often involve

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-55

distinguishing between assembly and process statuses (for example, Released versus Working). The
most common cases are described below.

Note:
(Alternative use cases only) If an object's release status matches an internal name value that
your administrator defined in the MEReleaseStatusListForAutoRevise preference, that object is
automatically revised when changes are propagated.

Revising and linking the preferred BOP revision

In this case, more than one BOP is associated with the original MBOM (revision A), and all the BOPs have
a status of Released.

The system provides a list of BOPs associated with MBOM/A and prompts you to reassociate the
appropriate process with the MBOM/B. When you select the preferred process and click Revise and
Link, the selected BOP is revised to BOP/B and is associated with the revised MBOM/B.

Linking the working BOP

In this case, more than one BOP is associated with the original MBOM (revision A), and all the BOPs
except BOP-1/A are released. The status of BOP-1/A is Working.

The system displays working BOP-1/A and prompts you to associate that BOP with the MBOM assembly.
When you select BOP-1/A and click Link, the BOP is not revised, but the BOP with the status of Working
is associated with revised MBOM/B.

11-56 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
• Processes that you previously configured out of your BOP structure are not considered for
revision or linkage.

• If an MBOM is associated with multiple BOPs, you are prompted to select the appropriate BOP
from a list of those associated BOPs.

Planning parts

Author work instructions for a selected part

You can author work instructions for parts without child objects.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and parts.

2. Under the Planning tab, and under the Product subtab, drill into the assembly and select the part
with no child objects for which you want to author work instructions.

3. Click Open Work Instructions , and then select New Work Instructions.

4. In the Create New Process dialog box, select a process type and click Next.

5. In the Name box, type a process name, and click Create.

Process Planning for ETO connects the new process to the subassembly exactly as if you used the
associate product as target command in Manufacturing Process Planner.

6. (Optional) To add more processes, in the Editor, select the new process, click More , and select
Add New Step.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-57

Note:
• If you add a new step at the process level, Process Planning for ETO creates the operation
as the last step in the process.

• If you add a new step at the operation level, Process Planning for ETO creates the new
operation directly after the current operation.

7. Author work instructions for the process.

Note:
You cannot add images to the Editor panel of the Work Instructions tab.

8. (Optional) Consume parts to the operation.

Pack and unpack an assembly

Packing an assembly lets you hide unnecessary parts and tools, especially of the same type, such as a
bolt or nut, by compacting them into single lines in an assembly. You can pack or unpack parts in an
assembly and then allocate the parts to multiple operations within the structure.

Note:
• Parts are unpacked for your current session only. You must unpack the components again the
next time you log on.

• Parts can also be packed and unpacked in the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) on the
EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, where packed oir unpacked part occurrences may be assigned
and unassigned from the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to the MBOM. In the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring pages, you can review assignment status icons for
packed lines by enabling Show Consumption and Impact State in the upper toolbars.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Assembly tab or panel, expand the structure and do one of the following.

a. Select an assembly that contains multiple occurrences of one or more parts.

Tip:
Parts with multiple occurrences contain identical names and find numbers.

11-58 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• To pack all occurrences of the same part as a single line at the same level and all levels
below the selected assembly, click Pack All .

In the assembly, a packed line is indicated by an x, followed by the number of lines that are
packed. For example, x 2 indicates that the packed line contains two lines, or parts with the
same name and find number.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-59

• To unpack all previously packed lines, click Unpack All .

Parts with multiple occurrences are displayed as separate lines, with identical names and
find numbers.

11-60 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

b. Select a part for which multiple occurrences exist in the assembly.

• To pack all occurrences of the part into a single line, click Pack .

Instances with the same name and find number are packed into a single line.

• To unpack all occurrences of the part as individual lines, click Unpack .

All occurrences of the unpacked line are displayed.

Unpack parts consumed to an operation

You can unpack part occurrences, or instances of the same identical part, that are consumed to an
operation during planning. For example, if too many fasteners are consumed to one operation, you can
unpack the part, reassign some fasteners to a different operation, and then pack the remaining parts.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. On the Assembly tab, expand the structure and select an assembly.

3. In the Editor tab, select a packed part that contains part occurrences assigned to operations within
the assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-61

In the assembly, a packed line is indicated by an x, followed by the number of lines that are packed.
For example, x 3 indicates that the packed line contains three lines, or part occurrences.

4. (Optional) In the information panel below the Editor panel, drag the packed part from the
Assembly tab to the Parts tab to consume the part to the operation.

5. In the Parts tab, select a packed line and click Unpack .

11-62 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. Select and consume the unpacked parts to separate operations within the structure.

7. In the Parts tab, select an unpacked part that is still consumed by an operation and click Pack .

The part is once again packed and its individual occurrences are assigned to the operations.

View NC program files

You can view numerical control (NC) program files and work instructions and submit them to a workflow
in Teamcenter Easy Plan.

Prerequisites

You must be using Active Workspace version 6.2.3 or later.

In NX CAM, you must create an NC machine operation with machining activities. In addition, you
must attach NC program and work instruction files to the machining activities associated with the NC
machining operation.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for an existing work package.

2. In the Process panel, expand a process and select an NC machining operation.

3. (Optional) Select the NC machining operation, then click Show Part Planning Activities.

Teamcenter Easy Plan lists machining activities, NC program files, and work instructions associated
with the machining operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-63

4. (Optional) In the Activities panel, select an NC_Program object or a work instruction and view its
attachments in the Files subtab.

5. (Optional) In the Activities panel, select an NC Program or a work instruction and submit it to a
workflow.

Assign parts and resources to an NC machining operation

You can create a numerical control (NC) machining operation in Easy Plan, and then allocate and assign
parts and resources to that operation from the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

Prerequisites

You must be using Active Workspace version 6.2.3 or later.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for an existing work package.

2. In the Process panel, expand a process and select a process station.

3. Click Create, then select Create Operation .

4. In the Create Operation dialog box, select NC Machining for the operation type, type an
operation Name, and click Create.

Teamcenter Easy Plan creates the NC machining operation as a child of the process station.

5. (Optional) To assign parts to the NC machining operation, select the NC machining operation and
verify that the Parts tab below the Process panel is active. Select the Assembly subtab, expand the
MBOM, and drag objects to the Parts tab.

11-64 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns the parts to the operation.

6. (Optional) To assign resources to the NC machining operation, verify that the Resources tab below
the Process panel is active. Select the Resources subtab, expand the MBOM, and drag objects to
the Resources tab.

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns the resources to the NC machining operation.

7. (Optional) In the Process panel select the NC machining operation, click More , and select
Open in NX.

Teamcenter Easy Plan opens the NC machining part in NX. You can make changes to the NX CAM
data, and save those changes back to Easy Plan.

8. (Optional) Select the NC machining operation, then click Show Part Planning Activities.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-65

Teamcenter Easy Plan lists machining activities, NC program files, and work instructions associated
with the machining operation.

9. (Optional) View the NC program files, activities, and work instructions associated with the
machining operation.

Viewing background parts during process planning

Background parts management

During planning you may need to display 3D data for parts that were installed earlier in the
manufacturing process, to provide operators with a clear view and clear instructions for the current
operation.

You can use background parts management to select an operation and to send it to the Visualization
viewer. Teamcenter Easy Plan creates a 3D product view that includes parts that are in the background or
surrounding structure to enhance your product view.

You can work with background parts from the:

• Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring pages.

• Background Parts Management page.

Show or hide assigned assemblies for background parts

You can show and hide assigned assemblies for background parts in the Viewer panel on the Process
Planning and Work Instructions Authoring pages.

Prerequisites

Before you begin, you must assign background parts to the assembly with which you are working.

11-66 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Procedure

1. Open an existing work package, or create one and open it, and then navigate to the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. Click the Background Parts tab, and then click Show Selected to select items that you want to
display in the 3D viewer.

Teamcenter Easy Plan shows the background parts as transparent images, and shows assembly
parts in full color so that you can quickly distinguish between them in the viewer.

Teamcenter Easy Plan synchronizes the display between the 3D viewer and the assembly tree. If
you select an item in the 3D viewer, Teamcenter Easy Plan highlights that item in the assembly
tree. If you select an item in the assembly tree, Teamcenter Easy Plan highlights that item in the 3D
viewer.

3. (Optional) Click Hide Selected to hide the background parts in the 3D viewer.

Show or hide the target MBOM subassembly while working with background parts

You can show or hide the target manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) subassembly in the Viewer
panel while you work with background parts in the Background Parts Management page.

Procedure

1. Open an existing work package, or create one and open it, and then navigate to the Background
Parts Management page.

2. Load the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) that you want to work with and in the Assigned
Assemblies for Background Parts panel, click Show in 3D viewer .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-67

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the assigned assemblies for background parts in the 3D viewer.

Teamcenter Easy Plan synchronizes the display between the 3D viewer and the EBOM. If you select
an item in the 3D viewer, Teamcenter Easy Plan highlights that item in the EBOM. If you select an
item in the EBOM, Teamcenter Easy Plan highlights that item in the 3D viewer.

3. (Optional) Click Hide in 3D viewer to hide the assigned assemblies for background parts.

4. In the 3D viewer, click Show Target Assembly to view the target MBOM assembly.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the target MBOM subassembly in the 3D viewer.

Teamcenter Easy Plan shows the background parts as transparent images, and shows the target
MBOM subassembly parts in full color so that you can quickly distinguish between them in the
viewer.

5. (Optional) Click Hide Target Assembly to stop displaying the target MBOM assembly in the 3D
viewer.

How do I?

Enter data collection information

If your organization has enabled data collection execution and your Teamcenter administrator has
configured EWI to do so, you can enter optional or required data collection details from the shop floor.
For example, if you are required to measure and enter a length value for a part during an operation, you
must enter its value in the Data Collection table or list view to complete a step.

1. Open the work package that contains the step with a Data Collection panel.

11-68 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

2. Select the data collection item for which you want to define values and click Capture Data
Collection .

3. In the Capture Data Collection panel, type or select any required or optional values and type any
relevant comments.

4. Click Save and repeat this process for any additional required data collection.

The information is stored along with your user name and the time you saved the data.

Review activities

You can review a list of activities related to a loaded operation if your Teamcenter administrator has
configured Electronic Work Instructions to do so.

1. Load an operation containing activities.

Activities are displayed in table or list view, in a pane or a tab; your administrator configures the
layout. In this example, categories indicate non value-added and value-added activities, as well as
the estimated unit time (in seconds) that each activity should take to complete.

2. Mouse-over an activity and click to review that activity.

3. When finished with the activity, click .

4. (Optional) Create a report if your administrator has set activities to be included in reports.

Review operations from a process

The Operations table view allows you to review a list of operations that contain information about the
operations, such as Operator and Status.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-69

For configuration, see Configuring the Operations table view in Electronic Work Instructions
Deployment.

Filter processes and operation by operator

When there is more than one operator at a station, each of the operators can see the other's operations
in addition to their own. The operators can filter the operations using a parameter in the URL or a control
in Electronic Work Instructions that can filter operations per operator. To do this, the operator item id is
passed as a parameter in the URL.

Example:

http://<serverName>:<port>/
tc.html#/com.siemens.splm.clientfx.tcui.xrt.showObject?page=
EWI&uid=GpbpPMGL4iOinD&stepUid=SR::N::Mfg0BvrProcessStation..2.x
HCLz4vGMeO0ZA.GpbpPMGL4iOinD.GpfpPMGL4iOinD.1CSpPMGL4iOinD.1&resource=000
171

An operators list in the header area allows you to filter by operator.

Note:
To see the operators list, the EWI_ShowOperatorSelection preference value should be set to true.

Set a step status

If your organization supports execution features, you may be required to set the status of work on a step
process or operation. Step statuses track the progress, execution, and success or failure of tasks or task
results.

1. In the step for which you want to set a status, click Set Step Status .

2. In the Set Step Status pane, select a Step Status.

Note:
These are default Electronic Work Instructions values. Your organization may use different
values than those listed.

• Pending indicates that work on the step is awaiting a decision or action.

• In Work indicates that work on the step is in progress.

• Complete indicates that work on the step has finished successfully, including any required serial
or lot numbers and other information.

11-70 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• Failed indicates that work on the step is incomplete due to a failure of some sort.

3. Drag the Step Progress slider to the appropriate percentage of work still pending, completed in
progress, or completed prior to failure. If you selected Complete, the step progress locks at 100%.

4. (Optional) In the Comments text box, type comments on why the work is pending, your current
progress, the step completion, or possible reasons it failed.

5. Click Save.

The information is stored along with your user name and the time you saved the status.

Attach a document to a step

If your organization supports execution features, you can upload a document from your hard drive and
attach it to a step or attach a previously loaded document to a step.

1. To copy an attached document from one step to another, do the following.

a. In the step where the document resides, click Collected Attachments .

b. In the Collected Attachments panel, click the Palette tab.

c. Move your cursor over the document to be copied and click .

d. Click Copy .

2. In the step to which you want to attach a document, click Collected Attachments .

3. Do either of the following.

• To upload a document on the New tab, click Choose File, navigate to and select the document,
and click Open.

The document is displayed in the Current Attachments list.

• To add an existing document, click the Palette tab, select it from the Clipboard, Favorites, or
Recent list, and click Attach.

4. Click the New tab.

The document is now visible in the Current Attachments list and is attached to the step.

You can:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-71

• Download the document by selecting it in the Current Attachments list and clicking Download
.

• Delete the document by selecting it and clicking Delete .

Create freehand markup on a 2D image

1. Display a captured image in the viewer.

2. Open the markup panel by clicking .

3. Click Freehand .

The image background is displayed in gray to indicate markup is expecting your freehand drawing.

4. In the 2D image in the left panel, create a freehand drawing.

The software guesses the shape you are attempting to draw. It recognizes ellipses, rectangles,
polygons, and polylines.

Tip:

The software also helps you draw arrows . Create a barb on the end of a line,
and an arrow is displayed. You can also create a two headed arrow in the same manner.
However, arrows are limited to lines and cannot be created with arcs.

5. Click one of the following.

• to accept the shape.

Note:

You can draw more than one shape before clicking . Once the shape is accepted, you
can enter markup text in the comment window.

• to delete the shape.

• to undo the recognized shape.

• to redo the recognized shape.

11-72 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Tip:

If you clicked Freehand but wish to cancel, click it again.

6. If you are finished creating markups, click Done .

Mark up a PDF

If your administrator has given you permission for specific documents, you can mark up PDF instructions,
documents, and reference documents The markup exists only in Electronic Work Instructions and does
not affect the actual PDFs.

1. In the Instructions pane, Documents tab, or References tab, open a PDF.

If the PDF is editable, a Markup this Document icon is displayed above the PDF.

2. Click Markup this Document .

The Markup panel is displayed.

Any previous or in progress text comments or freehand markup are displayed in the panel with
login names.

3. To review existing markup, click any sub-panel.

The PDF jumps to the page where the freehand markup or comment was made. If a comment was
made, the red-lined panel expands to show it. If freehand markup was added, a shadow appears
below it in the PDF.

4. To comment on an area of the document, do the following.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-73

a. Click Create Highlight Markup .

A new sub-panel with your logon ID appears in the Markup panel.

b. Drag to select the area that you want to address.

The selected text is highlighted in red.

c. Type your comment and when finished, click Create

5. To freehand draw on the PDF, follow the procedure to create freehand markup on a 2D image.

Open a 3D product view in Lifecycle Visualization

If you have Lifecycle Visualization installed on your computer, you can display 3D product views
associated to the currently loaded step for viewing and further analysis.

1. Open a step that contains 3D product views.

2. Display the images associated with the step in the Viewer pane.

3. Click the Open in Teamcenter Visualization button . This button is only displayed if there is a 3D
product view associated with the step.

Lifecycle Visualization opens and displays all the 3D product views present on the current step.

11-74 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Generate a report

You can generate a report for a work package on a process structure, a plant bill of process (BOP), or a
single step in a process.

You cannot generate a reports for a BOM structure. Your administrator can customize reports to change
the properties displayed and the layout.

Note:
Your administrator must install specific templates before you can generate reports in Excel format.
If you cannot generate Excel reports, open a Teamcenter command prompt and execute these
commands:

• add_req_templates -u=your-administrator-user-name -p=your-administrator-

password -g=dba -t=ExcelTemplate -i=%TC_ROOT%
\install\ewi0electronicwi\data\ewiExcelReportTemplateForPlantBOP.xlsm

• add_req_templates -u=your-administrator-user-name -p=your-administrator-

password -g=dba -t=ExcelTemplate -i=%TC_ROOT%
\install\ewi0electronicwi\data\ewiExcelReportTemplateForProcess.xlsm

Use the following procedure to generate a report.

1. Click Generate Report .

2. Select one of the following:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-75

• Work package

The work package report contains the following information:

a. Work package description (for example, top level process name information, product
information).

b. List of first level steps within the work package (ordered according to the find number in
Teamcenter).

c. For each step:

• A list of children for each first level step (ordered according to the find number in
Teamcenter).

• Instructions (from property or PDF).

• Attached images.

• Consumed parts.

• Assigned tools.

• Current Step

The current step report contains the following information:

a. Instructions (from a property or PDF).

b. Attached images.

c. Consumed parts.

d. Assigned tools.

3. Click the Format list, and select an option:

• Full process package – generates a PDF report for a work package on a process structure, or a
single step within a process.

• Excel report for Process – generates an Excel-based, hierarchical structure with properties. To
customize the Excel output, modify the ewiExcelReportTemplateForProcess template.

• Excel report for Plant BOP – generates an Excel-based, hierarchical structure of the
plant bill of process (BOP) with properties. To customize the Excel output, modify the
ewiExcelReportTemplateForProcess template.

11-76 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. Click Generate Report.

Teamcenter generates a report in Excel or PDF format.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-77

When the report is generated, you can choose to open it or save it to your operating system. This is an
example of a PDF report generated for a single step.

11-78 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

This is an example of a report generated for a hierarchical structure in Excel format.

Show consumed parts and assigned tools

By default, the Parts and Tools tabs show the parts and tools assigned to the selected step.

1. Click the Parts or Tools tab.

2. (Optional) To view the list of parts or tools:

• In a table, click → Table.

• In a list, click → List.

3. To show all aggregated parts and tools—those used in the current step as well as those in the step's
immediate parents and/or children—click .

To hide aggregated parts and tools, click again to switch off the view.

4. Select the part or tool you want to see and click Information .

The consumed part or tool information is displayed in a pop up window.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-79

Note:
If there are no parts or tools available, the respective tab is hidden.

5. (Optional) Click Attachments to view datasets attached to the part or tool.

Note:
The Attachments tab is displayed only if there are datasets attached to the selected part or
tool. Your administrator can configure which dataset types are displayed in the Attachments
tab using the EWI_PartToolAttachmentsRelationInfo preference.

6. Click to close the window.

Create a change notice, request, or report

If you are confronted with a problem with your work, you can create a change notice, request a change
or deviation, or report the issue. attach objects such as images or documents, and send it through a
workflow for resolution.

Learn more about creating change notices and reports in the Active Workspace User Assistance
documentation.

1. With the problematic step visible, click Create Change at the right side of the screen.

2. Select the type of change you want to record.

3. Type a brief title (Synopsis) and description of the problem report.

11-80 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

4. If you are creating a deviation request, in the Change Type text box, type the type of change to be
used for the deviation.

5. (Optional) Click Add Attachments to add documents from your operating system or an image
capture. The work package and selected step are attached by default.

6. Click Save to save the report or Submit to submit it to a workflow.

You can view problem reports assigned to you through a workflow by clicking the Inbox tile on
the Active Workspace home screen. You can display saved problem reports by clicking the Report
Problem tile.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 11-81

11-82 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
12. Using the 3D panel viewer
Displaying content in the gallery viewer
By default, the gallery occupies the right half of the screen. You can display a variety of objects that are
associated with the step. The gallery is composed of tabs that display specific types of content. If a step
does not contain any content of that type, no tab is shown for it.

You can see the following types of data:

• Images and 3D snapshots in the Viewer pane.

Learn more about View 3D models.

• Microsoft Office 2013 and 2016 files, PDFs, and Teamcenter CME Reports attached to the step in the
Documents pane.

• For a given step, referenced Microsoft Office files, PDFs, Teamcenter CME Reports, and URLs attached
to the document item under the step, or under the top line of the BOP in Teamcenter, displayed in the
References pane.

• Animations in the Animations pane. The following video files are supported:

• AVI (the Windows Media Player plugin must be installed on the browser).

• MP4 (played using HTML5 browser video capabilities; check your browser’s video support)

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-1

• Cortona animations (the Cortona3D player must be installed on the client system).

Clicking on the thumbnail images at the bottom of the gallery opens each of the objects. You can
additionally open an object in an external viewer by clicking Download .

12-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Your administrator can modify the layout of the gallery using the following preferences:

EWI_Layout
EWI_SinglePanelLayout
EWI_TwoPanelLayout
EWI_ThreePanelLayout

View 3D models
In the Viewer pane of the gallery, you can view any 3D snapshots attached to a step. A 2D image of the
snapshot is initially displayed at the bottom of the viewer. Since 3D snapshots take longer to load, a 2D
image is usually displayed first when you switch between images. When you switch between snapshots,
you lose any changes you made to the 3D snapshot, for example by rotating or zooming.

Note:
If your administrator has set the value of the preference EWI_AutoLoad3D to true, 3D
automatically loads when you move between steps or click a snapshot.

1. Click on a 2D snapshot at the bottom of the viewer pane. If it has 3D information available, the 3D
View button is displayed in the Viewer toolbar.

2. Click 3D View to view the 3D snapshot.

You can manipulate the model in the following ways:

• Click Orient View and choose a predefined model orientation.

View Perspective or alignment

orientation

Trimetric A 3/4 perspective, looking up (-

Isometric)

Isometric A 3/4 perspective, looking down

(+Isometric)

Top Aligned to the Z-axis, looking in the

–Z direction

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-3

View Perspective or alignment

orientation

Front Aligned to the Y-axis, looking in the

+Y direction

Right Aligned to the X-axis, looking in the

–X direction

Back Aligned to the Y-axis, looking in the

–Y direction

Bottom Aligned to the Z-axis, looking in the

+Z direction

Left Aligned to the X-axis, looking in the

+X direction

• Click Fit to change the size of the model so it most effectively fills the viewing area.

• Click Rotate to rotate the model.

To rotate freely around the model, in the center of the viewer, click and drag the cursor.

To constrain the model rotation, click and drag along the top, bottom, left, or right edge of the
viewer. If the cursor is near the left or right edge of the viewer when you begin, a horizontal axis
is used for rotation. If the cursor is near the bottom edge, a vertical axis is used for rotation. If
the cursor is near the top edge, a perpendicular axis is used for rotation.

3. To return to the 2D image, click 2D view .

View image captures and thumbnails

You can view 2D image captures and thumbnails associated with 3D models.

Note:
By default, thumbnails are displayed based on preview information in Teamcenter. Such
information may be a rich client preview, a snapshot, or an image dataset attached to a step.
If no preview, snapshot, or image dataset is attached to a step, then the step icon is displayed
instead.

1. Open an object with a JT model and one or more associated image captures or thumbnails.

2. Click the Viewer tab to display the model in the viewer.

3. Click Capture to open the Image Capture panel.

12-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The image captures associated with the 3D model are displayed in the Images list.

4. Do any of the following:

To Do this

Filter the list of image Type a search keyword in the Filter box.
captures

View an image capture in the Click the image capture thumbnail. To return
Active Workspace viewer to viewing the 3D model, click the thumbnail
again.

View the image in its own Select or hover over the image, click Open
viewer , and then click Viewer.

Delete the image Select or hover over the image and click
Delete .
Delete appears only if you are the image
owner.

Zoom in or out on the image, If you want to zoom in or out on the image,
pan across the image, or fit use the scroll wheel on your mouse.
the image to the screen

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-5

To Do this

When you are zoomed in, you can pan across

the image using the scroll bars.

Add freehand markups, Open the markup panel and click

such as arrows, ellipses, and
rectangles Freehand .

View part or assembly summary properties

Using the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) or manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) toolbars in
the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, you can view a selected part or assembly in the 3D Viewer panel,
or view summary overview details of that part or assembly. When the Viewer panel is visible, you can
show the panels to the right of the associated EBOM and MBOM and then extend the display across two
monitors to better review EBOM and MBOM viewer details.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and then open the
EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

2. If necessary, in the EBOM or MBOM toolbar, click Show Summary .

By default, the 3D viewer panel opens with an Overview tab available.

3. (Optional) To show the panel:

• Below the EBOM or MBOM, click Bottom Panel .

• To the right of the MBOM or EBOM, click Side Panel .

The next time you open your work package, select a part or assembly in the EBOM or MBOM panel,
and click Show Summary . The last EBOM or MBOM summary is automatically loaded. To view
3D images, click the 3D tab.

4. (Optional) Select the Overview tab.

Detailed properties for the selected part or assembly are displayed.

5. (Optional) To close the panel, click Hide Summary .

Select multiple objects in the Viewer panel

By drawing a rectangle around multiple objects in the 3D Viewer panel, you can highlight those objects
as well as select them in related panels. Related panels include the Assembly panel or tab in the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page, as well as the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) or
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) panels on the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

12-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
Any packed objects in the Viewer panel must be unpacked to be selectable.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page or navigate to the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. If the Viewer panel is not visible in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the EBOM or MBOM
panels, click Show Summary .

The Viewer panel is displayed.

3. In the Viewer panel toolbar, click Select by a rectangle and do one of the following.

• To select objects that are contained completely within a rectangle, click and drag your mouse
from left to right to encompass all objects within that rectangle.

• To select objects that are contained completely and partially within a rectangle, click and drag
your mouse from right to left to select or touch all objects that lie in any way within that
rectangle.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-7

The objects are selected within the 3D viewer panel and the assembly or element list of the related
panel.

Note:
You can click anywhere outside the selected objects to deselect them.

Select objects by volume

You can select objects in the Viewer panel by 3D volume. Volumetric selection lets you select parts that
are partially or fully covered by other parts in the viewer, based on the selected 3D area.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring
page.

2. In the Viewer panel, show the part to be selected, and in the Process panel, select an operation
associated with the part.

3. In the Viewer panel toolbar, click Select by volume , and do one of the following.

• To select only objects that are fully covered by other objects, click and drag the cursor from left
to right to draw a red 3D cube around the preferred area.

12-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• To select objects that are partially covered, click and drag the cursor from right to left to draw a
blue 3D cube around the preferred area.

4. Release the mouse and do either of the following.

• To adjust the location of the 3D volume selection, click inside the selected area and drag the
selection.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-9

• To adjust the height, width, or depth of the selection, pause your mouse over the appropriate
handle and drag it in the Viewer panel.

5. In the Viewer panel toolbar, click Select by volume .

The object is selected within the Viewer panel and in the Process panel.

Note:
You can click anywhere outside the selected objects to deselect them.

Show or hide multiple assembly, part, or process lines in the Viewer

panel
You can show or hide multiple assembly, part, or process lines in the 3D Viewer panel.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and then navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring
page.

12-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• To select all lines consecutively, hold your Shift key and select the first and last lines.

• To select nonconsecutive lines, hold your Ctrl key and select each of the lines.

3. If you are working on the Process Planning page, in the Process tab, do one of the following to
select the lines that you want to show or hide in the Viewer panel.

• To select all lines consecutively, hold your Shift key and select the first and last lines.

• To select nonconsecutive lines, hold your Ctrl key and select each of the lines.

4. In the panel toolbar, click Show Selected or Hide Selected .

Verify MBOM consumption of many parts

To reassign all or some parts to another operation, you can quickly validate where the parts were
originally consumed, select the parts to be reassigned using the 3D viewer, and reassign them to
another operation.

You may sometimes be responsible for assigning a large quantity of parts, such as hundreds of rivets, to
an operation. You can also assign previously unassigned parts to an operation at the same time.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Assembly tab or panel, click Show to display the parts to be reviewed.

Tip:
Click next to an assembly to view all parts in that assembly.

The parts are displayed in the 3D viewer.

3. In the upper-left corner of the page, select Show Consumption and Impact State.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-11

In the Assembly tab or panel, in the Assignment State column, an assignment status icon is
displayed next to each part that is assigned to one or more operations.

4. Click the assignment icon next to each part to determine the operations to which each part is
assigned.

If you are working on the Work Instructions Authoring page, in the Editor panel, each operation
you select is highlighted, and in the Parts tab on the information panel beneath the editor, the part
you selected is highlighted.

If you are working on the Process Planning page, in the Process panel, each operation you select
is highlighted, and in the Parts tab on the information panel beneath the process panel, the part
you selected is highlighted.

5. In the 3D viewer, click Select by Rectangle and select the multiple parts that you want to
assign or reassign to another operation.

The parts selected in the 3D viewer are also selected in the Assembly tab or panel.

6. In the Assembly toolbar, select More → Manage Consumption .

In the Assembly tab or panel, the selected parts are displayed in a filtered list. Any operations in
which the parts are assigned are displayed in the Consumed In column, with commas separating
each operation to which the parts are assigned.

7. From the list, select any parts you want to assign to an operation, and in the Editor tab or Process
panel, select the operation to which you want to assign or reassign them.

8. In the Assembly toolbar, select More → Assign Selection .

The parts are assigned to the selected operation and appear in the Parts panel beneath the Editor
tab or Process panel.

Rename graphic 3D screen shot visuals

In the Visuals panel, you can rename 2D screen shots and product views captured in in Teamcenter
Lifecycle Visualization.

1. In the Visuals panel beneath the Viewer panel in the Process Planning and Work Instructions
Authoring pages, click Start Edit .

2. Select the screen shot whose name you want to change and in the pop-up text box, type a new
name.

12-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

You can change the name but not the extension (for example, .jpg, .png).

3. (Optional) Select and rename other screen shots, and then click Save Edits .

The screen shot names are saved, and if applicable, re-sorted in the Visuals panel in alphanumeric
order.

Note:
To update renamed screen shot datasets, do the following.

a. Click Manage Product Views in Teamcenter Visualization .

b. When prompted to either update or review the image:

• Click Review to load the existing revision and continue without revising the dataset.

• Click Update to open Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization and create a new product
view.

c. To delete 2D images and product views in the Visuals panel, select them, and then click
Delete .

Tip:
If you submit and release an operation with associated renamed screen shots to a workflow,
when you attempt to update the image dataset in Teamcenter Lifecycle Visualization, an
invalid assembly state is reported and you cannot create a new revision. You should always
update image datasets before releasing an operation with associated renamed screen shots
to a workflow.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 12-13

12-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
13. Managing effectivities
Set occurrence effectivity on a process or operation
You can set occurrence effectivity on a process or operation to define the number of manufacturing
units, including end items, for which the process or operation are effective or valid.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and operations, and navigate to the Work Instructions Authoring or Process Planning
page.

2. In the Process tab or panel, expand the structure and select the process or operation for which you
want to set occurrence effectivity and click More → Set Effectivity .

Note:
Alternatively, you can:

• Select multiple processes or operations, and set effectivity for them in a single step.

• Set occurrence effectivity on a part associated with a process or operation in the Parts tab
in the information panel by selecting a part and clicking More → Set Effectivity .

3. In the Set Occurrence Effectivity dialog box, click Create Effectivity .

4. In the Units text box, type start and end units for the operation.

Tip:
When you assign units to the last operation in a series, assign an ending unit value or type
UP. If you do not assign an ending unit value to an operation, you cannot properly validate
occurrence effectivity, because the operation has an infinite ending value.

5. In the Select End Item text box, type a full or partial end item value and press Enter to search for
it.

6. Select an item from the results list and click Done.

Validate occurrence effectivity for an operation

Note:
Before you begin, verify that your data meets the following requirements:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-1

• Operations are created within a process.

• Effectivity is set on the operations for which you will validate occurrence effectivity.

1. Open a work package that contains processes and operations.

2. Navigate to the assembly.

3. In the Process panel expand the structure and select the operation for which you want to validate
occurrence effectivity.

4. Click Validate Occurrence.

5. Analyze the Validate Effectivity dialog box and take action as needed:

13-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

• End Item—Lists the end item currently being used for occurrence effectivity. If more than one
end item is available, click the drop-down arrow to select a different end item for occurrence
validation.

• Summary—Displays an overview of the occurrence effectivity validation for all operations listed
for the selected end item. Hover over a square to display its unit number and information about
that unit, for example, if there is an overlap at that unit.

• Yellow squares indicate a gap in effectivity occurrence.

• Red squares indicate an overlap in effectivity occurrence.

• Operation—Displays an overview of effectivity occurrence for the operation. Hover on an

operation to activate handles. You can drag the handles to adjust effectivity for the operation.

6. (Optional) Click End Item, and select a different end item for occurrence effectivity validation.

Validate and correct occurrence effectivity for the end item.

Note:
When you select a different End Item, Process Planning for ETO prompts you to save any
changes you made to the current end item before you leave its page.

7. (Optional) To switch the effectivity of a single unit, click on that unit.

Use this when you need to:

• Set a new effectivity on a unit that is not adjusted to an existing range.

• Split effectivity on an existing range.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-3

8. (Optional) To switch the effectivity for a range of units, grab and move a handle to increase or
decrease effectivity for a range of units.

9. Click Save.

Note:
The Save button is active only after you make a change on the Validate Effectivity dialog
box.

Manage multiple occurrence effectivities

You can set the occurrence effectivities on processes and operations for several different units.

Note:
If an object or parent object has a status of Released and you change its effectivity, a message lists
objects that must be revised. Click Revise or Cancel.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package that contains
processes and parts and navigate to the Process Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Assembly tab or panel, expand the structure.

3. In the Process tab or panel, select an operation.

4. Do one of the following.

• If you are working in the Process Planning page, in the Process panel, click More → Set
Effectivity .

• If you are working in the Work Instructions Authoring page, in the Editor tab, click More →
Set Effectivity .

5. In the Set Occurrence Effectivity dialog box, select an existing effectivity or click Create
Effectivity .

6. In the Units box, type start and end unit numbers for the operation.

7. In the Select End Item box, type a full or partial end item value and press Enter to search for it.

Tip:
To modify the effectivity occurrence for an end item that is listed in the Set Occurrence
Effectivity dialog box, select the end item and click Edit or Delete .

13-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

8. (Optional) Repeat steps 5-7 to set the effectivity occurrence for additional end items.

Add occurrence effectivities to MBOM container elements

You can add one or multiple occurrence effectivities to manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM)
container elements to elaborate on your revision rules. Occurrence effectivities specify that part element
revisions in an element container element are valid for a date range (for example, October 2, 2024 to
November 1, 2025), a range of units (for example, 8-10 and 12-13 for part unit numbers 8, 9, 10, 12,
and 13), or for a combination of both. You can also edit and delete occurrence effectivities.

1. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the MBOM panel, select one or more container element,
and in the MBOM toolbar, click Manage →Element Effectivity .

2. In the Element Effectivity group, click Add Effectivities , and then add an occurrence
effectivity by doing one of the following.

• Set an effectivity by date.

a. On the New tab, accept the default Date option.

b. To share the effectivity with other manufacturing planners, select the Share check box.

c. Type a name, and from the Start calendar, select an effective start date.

d. From the End calendar, select an effective end date, which must be later than the start
date.

Note:
From the End list, you can also select either UP - All Future Dates or SO - Stock Out.

• Set an effectivity by unit.

a. In the Element Effectivity panel, on the New tab, click Add Effectivities and select
Unit.

b. To share the effectivity with other manufacturing planners, select the Share check box.

c. Type a name, and in Unit text box, type one or more ranges of units (for example, 10-20 or
10-20,25-30).

By default, below the Unit text box, End Item is displayed to indicate that the MBOM root
node will serve as the effectivity end item. You can later edit the unit end date.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-5

d. (Optional) To select a different end item, click Replace and either use the Search tab to
locate a different item, or use the Palette tab to copy an item from the clipboard or select it
from your favorites or list of recently accessed items.

3. Click Add.

The effectivity date is displayed in the Element Effectivities group, and a icon displays next to
the MBOM container element in the MBOM panel of the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page. To view
effectivities for the MBOM container element, hover your mouse over the icon.

4. Add additional effectivities to the container element selected in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment
page, or on another container element using the search option, as directed in step 2.

5. To search for and add a previously defined effectivity, click Add Effectivities and do the
following.

a. In the Element Effectivity panel, click the Search tab.

By default, all effectivities for elements in the MBOM not already added to the selected MBOM
element are displayed.

b. Type a text string in the Search text box to filter the results, and in the Element Effectivity
panel, click Add Effectivities .

c. In the Add Effectivities panel, select a search element and click Add.

The effectivity date is displayed in the Element Effectivities group and the effectivity icon
displays in the MBOM. Hover your mouse over the icon to review the details.

13-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Edit and delete occurrence effectivities from MBOM container

elements
You can edit and delete one or multiple previously added occurrence effectivities from manufacturing
bill of materials (MBOM) container elements, including unit end items (see step 4).

1. On the EBOM-MBOM Align page, in the MBOM panel, select one or more container elements that
contain elements to be edited, and in the MBOM toolbar, click Manage →Element Effectivity
.

2. In the Element Effectivity panel, select the preferred effectivity and click Edit .

3. In the EDIT group, modify the effectivity properties such as names, date and unit range as
necessary.

4. If the effectivity is a unit activity and you want to change its default MBOM root end item, do the
following.

a. In the Element Effectivity panel, click Replace .

b. In the End Item panel, on the default Palette tab, select a different end item from the
Clipboard, Favorites, or Recent groups.

Note:
You can also use the Search tab to locate a specific end item, and then select that item.

5. Click Save.

The effectivity date is displayed in the Element Effectivities group, and a icon displays next
to the MBOM container element in the MBOM panel of the EBOM-MBOM Align page. To view
effectivities for the MBOM container element, hover your mouse over the icon.

6. To remove an effectivity from an element, in the Element Effectivities panel, select the effectivity,
and click Remove .

Understanding effectivity, equivalent assignment scope, and

validation preferences
Overview

Occurrence effectivity lets you configure different revisions of a product part, assembly, or other
element based on time or unit number. Validation in Manufacturing-BOM Manager applies only to
unit effectivity, especially in cases where it is affected by equivalent engineering assignment scope.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-7

When the form, fit, or function of a part or assembly changes, design engineers sometimes use an
equivalent assignment scope from an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to a manufacturing bill of
materials (MBOM) to essentially create a new part or assembly while retaining the base part name.
The equivalently assigned part or assembly is added to the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) with a
limited occurrence effectivity.

Net effectivity calculates the intersection of effectivities set on the path from the EBOM line to be
assigned up the parent chain. Starting from the selected EBOM line, and including the EBOM line itself,
net effectivity traverses up the parent chain until it finds the first parent with an explicitly defined
occurrence effectivity. If an effectivity is defined in the BOM window’s revision rule, the computation
intersects the parent’s occurrence effectivity with that defined in the revision rule. The result of the
intersection is the final net effectivity. The occurrence effectivity defined on that parent becomes the
net effectivity of any instance of the part or assembly assigned to the manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM).

In this example, an equivalent assignment scope has been applied to an EBOM subassembly named
ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly RH-001. The equivalently assigned subassembly appears as a
separate subassembly with an updated number, ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly RH-002.

All parts in ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly RH-001have been assigned to the MBOM under
a different subassembly name, 004133/A;1-MFG INSTALL 06 - 900, that indicates a unit effectivity of
06-900 parts.

The equivalent assignment scope change is reported in the Change Summary panel as a series of
unassigned parts because the EBOM assembly ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly RH-002 has not
been assigned to the MBOM.

To address the equivalent assignment scope change, the manufacturing engineer can select the
MBOM assembly that contains subassembly 004133/A;1-MFG INSTALL 06 - 900, which contains

13-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

the unmodified parts from ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly RH-001 and create a new
manufacturing container subassembly named MFG INSTALL 06 - 901 to be used to assign the
equivalently assigned parts from the EBOM subassembly ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing End Assembly
RH-002.

The engineer next assigns the changed parts from the EBOM subassembly ADE-10008933/A;1-Wing
End Assembly RH-002to MFG INSTALL 06 - 901. If there is no effectivity definition for the parts,
any parts commonly reused across EBOM subassemblies inherit occurrence effectivities based upon net
effectivity. The same applies to parts in the MBOM.

To collect all equivalents of a part in the EBOM and MBOM and verify that all units for those equivalents
have a single valid assignment in the MBOM, the engineer clicks Validate Effectivity Coverage .

A bar chart in the Validate Effectivity Coverage dialog box is displayed. EBOM Range shows the
total effectivity for a specific part in the EBOM by unit. The lower bars display the effectivity for each
occurrence in the MBOM.

The engineer can then drag the start and end points of each MBOM occurrence to modify its unit
effectivity range.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-9

Effectivity validation preferences

Preference Definition
MBMEnableEffectivityValidation Set this preference to true to compare the net effectivity
of a part in an engineering bill of materials (EBOM)
and manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM). If a part
does not have effectivity defined for it, net effectivity is
effectivity defined on the nearest parent.
MBMPropertiesForDashRollEquivalence Defines the list of BOM line properties considered for
finding the equivalent occurrences of parts after an
equivalent assignment in the EBOM. The default values
are bl_item_item_id and bl_plmxml_abs_xform.
MBMRegExForDashRollIdentification Defines the regular expression for the value
of the property defined by the preference
MBM_PropertyForDashRollIdentification below.
The part of the property that should be compared to find an equivalent assignment scope should be
enclosed in parentheses (). The default expression ([^-]+) - \d+ matches all strings having any sequence
of characters except - followed by -, followed by digits. The string matching the expression enclosed in
parenthesis [^-]+ is compared to identify equivalent assignment scope assemblies.

Example:
For the given assembly names Engg_Assembly - 001, Engg Assembly - 002, and Engg Install
- 003, the names that match the default regular expression are Engg_Assembly - 001, Engg
Assembly - 002, and Engg Install - 003. Therefore the part matching the expression [^-]+ would

13-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Preference Definition
be Engg_Assembly, Engg_Assembly, and Engg Install. As this value is same for the assemblies
Engg_Assembly - 001 and Engg Assembly - 002, they are considered the equivalent assignment
of each other.

MBMPropertyForDashRollIdentification Defines the property to identify assemblies with

equivalent assignment scopes. The default value is
bl_item_object_name.

Manage equivalent assignment scopes across EBOMs and MBOMs

Many manufacturing facilities create assemblies with a variety of subassemblies, such as an automotive
roof with one sunroof and another with two sunroofs. Engineers sometimes create equivalent
assignment scopes for units to create a modified part or assembly while retaining the base part. A part or
assembly in an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) might start out with a limited occurrence effectivity
(for example, 80 units). You could then reference a different instance with an additional assignment
scope of 20 units with one subassembly, and 60 units with a different subassembly.

This example shows how to apply and modify unit effectivity in the EBOM and manufacturing bill of
materials (MBOM), as well as how to assign parts across equivalent assignment scopes and align those
parts between EBOM and MBOM. The process starts with a base airplane wing that includes 80 wing end
assembly units to be manufactured. In the image below, LH Wing End Assembly - 00 has an element
effectivity value of 1-80.

You can assign equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to a single MBOM installation
assembly, or assign scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to similar MBOM installation assemblies. This
new capability builds upon other alignment commands in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner
EBOM-MBOM management.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-11

Assign equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to a single MBOM install
assembly

1. In the EBOM, select LH Wing End Assembly - 00, and in the MBOM, select an assembly to which
you want to install its parts (in this example, INSTALL - 10029/A;1-WING), and then click Focus .

Note:
If you have enabled manufacturing check in and checkout, click Check Out and Focus.

The EBOM and MBOM area that you can work in is temporarily reduced to the selected assemblies.

2. In the EBOM, select the parts in the assembly to be assigned to the MBOM, and in the MBOM, click
Assign .

The parts in LH Wing End Assembly - 00 are assigned to INSTALL - 10029/A;1-WING, but the
EBOM displays mismatches to indicate that the MBOM does not share the same effectivity as the
EBOM.

Tip:
If a Net Effectivity Mismatch (Outside Focus) icon is displayed in the EBOM, the icon
indicates that an object is assigned outside the current focus in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment
page. Click the icon to confirm the external location:

13-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The Net Effectivity Mismatch (Outside Focus) feature is displayed only if you or your
administrator have set the value of the preference MBM_HideOutOfScopeIndications to
false.

3. In the MBOM, select Manage →Element Effectivity , and in the Element Effectivity dialog
box, search for and select the same effectivity as that applied to LH Wing End Assembly - 00 in the
EBOM.

4. Click Add, and in the confirmation prompt, click Update Assignment Indication.

Assignment indications in the EBOM update to indicate a full match.

The manufacturer determines that the wings should include two different wing ends, and wants to
reduce the effectivity of LH Wing End Assembly - 00 to 20 and LH Wing End Assembly - 01 to 60.

5. In the EBOM, select LH Wing End Assembly - 00, in the MBOM toolbar, choose Assign
→Element Effectivity , and in the Element Effectivity dialog box, delete the existing effectivity
and either search and locate, or add an effectivity with values of 1 to 20.

6. Select LH Wing End Assembly - 01 and either search and locate, or add an effectivity of 21-80.

The parts in LH Wing End Assembly - 00 are mismatched again, as indicated by the assembly level
partial match icon . This is because the effectivity of that assembly is 1-20, and that of the MBOM
assembly INSTALL - 10029/A;1-WING is still 1-80.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-13

Some parts in LH Wing End Assembly - 00 are commonly used in LH Wing End Assembly -
01. The two assemblies share the same root IDIC, but Manufacturing-BOM Manager is unable to
communicate the net effectivity between these common parts without matching part IDICs.

7. In the EBOM, select LH Wing End Assembly - 01, and in the MBOM, select INSTALL - 10029/
A;1-WING.

8. Select Manage →Align Equivalent .

9. In the confirmation prompt, click Align, and in the second confirmation prompt stating that the two
assemblies are now aligned, click Update Assignment Indication.

The IDICs are now stamped to the common parts in LH Wing End Assembly - 01, on the basis
of each part's item ID and position (in Teamcenter Manufacturing Process Planner, absolute
transformation matrix value). Aligned parts are considered the same part when the system
confirms the assignment state. The EBOM displays full matches because net activity computes
for all parts common to LH Wing End Assembly - 00 and LH Wing End Assembly - 01.

13-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

10. In the EBOM, select the remaining unassigned parts in LH Wing End Assembly - 01 with blank
status icons, and in the MBOM, select INSTALL - 10029/A;1-WING, and then click Assign .

The parts are assigned, but mismatch icons for non-common parts are still visible in the EBOM
assemblies LH Wing End Assembly - 00 and LH Wing End Assembly - 01, because effectivity in
these EBOM assemblies is set to 1-20 and 21-80, respectively, and INSTALL - 10029/A;1-WING in
the MBOM is set to 1-80.

11. In the EBOM, click Validate Effectivity Coverage , and in the Validate Effectivity Coverage
dialog box, drag the start and end points of each MBOM occurrence to modify its unit effectivity
range, and click Save.

Assign equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to similar MBOM installation
assemblies

The process for assigning equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to multiple MBOM
installation assemblies is in many ways the same as assigning equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM
assemblies to a single MBOM installation assembly, but involves creating another installation MBOM
assembly to separately define the two scenarios. This example builds on the example shown above in
Assign equivalent scopes from multiple EBOM assemblies to a single MBOM install assembly.

1. In the EBOM, select LH Wing End Assembly - 01, and in the MBOM, select INSTALL - 10029/
A;1-WING.

2. Click New →Create Based On to create a new manufacturing element based on the selected
element. The root element is duplicated, while the structure under it is reused (referenced).

In the Create Based On dialog box, the ID of the selected element is displayed in the ID text box.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-15

3. To create a new assembly with the ID as the name, leave the Name text box blank; to append
additional text to it, type the text to be appended in the Name text box, and click Create.

Example:
ID = INSTALL - 10052, Name = WING 2; assembly name = INSTALL - 10052 WING 2.

The new assembly is created beneath LH Wing End Assembly - 01 and references the same parts,
with the same IDs and revisions, but does not duplicate the source assembly's element effectivity.

4. (Optional) Change the source and copy the effectivities of assemblies, assign any required
additional parts, and use other commands, such as Align Equivalent and Update Assignment
Indications, to align the EBOM and the MBOM as appropriate.

Update equivalent assignment scopes

Update equivalent assignment scopes to link equivalent MBOM assemblies, connected as assignment
scopes to previous EBOM assemblies, to a newly created EBOM equivalent assembly.

Sometimes an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) assembly is created for a source EBOM assembly
by adjusting the effectivity for new and existing EBOM assemblies. The source EBOM assembly might
have one or more assignment scopes defined in the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), and the
new, equivalent EBOM assembly must also be connected to the same MBOM's assignment scopes.
Assignment connections ensure that the accountability check (assignment indications) between EBOM
and MBOM show the correct results by considering the net effectivity for the nodes assigned from EBOM
to MBOM.

Note:
Equivalent assignment scopes were previously termed equivalent assignment domains in
Teamcenter Easy Plan and Manufacturing-BOM Manager 6.1.3, and dash rolls prior to that release.

Procedure

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to
the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

In this example, the EBOM has two equivalent scopes with different effectivities .

13-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

The MBOM has a manufacturing assembly that was created from EBOM assembly 0123-001.
Because it was assigned to the MBOM from the EBOM, in the Assignment column, it displays the
equivalent scopes from the EBOM assembly.

2. In the MBOM, create a referenced assembly with a different effectivity by doing the following.

a. Select the source assembly, and in the MBOM toolbar, click New → Create Based On .

b. Define a different effectivity.

In this example, a new assembly is created from MfgASM-001, named MfgASM-002, and a
different effectivity is defined: 6-UP (041289). In the Assignment column, MfgASM-002 is no
longer linked to the second EBOM scope associated to MfgASM-001.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-17

3. Select the equivalent EBOM and MBOM assemblies, and choose Manage → Align Equivalent
.

In this example, from the EBOM, you would select 0123-002, and in the MBOM, you would select
MfgASM-001.

4. In the EBOM, locate the second EBOM scope assembly to which the duplicate MBOM assembly is no
longer associated.

In the EBOM, the second EBOM assembly shows a partially assigned status icon , indicating that
it is not associated with all equivalent MBOM assignment scopes.

5. In the EBOM panel, right-click the new assembly and select Update Equivalent Assignment
Scopes .

The system:

Searches in the EBOM for any earlier assemblies that are equivalent to the selected assembly.

Searches the MBOM assignment scopes that are associated to EBOM assemblies, and
associates all equivalent EBOM and MBOM assemblies.

Note:
The system locates equivalent assemblies by verifying that they have identical
absolute transformation matrices. If an assembly does not have a matching absolute
transformation matrix, it is not compared.

Associates each equivalent EBOM assembly with each of the MBOM targets.

In the EBOM, the second EBOM assembly, which previously displayed a partially assigned
status icon , now shows a fully assigned status icon , indicating that it is now associated
to all equivalent assignment scopes.

13-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

In this example, in the MBOM, MfgASM-002 is now linked to the same EBOM scopes as
MfgASM-001.

Enable net effectivity

To enable net effectivity in Manufacturing-BOM Manager, you must create a business modeler integrated
development environment (BMIDE) extension and configure accountability check settings. For more
information, see Configure your business data model in BMIDE in the Teamcenter help.

Create a BMIDE extension

1. In the Teamcenter Rich Client, create a new BMIDE project using the body in white foundation
template by doing the following.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-19

In the Extensions pane, open the User Exits tab and select BOMLine.

On the BOMLine tab, in the Operations and Properties group, expand the Operations
node and select BMF_BOMLINE_compute_net_effectivity.
Expand the Base-Action group and click Add.

2. In the Add Extension Rule dialog box, next to the Extension text box, click Browse, select
FndBOMLINE_ask_effectivity, and click Add.

3. Click Browse again, select FndBOMLINE_ask_effectivity_by_parent, and click Add again.

4. Click OK.

5. Save and deploy the BMIDE project template to the database.

Configure accountability check settings

1. Set the preference MEAccountabilityCheckEnableNetEffectivity to true.

2. In Manufacturing Process Planner:

a. Open the structure you want to configure for use in Manufacturing-BOM Manager.

13-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

b. Select source engineering bill of materials (EBOM) and manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) target objects in the structure views.

c. Open the Advanced Accountability Check dialog box by choosing Tools→Accountability

Check→Advanced Accountability Check.

3. For closure rules, set Source and Target to AccountabilityLinkedAssmOrLeaves.

Note:
You can use custom rules but they should derive from AccountabilityLinkedAssmOrLeaves.

4. On the Reporting tab, set the following display options.

a. Choose Report the selected check criteria and select the Color the compared objects
check box.

b. In the Display Options list, select the Full match, Partial match, Missing target, Missing
source, and Partial Effectivity mismatch check boxes.

c. Select the Consider quantity rollup for multiple match check box.

5. On the Equivalence tab, change no settings.

By default, ID in Context (IDIC) will serve as equivalence criteria.

6. (Optional) On the Partial Match tab, select any properties you want to compare and propagate
from EBOM to MBOM.

7. When you have defined all the settings, click at the bottom of the Accountability Check dialog
box.

8. Add a name for your accountability check settings and click OK.

9. Navigate to My Teamcenter, search for the settings dataset you saved, and note the UID of the
dataset in the Print Object view.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-21

Note:
The setting used by Manufacturing-BOM Manager is based on the preference
MEAccountabilityCheckSettings. If this preference does not exist, create a new site level
preference in which:

• Category = Easy Plan

• Type = String

• Multiple = Multiple

• Values = dataset/setting UID

Caution:
Ensure there are no user-level instances of this preference available in the system. User-level
preference instances take precedence over site-level instances.

Validate effectivity of modified EBOM elements in MBOM

You can collect all equivalents of a part in the EBOM that is reused or assigned multiple times in an
MBOM, and thereby verify that all units for those equivalents have a single valid effectivity assignment in
the MBOM.

13-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Example:
A part or assembly on the left side of an aircraft might have a part identifier such as FRAME1-1
that includes the base part name FRAME and number FRAME1-1. When a design change
occurs, engineering might then use an equivalent assignment scope to change the identifier to
FRAME1-2. This can also apply to assemblies of parts.

1. Open a work package that contains an EBOM with modified parts or assemblies and a
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) that uses those modified elements from that MBOM.

2. In the EBOM, select a modified part or assembly assigned to the MBOM.

3. Select the MBOM assembly to which you want to assign the modified part or assembly
subassembly, click Add Manufacturing Element , and create a new manufacturing container
subassembly to be used to assign the equivalently assigned part or assembly from the EBOM.

4. From the EBOM, select the equivalently assigned part or assembly, and from the MBOM, selects the
new manufacturing container subassembly, and then click Assign .

If there is no effectivity definition for the parts, any parts commonly reused across EBOM
subassemblies inherit occurrence effectivities based upon net effectivity; the effectivity for the parts
in the lowest subassembly inherits the effectivity of the next highest, and upward through the
chain to the highest parent with defined effectivity. The same applies to parts in the MBOM.

5. To collect all equivalents of a part in the EBOM and MBOM and verify that all units for those
equivalents have a single valid assignment in the MBOM, in the EBOM toolbar, the engineer clicks
Validate Effectivity Coverage .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-23

A bar chart in the Validate Effectivity Coverage dialog box is displayed. EBOM Range shows the
total effectivity for a specific part in the EBOM per unit. The lower bars display the effectivity for
each occurrence in the MBOM. To change the end item, from the End Item list, select a preferred
end item.

6. Drag the start and end points of each MBOM occurrence to modify its unit effectivity range, and
then click Save.

13-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Run process data validation checks

You can use the data validation feature with processes in Teamcenter Easy Plan to verify whether
manufacturing processes and operations are ready to be released. If validation results indicate a failure,
you can resolve any errors before you release data downstream.

Note:
Your Teamcenter implementation team creates and maintains validation check tests that are
specific to your environment. The tests shown in this topic are for example purposes only.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and to the Process
Planning or Work Instructions Authoring page.

2. In the Process tab or Process panel, select a process or operation and in the page's top toolbar,
click Open Validation Checks .

The Validation Checks panel opens in place of the Viewer panel.

3. In the Validation Checks panel, click Run Validation Checks .

4. Review and analyze the results, and perform one of the following actions:

• If all validation checks passed, you do not need to perform any further action. The assembly is
ready for release.

• If validation checks failed, you must resolve the failed items for each line. Proceed to the next
step.

Note:
When you select a line in the Validation Results table, additional information is provided in
the Details section.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-25

Information includes the following.

• Test Name—lists the names of tests run on that line.

• Message Type—lists the type of message generated for each test.

• Info—this message type indicates that the test results contain benign information. You
do not need to resolve Info message types.

• Error—this message type indicates that the test failed. You must resolve all errors for
the process or operation before you release data.

• Message—lists detailed information about the test results. Use this information to resolve
any failed validations.

5. Select one line or multiple lines to review and resolve failed validation checks.

13-26 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
Data is synched for the selected line in the Process tab or panel of the assembly. If you are
using validation in the Work Instructions Authoring page, the Editor panel and the tabs
below the Editor panel are also synched.

6. Resolve the failed validation checks.

Most validation checks are in one of the following categories.

• Object-specific—For example, if an object is not released, the check fails. You can submit the
object to a workflow to resolve this error.

• Attribute-specific—These failures indicate that an object does not have required data. For
example, the checks might fail if an operation does not have a find number, or a required
document is not attached to an object. You can use the tabs below the Editor to resolve these
errors.

Tip:
There are more tabs that are not displayed. Click the arrow to expand or collapse the tabs
list.

7. (Optional) Select any remaining lines in the Validation Results table to review and resolve
problems.

8. Click Close Validation Checks .

9. (Optional) Select the original object and click run validation checks again to confirm that you have
resolved all failed tests.

When all validation checks pass, the assembly is ready for release.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 13-27

13-28 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
14. Variants
Variant support
When you author a plan, you can define the product variant to which an operation belongs. Defining
product variants by operation allows you to analyze the entire plan definition for a product. When
variants are defined, you can also filter data on the Line Balancing page.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO supports both classic variants and Product Configurator variants.

Caution:
We do not recommend using classic variants with Teamcenter Easy Plan, because Active
Workspace is dropping classic variant support in version 6.2. If your environment contains classic
variants, please migrate to Product Configurator variants before the Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.2
release.

Note:
If you use variants, the collaboration context and structure can use either classic variants or
variants from the Product Configurator. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO does not support a
mixture of classic and Product Configurator variants.
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO uses variant information (for families and features) from the
configurator context that is related to the root node.

Variant-related terminology in Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO differs depending upon the variant type
you are using. The following table lists variant terminology, based on variant type.

Product Configurator Classic variant

Family Option

Feature Value

Formula Condition

Configure classic variants

Edit variant conditions for an operation

Often, the variant option is defined in the engineering bill of materials (EBOM) or the manufacturing bill
of materials (MBOM). The assigned parts in the EBOM or MBOM contain the variant condition, and they
affect operation applicability. However, if an operation does not have assigned parts, you can set the
variant condition directly on the operation.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-1

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), navigate to a process station or a process.

2. Select an operation.

3. Click Edit Variant Condition .

4. Modify the variants listed in the dialog.

Tip:
Click Add to create a new variant condition.

5. Click Done.

Set the variant condition for operations

You can set the variant condition from the product bill of process (BOP) or the plant BOP. This procedure
sets the variant condition in the plant BOP.

1. Navigate to a process area or process line that contains process stations.

2. Select a process station.

3. In the Operations table, select the operations to which you want to apply the variant condition.

You can also set a variant condition for a single operation.

14-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
If the product operation has a status of released, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO
automatically revises the operation before you can set or update the variant condition.

4. Click Edit Variant condition .

Note:
If one or more operations already have a variant condition applied, the dialog box displays a
warning message.

5. (Optional) Click Add to set additional variant conditions for the operations, and click Done.

Product Configurator variants

Analyze variant formulas defined for an operation

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-3

You can also select and analyze a single operation.

3. Click Open Variant Formula icon.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Review and analyze variant formulas defined for the operations.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

6. (Optional) Click Initial Validation to validate whether defined variants meet the rules.

7. Click X to return to the Balance page.

Define variant formulas for operations

You can add and remove variants from operations in your production plan. You can complete this task
while you work in a process station, or while you work on operations from the line balancing page.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

You can also select and define the variant formula for a single operation.

14-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. Click Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box opens.

Within the Variant Formula dialog box:

• Each operation that you selected is a table column.

• Table cells indicate the status of variant formulas for each operation.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

• The variant families or options are listed as table rows.

• The caret in each column heading opens a drop-down menu with additional options for that
operation.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Click Start Edit .

Click inside a table cell to add a variant formula to an operation.

6. A check mark is displayed in the table cell.

7. (Optional) Click inside a table cell to remove a variant formula from an operation.

8. Click the caret in a column heading to open a menu for that operation, and select an option:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-5

• Split—Creates a second column for the operation, so that you can author variants with an OR
formula.

• Clear—Removes all variants that are defined for the operation.

• Copy—Copies all variants for the operation, so that you can paste them onto another operation.

• Hide Column—Hides data for the selected operation.

This setting is active only while the dialog box is open.

• Freeze—Locks data for the selected operation. Other users cannot change variant definitions for
the operation.

This setting is active only while the dialog box is open.

9. Click Save Edits , and click X.

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns to the Balancing page. The Variant Formula column displays defined
variant formulas for each operation within the station.

14-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Copy defined variant formulas to another operation

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line.

2. Select a station, and then select multiple operations within the station.

Tip:
One operation must contain the variant formula you want to copy.

3. Click Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box opens.

Within the Variant Formula dialog box:

• Each operation that you selected is a table column.

• Table cells indicate the status of variant formulas for each operation.

A check mark in a table cell indicates that the formula is defined for that operation.

• The variant families or options are listed as table rows.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-7

• The caret in each column heading opens a drop-down menu with additional options for that
operation.

4. Click Show Families to expand the Filter column.

5. Click Start Edit .

6. Click the caret for the operation from which you want to copy variants, and select Copy from the
menu.

7. Click the caret for the operation into which you want to paste the copied variants, and select Paste
from the menu.

8. Click Save Edits .

Teamcenter Easy Plan returns to the Balancing tab. The Variant Formula column displays defined
variant formulas for each operation within the station.

14-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Configure variants for a process station

You can view the current variants configured for a process station, and revise the variants defined for
operations within that station.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains
process stations.

2. Open a process station and click the Operations tab.

3. To add variants to a process station, perform the following steps:

• Select variants in the Available product variants list.

Tip:
If the list of Available product variants is long, you can apply a filter by typing in the box.

• Click .

The variants move to the Selected product variants list and are added to the process station.

4. (Optional) To remove variants from a process station, perform the following steps:

• Select variants in the Selected product variants list.

• Click .

The variants move to the Available product variants list and are removed from the process
station.

5. Click Done.

Configure variants for MBOM elements

Add variant formulas to MBOM elements on the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page.

1. Ensure that a Configuration Context object is added to the Product Variants panel of the Manage
Work Package page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-9

Note:
If a Configuration Context object is not added to the work package, the Open Variant
Formula command is not available.

2. On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, in the MBOM panel, select an element, and then click
Manage → Open Variant Formula .

The Variant Formula dialog box is displayed. You can define, edit, and analyze variant formulas
for MBOM elements.

14-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Filter by product variant

Note:
When you filter by product variant, you cannot create cycles for all product variants, or for product
variants that you have filtered out. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays an error message
and does not let you create or update the cycle.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains
process stations.

2. Select a station or process resource for which you want to view variant data.

3. Click the Product Variant drop-down, and select the variant on which you want to analyze data.

You can select Maximum in the Product Variant drop-down list to see the maximum effect of
product variants on each station's cycle time.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-11

Caution:
Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO does not support shared process resources when you apply
the Maximum product variant.

After you apply a filter to variant data, Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO:

• Shows only the stations, process resources, and operations for the specific variant configuration
on which you filtered data.

• Updates total time so it displays a rollup of time for only the product variant on which you
filtered.

• Filters the balancing overview cycle and wait times to show data for only the product variant on
which you filtered.

Compare and propagate variants in the plant BOP

When operation properties change in the product bill of process (BOP), you need to determine whether
to update the plant BOP. Follow these steps to compare only those operations whose product BOP
variant differs from the plant BOP. Then, you can quickly propagate those variant differences to the plant
BOP, if necessary.

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains
process stations.

2. Select a process station and click Balancing.

3. Click Show Product BOP.

4. In the Product BOP toolbar, click Show indication information .

14-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays icons next to operations that are allocated to a process
area in the line you are balancing.

5. Hover over the in-scope partial mismatch indicator and click it, then select Compare with
source in Product BOP.

Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO displays details about the operation. Review new variants in the
product BOP against the current variants in the plant BOP.

6. Select an option:

• Click Update to propagate changes in the operation variant from the product BOP to the plant
BOP. Process Planning for BTO/BTS/CTO propagates the variants, and removes the in-scope partial
mismatch indicator for the operation.

• Click Cancel to keep current operation variants in the plant BOP.

Analyze variant time distribution

You can use the Variant Time Distribution dialog box to highlight problems with product variants. Use
this dialog box to scan all the stations and process resources in a zone or line, and:

• Look for product variants that take considerably more time than the takt time in certain stations or
process resources. These product variants create a bottleneck on the manufacturing line.

• Look for product variants that take considerably less time than the takt time, which means that
station or process resource has capacity.

• Review the probability of the product variants, because problems with common product variants have
a greater effect on the manufacturing line.

Analyzing variant time distribution

1. In the plant bill of process (BOP), open or navigate to a process area or process line that contains
process stations.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-13

2. Click Analyze Variant Time Distribution on the Balancing page.

The Variant Time Distribution dialog box displays a time line that includes a circle for each worker.
The circle location on the time line represents when a worker finishes working with a specific
product variant.

3. Hover over a circle to display a tooltip that lists:

The variant name. In this example, it is LUXURY.

Time required to perform the allocated
operations with this variant.
In this example, it is 30 sec.
Percent probability of the product variant. In this
example, it is 11.93%.
A vertical black line on the chart represents the
takt time for the station.

4. (Optional) Select a circle to see where and when all work for a specific product variant takes place.
This highlights all circles that represent the product variant.

Information displayed on the right side of the chart describes what each circle represents. This is
the same information that is displayed on the tooltip.

14-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 14-15

14-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
15. Submit to workflow
Submit objects to a workflow
You can submit objects to a workflow from several different task pages and their included tabs and
panels. See Submit work packages to a workflow for instructions about submitting all other Teamcenter
objects to a workflow.

Objects that you can submit to a workflow include:

• Processes and operations.

• Process areas and process containers.

• Product bills of procedures (BOPs).

• Plant BOPs.

• Manufacturing bills of materials (MBOM) and their specific parts and assemblies.

Note:
You must have write permissions for any object that you submit to a workflow.
After you submit an object to a workflow, it is assigned a status. Before you can modify an object
or children of an object with a status, you must create a new revision.

1. If you have not done so already, search for and open an existing work package and navigate to a
work package planning task.

2. In the appropriate tab or panel, select the object to be submitted and in the tab or panel toolbar,
click Submit to Workflow .

3. In the Submit to Workflow dialog box, do the following.

a. From the Workflow Template list, select a template appropriate to the workflow task and
object being submitted.

b. In the Workflow Name text box, accept the default object name or type a unique name for
the workflow.

c. If the workflow calls for an assignment, click the ASSIGNMENTS group.

d. To filter the list of users to be assigned to the workflow, on the Users tab, do the following:

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 15-1

A. From the Group list, select a group appropriate to the workflow task and object being
submitted.

B. From the Role list, select a user role appropriate to the workflow task and software
application being used.

C. On the filter text box, type text characters to further limit the list of users.

D. Select the users you want to assign to the workflow by pressing Ctrl and selecting each.

e. To filter the list of resource pools to be assigned to the workflow, on the Resource Pools tab,
do the following:

A. On the filter text box, type text characters to further limit the list of resource pools.

B. Select the resource pools you want to assign to the workflow by pressing Ctrl and
selecting each.

f. Click Submit.

Tip:
A status is assigned to the object. If you try to modify the object or its children, you are
prompted to create a new revision.

Submit a work package to a workflow

You can submit an entire work package to a workflow in Easy Plan.

See Submit objects to workflow for instructions about submitting all other Teamcenter objects to a
workflow.

Prerequisites

You must have write permissions for any object before you can submit it to a workflow.

After you submit an object to a workflow, it is assigned a status. Before you can modify an object or
children of an object with a status, you must create a new revision.

Procedure

1. Search for and select a work package.

2. From the Manage menu, click Submit to Workflow .

15-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

3. In the Submit to Workflow dialog box, do the following.

a. From the Workflow Template list, select a template appropriate to the workflow task and
object being submitted.

b. In the Workflow Name text box, accept the default object name or type a unique name for
the workflow.

c. Click Submit.

Teamcenter Easy Plan assigns a status to the object. If you try to modify the object or its
children, you are prompted to create a new revision.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 15-3

15-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

© 2023 Siemens
16. Work with change notices
ECNs, MCNs, and CNs
An engineering change notice (ECN) records engineering design changes to a product. An ECN identifies
objects affected by a change to parts, operations, and resources, and authorizes actions that address
that change. A manufacturing change notice (MCN) is a kind of ECN that is specifically intended for
manufacturing rather than engineering needs, because of its impact on manufacturing. There are also
general change notice (CN) notifications.

You can create an MCN from an ECN and use that MCN to manage the ECN's impact on manufacturing.
Use an MCN to update changes in a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), a classic or legacy bill of
process (BOP), or a plant BOP.

A minimal workflow may include the following.

An upstream board meeting verifies the need for one or more engineering changes and informs a
lead planner in engineering.
The lead planner reviews each ECN to determine manufacturing impact, creates an MCN from
the ECN, associates the MCN with a work package, and assigns a process planner to make the
necessary updates.
The process planner incorporates the ECN changes that are included in the MCN into the MBOM
and BOP, and verifies that the MBOM has been updated.
The lead planner reviews the changes and releases the MCN and package.

Create an MCN based on an ECN

Resolving changes to a complex manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) can be a time-consuming
process. You can use a manufacturing change notice (MCN) to make it easier to track an engineering
change notice (ECN) in an MBOM.

1. Open the work package that contains the ECN and on the Manage Work Package page, click
Changes .

2. On the Changes page, on the Open tab, in the Change Summary panel, select the ECN for which
you want to create an MCN.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-1

3. In the Change Summary panel, select an object and click Manufacturing Impact .

4. On the Manufacturing Impact of Change page, in the Impacted by the Change list, select a
work package impacted by the change notice, as indicated by a warning indicator , and then click
Create Manufacturing Change Notice .

Note:
You can only create one MCN per work package. If a work package is associated to an MCN,
Teamcenter Easy Plan will display an error message, and will prevent you from associating
another MCN to the work package.

5. In the Create Manufacturing Change Notice dialog box, in the Synopsis and optional
Description text boxes, type the preferred text.

6. Click Create and Submit to create the MCN.

The work package no longer shows a warning indicator , indicating that the MCN was created
and is now linked with the ECN and associated with the work package.

7. Hover over the affected work package and click Open .

The Manage Work Package page opens, with work package details such as structures and tasks.

8. In the Tasks panel, click EBOM-MBOM Alignment.

9. In the Track Your Work dialog box, do one of the following:

• To set the MCN, accept the default selection, Track with this change notice, and select the MCN
you created.

• To skip MCN tracking, select Work without tracking changes.

10. Click Continue.

The EBOM-MBOM Alignment page opens, with the MCN name displayed as an active change
notice above the Change Summary panel, and the affected ECN name displayed below the
Change Summary header. Parts or processes affected by the change notices included within the
scope of the work package that appear in the ECN are listed below it.

16-2 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

11. Review notices in the panel and apply any necessary changes to your MBOM.

12. In the MBOM, select the assembly or subassembly that contains the change and click Revise .

The revision updates to reflect the change (for example, revision A changes to B, and B changes to
C). If you reopen the MCN in the Open tab of the Changes page, the Elaborating section of the
Progress panel displays the effect of the change notice modification.

Align domain subassemblies using change management

You can align changes from an engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to a manufacturing bill of materials
(MBOM) using defined domain subassemblies and the Change Summary panel on the EBOM-MBOM
Alignment page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-3

1. Set domain subassembly preferences.

2. Open a work package that contains at least one engineering change notice (ECN) or manufacturing
change notice (MCN), and in the Track Your Work dialog box, with the Track with this change
notice option selected, select a change notice and click Continue.

On the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, the Change Summary panel displays differences between
the EBOM and MBOM based only on the change notice.

3. Do one of the following:

• To apply an existing focus, from the Focus on list at the top of the Change Summary panel,
select one or more manufacturing installs impacted by the change notice.

• To create a new focus, select the manufacturing installs that you want to focus upon in the
EBOM and MBOM, and click Focus .

The EBOM and MBOM are computed again and items outside the focus of the selected scope are
grayed out. In the Change Summary panel, three groups display: Impacted Items in Focus Scope,
Impacted Items Not in Focus Scope, and Impacted Items Not in Assignment Scope. Tiles display
different impacted items with different statuses in the relevant groups. In the EBOM and MBOM,
assignment status icons are displayed to identify the assignment state of items reported in the
tiles.

4. In the Change Summary panel, verify and apply appropriate changes to the change notices within
the focus scope.

16-4 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Associate a work package with a change notice

To incorporate changes into the manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM) and to ensure that new
changes are tracked using a change notice, you must associate each change notice with the work
package that contains the affected engineering bill of materials (EBOM) and MBOM or bill of process
(BOP). The Manufacturing Impact of Change page lists work packages associated with a selected
change notice that are impacted by EBOM changes.

1. In your Favorites, Folders, or other location where you store your assignments, select a work
package and click Changes .

2. On the Changes page, select a change notice and click Open .

The Changes page displays a variety of panels and provides a Progress bar that details the selected
change's progress (Elaborating, Reviewing, Executing, or Complete). The Change Summary
panel tracks the effect of change notices, and shows changes to revision ID, properties, and actions
that caused it. Under Revision and editable column properties, added and deleted elements are
displayed in green and red.

3. To locate MBOM elements impacted by changes in the Change Summary panel, in the right
toolbar, click Manufacturing Impact .

On the Manufacturing Impact of Change page, a list of work packages is displayed. The work
packages contain EBOMs and MBOMs affected by the changes. A warning next to the work
package indicates that it is not yet associated with the active work notice.

4. From the Impacted by the Change list, select the preferred work package and in the toolbar, click
Associate with Change Notice .

The change notice is associated with the work package and its name is displayed in the Active
Change Notice column of the Impacted by the Change list. The icon is no longer visible.

5. In the Manufacturing Impact of Change page, select the work package and click Open .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-5

Note:
If you did not associate the work package with a change notice in step 4, a message reports
that MBOM changes will not be tracked without an association and prompts you to click:

• Continue Without Tracking to open the package without tracking in the EBOM-MBOM
Alignment page.

• Associate and Continue to apply step 4 and to open the work package in the Align page
below.

The change notice is set to active and the Align page opens with a Change Summary panel
showing individual changes in tiles to the left, and the affected EBOM, MBOM, or BOM to the right.
In this example, the tiles contain more detail on changes in the context of the parent assembly,
including the impact, if any, on the EBOM and MBOM at the bottom of each tile.

16-6 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-7

Using the Change Summary panel

The Change Summary panel can help you decide which changes are updated from an engineering bill
of materials (EBOM) to a manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), as well as how and where they are
handled in the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page. Below are examples of ways you can use the Change
Summary panel.

When you locate a work package that contains change notices, added, removed, and replaced elements,
and other EBOM/MBOM differences, and then open the package in the Align page, the Change
Summary panel reports mismatch indications and change types (Removed, Added, Changed) as
separate tiles.

Red tiles indicate elements removed from the MBOM. Blue tiles indicate elements added to the EBOM
but not yet assigned to the MBOM. Orange tiles indicate a mismatch change. If additional ties related to
the change appear in green below the mismatch (for example, an Ancestor already assigned tie), the
part was already added in the update and you do not need to take action.

16-8 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Note:
You can select a manufacturing install from the Focus on list to view only those tiles that apply to
a specific scope of parts and assemblies in the EBOM and MBOM.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-9

Below are some examples of how to use the Change Summary panel.

Assembly in EBOM is assigned to an MBOM with different revisions

In this example, one part is to be deleted from the MBOM and one added. The results are those that
were displayed in the Change Summary panel of the Changes page.

When you click Propagate in the orange change notice, the notice is displayed as green in the Changes
to Be Handled panel, the partial match is removed from EBOM and MBOM, and the add and remove
commands and revisions are applied.

16-10 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Children of EBOM assembly are assigned to MBOM and EBOM assembly is removed

Many tiles in the Changes to Be Handled panel are displayed at the top of the list in red . The old
assembly was removed but the new one not yet assigned, and the children of that assembly below it are
also displayed in red. Because of the change, you must remove all children. You can remove individual
parts by clicking Remove on each tile, or by clicking Remove All to remove all children of the old
assembly.

Children in two EBOM assemblies are assigned to different MBOM assemblies

Occurrence effectivity changes are reflected in the unit change from 1-999 to 1-50.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-11

Selecting a part in the Standard Wingtip assembly lets you compare effectivity by hovering your mouse
over the Element Effectivity icons available in both EBOM and MBOM columns.

You can click any parts reported as Not Assigned in the Changes to Be Handled panel to review them
in the EBOM and MBOM. When you locate a target assembly in the MBOM and click , verification is
updated and the affected tiles are displayed in green.

16-12 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Verify notices in the Change Summary panel

Use the Change Summary panel to verify and compare elements between an engineering bill of
materials (EBOM) and manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM), as well as quickly apply changes to your
MBOM.

1. In a work package associated with one or more change notices, navigate from the Manufacturing
Impact of Change page to open the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page with a Change Summary
panel.

2. Click a tile in the Change Summary panel to review it in the EBOM and MBOM and apply changes
as applicable.

If the tile is red with a missing in EBOM icon in the

upper-left corner and the indicator Removed in the upper-
right corner to report that the element was removed from
the EBOM:

a. Click below MBOM Instances to highlight it in the

MBOM.

b. Click Remove to take it out of the MBOM.

The tile color changes to green and the MBOM Instances

section is removed to report that the problem is resolved.
If the tile is blue with an unassigned in EBOM icon
in the upper-left corner and the indicator Added in the
upper-right corner to report that the element was added
to the EBOM but not yet assigned to the MBOM:

a. Click below EBOM Instances to highlight it in the

EBOM.

b. Assign it to the MBOM.

The tile color changes to green and the EBOM Instances

section is removed to report that the element is assigned.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-13

If the tile is orange with a revision change in EBOM icon

in the upper-left corner and the indicator Changed in the
upper-right corner to report that an occurrence effectivity
change was added to the element in the EBOM but not yet
updated in the MBOM:

a. Click below EBOM Instances to highlight it in the

EBOM.

b. Click Propagate to apply the change to the MBOM.

The tile color changes to green and the EBOM Instances

section is removed to report that the MBOM element is
updated.
If the tile is orange with a revision change in EBOM icon
in the upper-left corner and the indicator Replaced in
the upper-right corner to report that an element in the
EBOM has been replaced with a different element but not
yet updated in the MBOM:

a. Click below EBOM Instances to highlight the new

part in the EBOM (004836/A;1-LG-000048 in this
example), as well as the old part (004673/A;1-
LG-000048) in the MBOM.

b. Click Propagate to replace the part in the MBOM.

The tile color changes to green and the EBOM Instances

section reports that the EBOM and MBOM elements are
aligned. The names in the Elements column of the EBOM
and MBOM are appended with the text New.
If the tile is green, no action is required. If you prefer,
you can click it to review the element in the EBOM and
perform an action, such as assign a part to the MBOM.
In this example, the indicator Changed in the upper-right
corner reports that the element revision has changed but
requires no change because it is unassigned to the MBOM.

Note:
A green tile with the "Part not assigned yet"
statement in the EBOM Instances section can
also display a change in occurrence effectivity that
requires no change because it is unassigned to the
MBOM.

16-14 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Propagate changes from the EBOM to the MBOM

If you do not use Teamcenter change notices and do not want to use the Change Summary panel,
you can propagate property changes from a work package's engineering bill of materials (EBOM) to a
manufacturing bill of materials (MBOM).

1. Search for and open an existing work package using the Work without tracking changes option.

2. In the EBOM-MBOM Alignment page, identify mismatches using EBOM assembly indications to
navigate through the MBOM assembly until they are visible.

3. In the MBOM, right-click the mismatched element and do one of the following.

• If the revision difference is clear, click Update in EBOM.

• To review the revision difference, click Compare to EBOM.

Note:
• You can also compare the revision difference between the MBOM and EBOM by selecting
the mismatched element in the MBOM and in the MBOM toolbar, clicking Compare to
EBOM .
In the Compare EBOM and MBOM dialog box, the primary revisions of the EBOM are
displayed in green and the MBOM in red. The MBOM revision is struck out to indicate
that the MBOM requires an update.

• If you select a mismatch with an occurrence effectivity change, the Compare EBOM and
MBOM dialog box displays occurrence effectivity differences such as unit or date range
differences.

4. Click Update in EBOM.

In the MBOM, the mismatch icon is removed and the revision reflects that in the EBOM.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-15

Create an MCN based on an ECN

1. Open the work package that contains the ECN and on the Manage Work Package page, click
Changes .

2. On the Changes page, on the Open tab, in the Change Summary panel, select the ECN for which
you want to create an MCN.

3. In the Change Summary panel, select an object and click Manufacturing Impact .

5. In the Create Manufacturing Change Notice dialog box, in the Synopsis and optional
Description text boxes, type the preferred text.

6. Click Create and Submit to create the MCN.

The work package no longer shows a warning indicator , indicating that the MCN was created
and is now linked with the ECN and associated with the work package.

7. Hover over the affected work package and click Open .

The Manage Work Package page opens, with work package details such as structures and tasks.

8. In the Tasks panel, click EBOM-MBOM Alignment.

9. In the Track Your Work dialog box, do one of the following:

• To set the MCN, accept the default selection, Track with this change notice, and select the MCN
you created.

• To skip MCN tracking, select Work without tracking changes.

10. Click Continue.

16-16 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

11. Review notices in the panel and apply any necessary changes to your MBOM.

12. In the MBOM, select the assembly or subassembly that contains the change and click Revise .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-17

Locate processes, operations, and product reviews affected by

change notices
When an engineering change notice (ECN) is issued, you must perform an impact analysis to determine
which processes and operations must incorporate changes from the manufacturing (MBOM) into the
classic or plant bill of process (BOP). You can use this procedure to determine which planning nodes are
impacted by the changes to consumed parts in the BOP.

1. Open an ECN that is actively associated with your structure.

2. In the change notice Overview, in the Change Summary panel, review engineering part status
changes, that is, parts added, modified, removed, or replaced.

3. If you have not done so already, search for and open the work package associated with the
change notice, and navigate to the EBOM-MBOM Alignment, Process Planning, or Product BOP
Authoring page.

4. Select Show Consumption and Impact State .

Consumption indication and impact state icons are displayed in the page's Process panel and show
more detail in the Change Summary panel.

16-18 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

5. Choose one of the following options to research the impacted changes:

• Hover over an indication icon to reveal a dialog box that describes how the object is impacted by
the change.

• Select an object in the Process tab or panel to display detailed information about the object in an
information panel.

For example, if you select an operation in the Process or Product BOP tree, details about the
impacted changes are visible in the Parts tab.

6. Click Calculate Impact on Product Views.

Product views affected by changes to hard callouts, referenced parts, and background parts are
displayed.

7. In the Change Summary panel, review all changes to the EBOM and click Propagate.

The changes are propagated and impact indications are no longer visible.

8. (Optional) Update the structure based on the impacted changes to consumed parts.

You should be able to navigate to task-related pages such as High Level Planning and Line
Balancing with the change notice still active. All actions you perform on these pages, such as
creating, revising, deleting, or cloning object properties, are tracked.

Remove or restore redundant impact indications

Using an engineering or manufacturing change notice (ECN or MCN), you can manually clear impact
indications from assigned parts and product views (PVs) in a bill of process (BOP) if such indications
do not require action. Impact indications might include part attribute changes, part removal, part
replacement, or part revision notices on assigned parts, and PVs that originate from changes to the
associated engineering or manufacturing bill of materials (EBOM or MBOM).

You can also restore impact indications that were previously cleared.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-19

Note:
When applicable, clearing part or PV impact indications also updates relevant impact indications
on the BOP objects associated with these parts and PVs.

1. Confirm that you or your administrator have set the preference

EPC_RemoveChangeImpactIndications to true.

Note:
• If the value of the preference is false, commands and the panel related to this feature are
not visible.

• If you clear the impact on assigned parts or PVs with the preference value set to true and
later change the value to false, commands and panel related to this feature are hidden and
the impact is restored to the associated parts or PVs.

2. Confirm that the preference EPC_RemoveChangeImpactIndications has been added as a value to

the preference AWC_StartupPreferences.

3. Associate a work package with a change notice, open the work package, and navigate to planning
tasks on the Process Planning, Work Instructions Authoring, or Product BOP Authoring page.

If the change notice is active, the Track Your Work dialog box is displayed.

4. In the Track Your Work dialog box, from the Track with this change notice list, select the relevant
change notice, and then click Continue to open that part or assembly in the planning task page.

Note:
Any relevant impact indications are displayed when the BOP opens.

5. Click Show Consumption and Impact State .

Icons for parts impacted by the change notice are displayed in the information panel beneath the
Process panel.

16-20 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

6. Click Calculate Impact on Product Views.

PVs impacted by the change notice are highlighted in orange in the Visuals panel.

7. To clear impact indications from a part or PV, in the Process panel, select an impacted element.

Parts associated with the selected impacted element are detailed in the Parts tab of the
information panel, as in this Process Planning page example.

8. Do one of the following.

• To clear impact indications from a part, in the Parts tab, select the part or parts with impact
indications to be cleared, and in the tool bar, click Set Impact as Handled .

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-21

Note:
• Impact indications on background parts are not currently shown in the Parts tab but can
still impact PVs.

• The Set Impact as Handled command is disabled for parts that are missing in the
source, or if there is no impact on the selected item. The command is also not available
on the Product BOP Authoring page.

Impact indications are hidden for the selected part.

The list of parts for the selected tracking change notice are displayed in the Impacts Handled
panel. This panel displays parts or PVs for which impact indications are cleared in the BOP.

• To hide impact indications from PVs, in the Visuals panel, select the relevant PV and click Set
Impact as Handled .

Note:
PV impact indications may also be due to Product Manufacturing Information (PMI).
Review PMI impact before you clear PV impact indications.

16-22 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

9. (Optional) To redisplay impact indications, in the Impacts Handled panel, select the parts or PVs to
be restored and click Restore Impact Indication .

Note:
Restoring impact indications may update the relevant impact indication on the associated
BOP objects.

10. For PVs, after clicking Restore Impact Indication, also click Calculate Impact on Product Views to
view the restored impact indications to the relevant PVs.

Track manufacturing structure changes associated with change

notices
As a manufacturing engineer or a process planner, you can associate an engineering change notice
(ECN) or manufacturing change notice (MCN) only with manufacturing structures for which you are
planning. Teamcenter Easy Plan uses change notices to locally track manufacturing structure changes,
because any changes that happen outside of your work package are ignored.

1. Search for a work package, and select it from the list.

2. Click a task tile to navigate to a planning task.

Teamcenter Easy Plan displays the Track Your Work dialog box, which gives you the option to
associate the work package with an ECN.

3. Select Track with change notice, select an ECN to make it active, and click Continue.

Teamcenter Easy Plan attaches the ECN to the work package and opens the planning task page.

Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3 16-23

Teamcenter Easy Plan lists the ECN that you applied at the top of each task planning page, and
tracks changes that you make in any of the task planning pages.

16-24 Teamcenter Easy Plan 6.3, EasyPlan/Mfg Solution 6.3

Asd-Ste100 - Issue 9
No ratings yet
Asd-Ste100 - Issue 9
434 pages
Teamcenter Gateway For Enterprise Applications - Connectivity Guide
No ratings yet
Teamcenter Gateway For Enterprise Applications - Connectivity Guide
85 pages
installingTcDc (2412)
No ratings yet
installingTcDc (2412)
310 pages
Cameo Safety and Reliability Analyzer UserGuide
No ratings yet
Cameo Safety and Reliability Analyzer UserGuide
253 pages
4 - Arinc 668
No ratings yet
4 - Arinc 668
58 pages
VPM A320 USER Guide
No ratings yet
VPM A320 USER Guide
251 pages
DS WhitePapers Access and Security Index Concepts and Best Practices
No ratings yet
DS WhitePapers Access and Security Index Concepts and Best Practices
20 pages
DOORS RBE Authors Training v1-2 PDF
No ratings yet
DOORS RBE Authors Training v1-2 PDF
218 pages
Satheeshchandra R
No ratings yet
Satheeshchandra R
4 pages
Teamcenter 13.0 ECAD Quick Tour
No ratings yet
Teamcenter 13.0 ECAD Quick Tour
30 pages
Corporat Plan Ntpc-Final
No ratings yet
Corporat Plan Ntpc-Final
69 pages
Prevention of Heart Disease
No ratings yet
Prevention of Heart Disease
43 pages
Control Plan 1
No ratings yet
Control Plan 1
112 pages
Process Simulate On Teamcenter
No ratings yet
Process Simulate On Teamcenter
2,745 pages
Clearancedb Admin Guide
No ratings yet
Clearancedb Admin Guide
275 pages
Consumer Packaged Goods Install Config
No ratings yet
Consumer Packaged Goods Install Config
28 pages
Odata Api Framework
No ratings yet
Odata Api Framework
84 pages
Design Bom Alignment Admin
No ratings yet
Design Bom Alignment Admin
92 pages
Configuration and Extensibility
No ratings yet
Configuration and Extensibility
456 pages
Getting Started With Customization
No ratings yet
Getting Started With Customization
14 pages
Teamcenter Gateway For Enterprise Applications - Active Workspace Add-Ons Installation and Setup Guide
No ratings yet
Teamcenter Gateway For Enterprise Applications - Active Workspace Add-Ons Installation and Setup Guide
141 pages
Classification
No ratings yet
Classification
90 pages
Server Win
No ratings yet
Server Win
388 pages
Questa Sim Ref
No ratings yet
Questa Sim Ref
1,166 pages
Apqp On Program Planning 1
No ratings yet
Apqp On Program Planning 1
32 pages
Dbom Ebom Alignment Usage
No ratings yet
Dbom Ebom Alignment Usage
60 pages
A320 - Amm - 01-Feb-2023 - List of Abbreviations
No ratings yet
A320 - Amm - 01-Feb-2023 - List of Abbreviations
94 pages
Concept of Operations Concept of Operations
No ratings yet
Concept of Operations Concept of Operations
154 pages
Designs and Structure Management
No ratings yet
Designs and Structure Management
155 pages
Multi Step Nonlinear
No ratings yet
Multi Step Nonlinear
624 pages
Structure Discovery Admin
No ratings yet
Structure Discovery Admin
58 pages
Administrator and User Help
No ratings yet
Administrator and User Help
2,462 pages
Aircraft Build Process
No ratings yet
Aircraft Build Process
45 pages
Managing Preferences
No ratings yet
Managing Preferences
28 pages
Aerospace and Defense Install Config
No ratings yet
Aerospace and Defense Install Config
26 pages
Teamcenter Polarion OSLC Integration 6
No ratings yet
Teamcenter Polarion OSLC Integration 6
77 pages
Mmel A-320 Rev 31 Draft
No ratings yet
Mmel A-320 Rev 31 Draft
452 pages
Cameo Requirements Modeler Plugin UserGuide
No ratings yet
Cameo Requirements Modeler Plugin UserGuide
181 pages
4HANA - SAP Preparation Guide
No ratings yet
4HANA - SAP Preparation Guide
39 pages
Aesqrm010202304 2
No ratings yet
Aesqrm010202304 2
56 pages
Moog AG Aircraft Capabilities Brochure Jun2012
No ratings yet
Moog AG Aircraft Capabilities Brochure Jun2012
20 pages
What's New Teamcenter 2312
No ratings yet
What's New Teamcenter 2312
48 pages
Aiaa S 121 2009
No ratings yet
Aiaa S 121 2009
94 pages
Basic Nonlinear Analysis User's Guide 2024
No ratings yet
Basic Nonlinear Analysis User's Guide 2024
157 pages
iCEcube2 User Guide
No ratings yet
iCEcube2 User Guide
207 pages
Polarion ALM Fact-Sheet
No ratings yet
Polarion ALM Fact-Sheet
2 pages
FACC TakeOff Ausgabe1-12 en 1009 F
No ratings yet
FACC TakeOff Ausgabe1-12 en 1009 F
11 pages
Synthetic Air Data Estimation
No ratings yet
Synthetic Air Data Estimation
110 pages
Ford Specifics For PPAP Jan 2025 FINAL
No ratings yet
Ford Specifics For PPAP Jan 2025 FINAL
31 pages
The Basics of Relational Design
No ratings yet
The Basics of Relational Design
23 pages
Sketcher: Airbus Industrie Manual
No ratings yet
Sketcher: Airbus Industrie Manual
10 pages
AFP Tank
No ratings yet
AFP Tank
17 pages
FAA Aircraft Systems Information Security Protection (ASISP) Overview, Paper #132
No ratings yet
FAA Aircraft Systems Information Security Protection (ASISP) Overview, Paper #132
41 pages
Model Based Systems Engineering MBSE 101
No ratings yet
Model Based Systems Engineering MBSE 101
88 pages
Airbus Incremental Development Guidebook
No ratings yet
Airbus Incremental Development Guidebook
52 pages
The Life of A CATIA V5 CATSettings Admin
No ratings yet
The Life of A CATIA V5 CATSettings Admin
30 pages
E190 MEL-CDL Rev. 01
No ratings yet
E190 MEL-CDL Rev. 01
558 pages
Di Sess 81248B
No ratings yet
Di Sess 81248B
2 pages
Digital Avionics Systems Conference
100% (1)
Digital Avionics Systems Conference
17 pages
UAM ConOps v1.0
No ratings yet
UAM ConOps v1.0
49 pages
Query Builder
No ratings yet
Query Builder
58 pages
Server Customization
No ratings yet
Server Customization
379 pages
Cool Japan Strategy
No ratings yet
Cool Japan Strategy
32 pages
Honka Look Book
No ratings yet
Honka Look Book
29 pages
Assertiveness in The Workplace
No ratings yet
Assertiveness in The Workplace
37 pages
JMR PH 3
No ratings yet
JMR PH 3
1 page
C.O.A - Architects Act 1972: Assignment 6
No ratings yet
C.O.A - Architects Act 1972: Assignment 6
6 pages
Review Unit 3,4,5+ More Exercises
No ratings yet
Review Unit 3,4,5+ More Exercises
2 pages
Abusive and Negligent Principal Facing Criminal Investigation by Henrico County Police - EducationNews
No ratings yet
Abusive and Negligent Principal Facing Criminal Investigation by Henrico County Police - EducationNews
5 pages
19 - 25 June 2010
0% (1)
19 - 25 June 2010
16 pages
Reaction Paper-WPS Office
No ratings yet
Reaction Paper-WPS Office
2 pages
The American Scholar
No ratings yet
The American Scholar
8 pages
LABORATORY
100% (1)
LABORATORY
6 pages
Oratio Imperata
No ratings yet
Oratio Imperata
1 page
IEEE IAPP Data Privacy Engineering Collection Fact Sheet 9.2021
No ratings yet
IEEE IAPP Data Privacy Engineering Collection Fact Sheet 9.2021
2 pages
Dr. N. Sivakumar & Prof. U.S.Rao
No ratings yet
Dr. N. Sivakumar & Prof. U.S.Rao
13 pages
Mencius
No ratings yet
Mencius
23 pages
ROY III vs. Herbosa
No ratings yet
ROY III vs. Herbosa
161 pages
Board Notes Court Procedures
No ratings yet
Board Notes Court Procedures
74 pages
Assignment Strategic
No ratings yet
Assignment Strategic
11 pages
Naveen Kumar
No ratings yet
Naveen Kumar
23 pages
Cash Book & Bank Reconciliation Statement
No ratings yet
Cash Book & Bank Reconciliation Statement
2 pages
Exam Unit 5
No ratings yet
Exam Unit 5
2 pages
Complainant Under Section 35 of Consumer Protection
No ratings yet
Complainant Under Section 35 of Consumer Protection
8 pages
TR - IoT ICT Standards For Smart Cities
No ratings yet
TR - IoT ICT Standards For Smart Cities
146 pages
Mt. Sinai Hospital Kra Pin
No ratings yet
Mt. Sinai Hospital Kra Pin
1 page
PMMA Maritime Law Final Exam Questions 2024 1st Tri
No ratings yet
PMMA Maritime Law Final Exam Questions 2024 1st Tri
2 pages
Gita For Me
100% (1)
Gita For Me
219 pages
Playwright
No ratings yet
Playwright
11 pages
Ref and Reader Services Librarian
No ratings yet
Ref and Reader Services Librarian
2 pages